You are on page 1of 226

Introduction to Wireless

Telecommunications Systems
and Networks,
\,

R/\SHTPEEYA VIOYAlAYI>. COl. LE Gt: OF ENGINEE;~ING L!UR.C,;Cf BAN GALORE

f\ce ~·jo.~~~Q.. C.l. NoP~.<;-S .


y[:,\i~

..I..?

Gary J. Mullett
National Center for Telecommunications Technologie, Springfield Technical Community College Springfield, MA

IV(
II1111I ~\IIIIIIIII\IIIIIII,IIIII'11
58990 . RVCEU 621.38456 MUL

!j

~-'#DELMAR
....

CENGAGE Learning-

Australia • Canada.

Mexico.

Singapore.

Spain.

United Kingdom.

United States

rU\SHTr?EEYA VI Dyr'.tRf A COLLEGE OF ENG!t~EtrilNGUfmN?Y B_ANG".\!..()r?E

ACC No.@.'.$..'tqQ C.L.'·'.


YEAR Preface Chapter 1: Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks l.l The History and Evolution of Wireless Radio Systems 12 1.2 The Development of Modem Telecommunications Infrastructure 1.3 Overview of Existing Network Infrastrocture 24 1.4 Review of the Seven-Layer OSI Model 25 1::S Wireless Network Applications: Wireless Markets 31 1.6 Future Wireless Networks 33 Questions and Problems 33

I~ .,

pq..~S
8 11

'16

:i

, Chapter 2: Evolution and Deployment of Cellular Telephone Systems 2.1 Different Generations of Wireless Cellular Networks 35 2.2 1G Cellular Systems 37 ~~;~~~;~:S:ms 5~3 2.5 3G Cellular Systems 54 2.6 4G Cellular Systems and Beyond 59 1, 2,1 Wireless Standards Organizations 60 'Questions and Problems 61
~:;

34

:,:,.',.,'.'1

I
,:,,',
W
'f;

'T""~

Chapter 3: Common Cellular System Components 3.1 Common Cellular Network Components 64 3.2 Hardware and Software Views of the Cellular Network 76 ' 3.3 3G Cellular System Components 78 .3.4 Cellular Componentldentification 78 '3.5 Call Establishment 83 ii:Questionsand Problems 87

63

.~9U

'<Chapter 4: Wireless Network Arcbitecture and Operation The Cellular Concept 89 ·'h.4.2 Cell Fundamentals 90

88

6 Contents Contents 7 4.3 Capacity EXpansion Techniques 95 4.4 Cellular Backhaul Networks 103 Chapter 9: Wireless LANsfIEEE S02.l1x 9.1 Introduction to IEEE soz.n, Technologies 284 9.2 Evolution of Wireless LANs 284 9.3 IEEE S02.11 Design Issues 287 9.4 IEEE S02.11 Services-Layer 2: Overview 291 9.5 IEEE S02.11 MAC Layer Operations 295 9.6 IEEE S02.11 Layer i. Details 301 9.7 IEEE S02.11 alb/g-Higher Rate Standards 307 9.8 IEEES02.11i-Wireless LAN Security 314 9.9 Competing Wireless Technologies 318 9.10 Typical WLAN Hardware 319 283

4.5 Mobility Management 105


4.6 4.7 Radio Resources and Power Management Wireless NetworkSecurity 114 Questions and Problems _ 115 _ 112

Chapter 5: GSM and TDMA Technology Part I GSM System Overview 117 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5;5 5.6 Introduction to GSM and TDMA 117 GSM Network and System Architecture GSM Channel Concept 126

116

120

Part II GSM System Operations 137


GSMIde!ltiiies 137 GSMSystemOperations (Traffic Cases) 138 GSM Infrastructure Communications (Urn Interface) 165

Questions and Problems 322


157 Chapter 10: WiI'eless PANsfIEEE 802.1Sx 10.1 ·1ntroductionto IEEE S02.lSx Technologies 324 10;2 Wireless PAN Applications and Architecture 325 10.3 _IEEE 802.15,1 Physical Layer Details 332 10.4 BluetoothLink Controller Basics 333 10.5 -Bluetooth Li~ Controller Operational States 341 10.6 IEEE S02_15.1 Protocols and Host Control Interface Hi:; Evolution of IEEE 802.15 Standards 350

Part III Other TDMA Systems 165


5.7 North American TDMA

Questions and Problems 170


Chapter 6:' CDMA Technology

Part I CDMA System-Overview Part llCDMA


6.3 6.4 6.1 6.2

172
177

171

Introduction to CDMA 172 CDMA Network and System Architecture

Questions and Problems 357


Chapter 11: B_roadband Wireless MANsfIEEE 802.16x 11.1 Introduction to WMANIIEEE S02.16x Technologies 359 11.2 IEEE 802.16 Wireless MANs 362 11.3. IEEE -S02.16MAC Layer Details 364 11.4 IEEE 802.16 Physical Layer Details 368 ILS IEEE S02.16a Physical Layer Details for 2-11 GHz 375 11.6 IEEE 802.16 Common System Operations 390

Basics 186
198 211

Part III 3G CDMA 211


6.5

CDMA Channel Concept 186 CDMA System (Layer 3) Operations

IS-95S, cdma2000, and W-CDMA

Questions and Problems 2j8


Chapter 7: Cellular Wireless Data Networks--2.5 and 3GBystems 7.1 Introduction to Mobile Wireless Data Networks 220 7.2 CDPD, GPRS, and EDGE Data Networks 221 7.3 CDMA Data Networks 233 7.4 Evolution of GSM and NA- TDMA to 3G 235 7.5 Evolution of CDMA to 3G 238 7.6 SMS, EMS. MMS, and MIM Services 242 Questions and Problems 244 Chapter 8: Wireless Modulation Techniques and Hardware 8.1 Transmission Characteristics of Wireline and Fiber Systems 8.2 Characteristics of the Air Interface 248 S.3 Wireless Telecommunications Coding Techniques 255 8.4 Digital Modulation Techniques 260 8.5 _ Spread Spectrum Modulation Techniques 264 8.6 Vltra-wideband Radio Technology 266 8.7 Diversity Techniques 266 S.S Typical GSM System Hardware 269 &.9 Typical CDMA System Hardware 277 S.1O Subscriber Devices 279 219

Questions and Problems 395


Chapter 12: Broadband Satellite and Microwave Systems 12.1 Introduction to Broadband Satellite and Microwave Systems 12.2 Line-of-Sight Propagation 399 12.3 Fundamentals of Satellite Systems 402 12.4 Broadband Satellite Networks 408 12.5 Broadband Microwave and Millimeter Wave Systems 416 Questions and Problems 418 Chapter 13: Emerging Wireless Technologies 13.1 Introduction to Emerging Wireless Technologies 420 13.2 New and Emerging Air Interface Technologies 422 13.3 New Wireless Network Implementations 428 13.4' IEEE S02.20/Mobile Broadband Wireless Access 433 )3.5 'Satellite Ventures and Other Future Possibilities 434 396 396

247

246

420

~Ues.tionS and Problems 435


436

Questions CmdProblems 281

Preface 9 This text is unique in that it provides coverage of both major cellular wireless technologies (GSM and COMA), provides the reader with a clearly defined path for the migration from these technologies to 3G cellular, addresses the technical aspects of the' air interface and the special technologies used to achieve high data rates and combat bit errors, and lastly, provides a comprehensive coverage of all IEEE S02.xx wireless network technologies and includes information about mobile satellite technology. Writing a text that covers all of these topics provides an opportunity to point out similarities between systems and to. contrast systems where appropriate. The broad coverage of wireless topics will provide the reader with the comprehensive overview needed to see the big picture of where various wireless technologies and systems are applicable or not. It is also this author's opinion that in the long term these major wireless industry segments will eventually morph into one industry that offers ubiquitous high-speed wileless network access.

./

three;

ORGANIZATION
'.

i
\

AUDIENCE

There are two major technology areas that are covered in this book. The first seven chapters deal with'the rapidly expanding cellular wireless irtdustry. Coverage includes an introduction and review of modem teleconuDunications infrastructure, a s~ort history and review of wireless communications, the evolution of the cellular telephone system, an introtluction to common cellular network components, the cellular concept, GSM and CpMA wireless cellular systems, and coverage of cellular wireless data networks. With cellular w:r~l~ss syste~s now coveredf Chapu:r 8 takes a ste~ back and examines. the wireless channel or so-called arr interface . The effect that a relatively poor-quality channel has on wireless system hardware and the steps needed to provide high-quality radio links are examined. New digital modulation techniques and other esoteric encoding methods used to mitigate detrimental wireless propagation effects are presented . in this chapter and also set the stage fo~ the newer wireless systems introduced in the next four chapters that make use of these new technologles.To wrap up the topic of cellular wireless, typical GSM and COMA . system hardware is presented as the last topic in this chapter. The next three chapters deal with tl\e rapidly evolving IEEE standardized wifeless extensions to LANs, PANs, and MANs. IEEE 802.11, 802h5, and802.l6 are each covered in their own chapter with varying levels of detail. The last two topics are so new that only a limited Dumber of products have been introduced ~nto th~ marketplace. However, it is IthiS,author's contention that these technologies will each play an increasingly larger role 10 the future of Wireless data access and transfer, For the sake of completeness, Chapter 12 provides an overview of ~et another impending wireless' technology: broadband satellite systems. Finally, the last chapter provides a brief glimpse into the emerging technologies that will shape the wireless systems and networks of the future.
. I

APPROACH
lmroduction to Wireless Telecommunications S detailed look at two basic wireless industry segme::~e~s

FEATURES
.
a~d Networks will provide the reader with a

pro~u~e products that provide wireless extensions t~' :i~e~I~~~ss cellular industry and the industries that nectrvity to the Internet. Coverage includes GSM dC E 802.x data networks and Wireless constandards-based wireless LANs PANs and MAN an . OMA cellular systems, 3G cellular and IEEE' reI ti I ." s. Addll10nally a ch ". ' a ve y poor translllission quality of the .;r . t rf ,apter IS included that addresses the comi h '~ ID e ace and the tech . . ommg, a c apter on broadband satellite and . . Diques used to overCOme this short . . micrOWave systems d .' ~merglOg wireless air interface and network tcchn I . : an another chapter that takes a look at hons of wireless systems . '. 0 ogles that will be incorporated in to th . e next genera-

1. The text is written from a systems perspective with very few detailed system block diagrams. 2. The mathematics used in the te~t is limited to algebra, the use of dBs, and various exponentials making this text suitable for use atl the two-year college level. The topic coverage has been chosen to provide the reader with the negessary fundamental concepts and theories needed to understand the operation of cellular wireless systems, broadband satellite technology, and the IEEE standards-based wireless LANs, PANs, and MAfS extension technologies. 3. This text is almost totally devoid of any detailed circuit diagrams. Almost all the topics that are presented in this text are basic fundamental wireless system and network concepts and therefore they transcend the. changing technology that may be used to implement them over 'the course of time. Today, one must deal with these systems from a block diagram point of view-the same approach

10

Preface

taken by thi ...- I . S WOn,. t IS the autho' today and the futUre will be Prim~;

' brf tae~ed an.d observation. that the field and support technician

recOnfig~ration of progr_ble hardw~:ls;;~:~v~uation of system operation and th~ Possib~e ware. This text was written with this i . d. , cons more often than 'he repair of thi hard 4 In su . S IS min . ,'S . , mmation, the style of presentation used' thi .. ~d demon.strates this material in aclassroom~:tti s text closely resembles how the author presents this text Will be helpful to the student that d . ng-at a systems level. It is the author's belief that networks and systems presented here. esrres to,learn about the basic operation of the wireless

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
The Author and Cen DI gage e mar Learning Would like to thank ' .' Herm Braun DeVry U' .D ' the follOWIng reviewers: , ', mvefSlty, enver CO Shakti Chatterjee D V U· . ' , e ry mversity, Columbus OH Felton Flood, DeVry University, Arlington, VA' Mohammad lalali~ DeVry University, Long BeaCh, CA

principal figure in the ~:cal nons T~chnologies located at Springfield Tec:~al°IOcgy Educ:ruon, N"tional I p ementalion of the pac . .. ' IC ommuDlty Coli A .. years as a consultant to local' d .. e-setting Venzon NextStep p ege, bo .. In ustry, Addllionally the th rogram, he has spent a ut his favorite subjects-fu d ' au or has spent over thirt . ,many Wireless technology has be~n7:n~~;:d ad~anced w.ireless COmmunications t~;~:rsteaching students spe?d time listening to the family's v~c I pasbslon of this author since he was a smali child d engmeerin d .. .' . uum tu e, short-wave rec . Th' ' an used to g egrees In mIcrowave and radar techn I eiver, IS passion trans,lated into sev al Th e author can onl h' 0 ()gy and years of w kin ver and translates into ; i~f:rmU:~~::::SiO~1 for this subject matter shows :ou;h ~d ~eachidng iri this. field. easi y understandable work. e rea ers of this text

~~:~~!~:~
Massachusetts For the

ABOUT THE AUTHOR Gary M uller: IS a longtime facult .

me' . y mber at Spnngfield Technical Co

'
.. ~':r~e~~~::~i~::~f:~

..

~~:~=t~~~.~~~a~:t~:n~a~~i::ea~~:e~~a~:~I~:v::

\.tPOI)completion of-this chapter, the student should be able to: • Discuss the general history and evolution of wireless technology from a North American viewpoint and explain the cellular radio concept. • Discuss the evolution of modern telecommunications infrastructure, • Discuss the structure and operation of the Public Switched Telephone Network, the Public Data Network, and the 557 Network. • Explain the basic structure of broadband cable lV systems. • Explain the basic concept and structure of the Internet. • Discuss the usage of the various telecommunications networks and their relationship to one another. • Discuss the 051 model and how it relates to network communications. • Discuss wireless network applications and the future of this technology. Practical electrical communications began in the United States over 150 years ago with the invention of the telegraph by Morse. The invention of the telephone by Bell in 1876 brought with it the first manually switched wire line network. Radio or wireless was invented at the turn of the twentieth century, adding the convenience of mobile or untethered operation to electronic communications. For many years, wireless communications primarily provided entertainment and news to the masses through radio broadcasting services; Wireless mobility took the form of a car radio with simplex (one-way) operation, Two-way mobile wireless communications were limited to use by various public service departments, government agencies and the military, and for fleet communications of various industries, As technology decreased the size of the mobile unit, it became a handheld device known as a "walkie-talkie." .. Further advances in integrated circuit technology or microelectronics gave us cordless telephones during .. the late 1970s that foreshadowed the next wireless advance. Starting in 1983, the public had the opportunity , to subscribe to cellular telephone systems. These wireless systems, which provide mobile access to the public switched telephone network infrastructure, have become immensely popular and in many cases have .even replaced subscribers' traditional fixed landliries. Technology advances and network build-outs have 'increased wireless system capacity and functionality. .. '" TOday's cellular networks provide access to the public telephone network from almost anywhere and <'provide access to the public data network or Internet. In two decades, ce1l phones have become indispensa:';:'ble communications devices and Internet appliances, During the same time period, wireless local area

Wireless Teierommunications Synems ami Networks 13


Antenna Ground . Cut·over Switch Sending Helix

network (LAN) technology has come of age and is gaining in acceptance by both the Enterprise (for profit and not-for profit business ventures) and the general public. Today, many names and apartments have their own wireless LANs. This chapter will present a short history of wireless technology, a brief summary of 1 the evolution and operation of the fixed public networks, a general ide~ of how thes.~ksfit together; , llI}dan overview of how wireless systems connect to this modern infrastructure. Additional topics covered by the chapter are a review of the OSI model, an overview of wireless network applications, and a' brief look at the future of wireless.

1.1 THE HISTORY AND EVOLUTION OF WIRELESS RADIO SYSTEMS


One can trace the evolution of wireless radio systems back to the late 18GOs.In 1887, Heinrich Hertz performed laboratory experiments thai proved the existence of electromagnetic waves,just as Maxwell predicted back in 1865. An obscure inventor by the name of Mahlon Loomis was in fact issued a U.S. patent for a crude' type of aerial wireless telegraph in 1872. Although several prominent inventors of the day (Lodge, Popoff, and Tesla) experimented with the transmission of wireless signals, Marconi seems to have received most of the credit for the invention of radio because he was first to use it in a commercial application, From 1895 to 1901 Marconi experimented with a wireless.telegraph system. He initially started his experiments at his family's villa in Bologna, Italy, He then moved to England in 18% to continue his work. He built several radio telegraph stations there and started commercial service between England and France during 1899. However, the defining moment for wireless is usually considered to have taken place on December 12, 1901, when Marconi sent a message (the signal was a repetitive letter "s" in Morse code) from Cornwall, England to Signal Hili, St. John's, Newfoundland-the first transmission across the Atlantic Ocean. This was accomplished without the aid of any modern "electronic devices"-vacuum tubes and transistors did not exist at the time. . Historical Note: For another view of what actually happened during those early days, read Dr. Jilek Belrose's account of the development of wireless radio at www.radiocom.netlFessendenlBelrose.pdf. ',
Key
Variable jnduCW\ce with Iron Core

Line
. .. 1 1 wireless transmitter.

Figure 1-1 Typ)ca ear y, .' a form of frequency-shift \. as OOK. The Poulsen transmitters used. . the detector of the same . (BASK) , which 'is essenllally the that was recetv ed and .I'nterpreted as a BASK signal by , .' al . keymg (FSK) to translDlt a sign . radio recei ver.

The First Broadcast

conducted expenmen

ts with continuous wave (CW) wireless tr~Sb '1 b General Electric.

Early AM Wireless Systems


A typical early wireless transmitter is shown in Figure 1-1. Note the inductance and capacitance used to tune the output frequency of the spark-gap. The resonant frequency of these two components tended to maximize output power at that particular frequency. Due to the nature of the spark-gap emission, maximum power output typically occurred at a very low frequency with its corresponding long wavelength. Although little was known' about antenna theory at the time, it was discovered early on thai for a conductor to effectively radiate long wavelength signals the antenna had to be oriented vertical to the earth's surface and physically had to be some appreciable fraction of a wavelength. It was common for early wireless experiments to use balloons and kites to support long lengths of wire that served as the antennas. Also at that time it was thought that transmitting distance would be limited by the curvature of the earth. This belief became an additional rationale for tall antennas. The wireless transmitter shown in Figure 1-1 would emit a signal of either long or short duration depending on the length of time the telegraph key was closed. The transmitted signal was the electromagnetic noise produced by the spark-gap discharge. This signal propagated through the air to a receiver located at some distance from the transmitter. At the receiver, the detected signal was interpreted by an operator as either a dot or a dash depending upon its duration. Using Morse code, combinations of dots and dashes stood for various alphanumeric characters. This early wireless transmission form is now known amplitude modulation (AM) and in particular, on-off keying (OOK). The next generation of wireless transmitters used more stable radio-frequency (RF) alternators or highpowered Poulsen spark-gap transmitters for theirsignal sources. TheseRF alternator-based transmitters were used to transmit another form of AM that is sometimes referred to as binary amplitude-shift keying

as

Bnus:g!~:=~;~:t5R!:t::s::::U~e: USingh5~:Zs::!-;~:~:~Yo~l:e::~~~a;lo: ;~uISents':=~:d f enerator was rnuc . ad I ti n HIS expenmen The output of this IYP: 0 g with a continuous form of amplitude m u a 0er radio broadcast. This broadallowing him to eXlj~;;twhen he is credited with transmitti.ng the :rs~:e rit is reported that Fessenden, on Christmas Eve 0 N 'y ar's Eve the following week. Prior to t . S tal station on Cobb Island on the cast was repeated. on .e; eireless spark-gap transmitter at an expen~en age over a distance of 1600 while eltperimentmg WIt a w Ri had successfully broadcast a VOIcemess Maryland side of the potomac ver, , for shi .to-ship and shipmeters on December 23, Navy led a major effort to develop wir.ele~sradl~e rughtof April 14, 1912, During the 19~Os,,the iIi~torical accounts of the sinking of the Tlt~n:: ~:eless operator. The start of to-shore commum~a~ons. f fu ue "SOS" distresS messages by t~e ship d velopment of radio technoltell of the tranS~sslon 0 t art of the decade was also a major dnver of the e World War I dun~g. the las p . r short-wave radio developm~nt. ogy by the U.S. IDlhtary. t 'zed as the decade of high·frequency 0 tl tic radio transmiSSIon The 1920s might wel~,be char~~e~n radio wave propagation revealed that.~~S~t:e same time, vacuum-. During this era. Marco~ s rese~ hi her than had previously been though possi . limit of their operation. was feasible at frequenCies muc g h an extent as to increase the upper-frequency sed to reflect high-fretube technology had imProv: !Oh:~cdemonstr~ that ionospheric lay~rs cou;~:: ~ence allowing for the Radio wave propagauon stu ~ between the earth's surface. and the lono~p ante~as and their application quency waves ba:k and fort d the earth. Other technologICal advances III eanic telephone calls were propagation of radi0t1waU~~s:U::::unicationsa practical reality. By 1926, transoc advancement in radio techhelped make transa an .' The 1930s and 1940s saw more ,. " .availeble via high-frequency radi~ ~~~Io~d vacuum tubes with the ability to generate' IDlcrowaves. ;, nology with the invention of teleVISIOn, ra ,

1:S,

,14 Introduction 10 Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

15

Modem AM
, Am_pli~de modulation is now used for low-frequenc Ie ac radi b . . ;. be~n~s after World War I; short-wavebroadcas~n ~ I!W-d o. ~oadcastmg, whic~~ud Its corpora transffilsslOn; 'amateur and CB radio' and ' . . th gl' efinition (NTSC) teleVISIon video-sign ill ' vanous 0 er ow-profile services N qua ature aniplitude modulation (QAM 0 QAM h' ' ewer uses of AM inclu amplitude and phase modulation (PM) use~ ~~r hi ~a~s a powe.r ~f 2), QAM is a-hybrid form 0 consi~ered a digital modulation technique T d g~ . a trans~sslon at RF frequencies, QAM . less systems to achieve bandwidth efficien~yO ay, Q IS used extensively by broadband cable and wire

it-:;:

achieve higher data rates and better noise immunity. Today, the television broadcasting industry is in the process of transitioning to a high-definition television (HDTV) standard for over-the-air broadcast that uses a digital transmission system. It is not too radical a concept to conjecture that PM broadcasting might follow suit in the not-too-distant future. AIl but the oldest analog cellular systems (these systems are in the process of being phased out) are digital, and all of the newest wireless LAN, MAN, and PAN technologies use complex digital modulation schemes. It may be that analog modulation schemes; with their inefficient use of radio spectrum, might disappear entirely for over-the-air applications in the not-too-distant future!

The Development ofFM'


Major Edwin Armstrong, a radio pioneer who invented first th' receiver in the 1910s, worked on the principles of fr e regeneranvs an~ then the superheterodyn was not until the 1930s, however, that he finally com~~;:~ ant phase mo~ulation starting in the 1920s,ll quency moduJatiOri(FM) broadcasting PM I d '. or on a pracUcal technique for wideband fre g 1970s when technological advances reduced the casunf became popularduriug the late 1960s and earljl , M e COSt0 consumer equipme t d i service. any public safety departments 'I d n an Improved the quality 0,1 ' were: ear y a opters of PM for th . fl ' . II ce d Iar telephone service ,-311 PM base d system, was Introduced in th U eird S COffilIlunications'. AMPS u . eet ' :', use for transmissious in the legacy PM b d b e nite tates III 1983, Today PM is, tr " roa cast 3I1d standard ove th 'TV ansnussion, direct-satellite TV service cordi tI h ' , r- e-alr-broadcasting sound· d bil dio , ess e ep ones and Just ab t .' an mo ne ra 0 service, FM is capable of ich mi ,: ou every type of business band If f muc more noise Immunity th3I1AM d. '' , u ar orm 0 analog modulation. ,,311 IS now the most

The Cellular Telephone Concept


The cellular telephone concept evolved from earlier mobile radio networks. The first mobile radios were used primarily by police departments or other law enforcement agencies, The Detroit Police Department is cited for its early use of mobile radios (beginning in 1921) by numerous references. These one-way ryobile radio systems, operating at about 2 MHz, were basically usedto page the police cars. They did not become operational two-way (duplex) systems until much later in 1933. There was no thought at the time for Ithese systems to be connected to the public telephone system, It was not until after World War Ilthat the Federal Communications Conunission (FCC), at the request of AT&T, allocated a small number of frequencies for mobile telephone service, AT&T made a request for many mobile frequencies on behalf of the Bell tele, phone companies in 1947, but the FCC deferred any action on this request until 1949, At that time, the FCC \ ,only provided a limited number of frequencies that were to be split between the Bell companies and other , 'non-Bell service providers, The FCC apparently felt that since these frequencies were used by the police and fireIpublic service) departments that the public interest would be best served by limiting the number of frequencies' released to this new service. It should be observed that the state of the art of wireless technology at the time restricted the given spectrum available for any new wireless service that might be desired, The mobile phone service thai grew out of these new frequency allocations was very primitive by ' today's standards, It usually consisted of a single, tall, centrally located tower with a high-power transmit. ter that could only service one user at a time per channel over a particular metropolitan area, This also . precluded 'the reuse of the same frequency within approximately a seventy-five-mile radius. Due to the Iimired number of frequency allocations, only several dozen simultaneous users were possible, The capacity of " these systems was quickly exhausted in the major cities by the mid-1950s. Customers of the service paid 'I I d' , db' h I busi extremely high mouth y or year y rates an It was perceive to e a service t at on y a usmess or the wealthy could afford, Arihe time, the available wireless transceiver technology (which usually had to be located in the car trunk due to its bulk) offered no way of reusing the frequencies within the same general 'area or.any Other way of increasing the capacity of the system,

pop-I
:

The Evolution of Digital Radio


.

JI

AT&T '. . , built its original long-distance network from cop . ','I b db d . ,per Wires strung I Th " roa an coaxial cable was tested in 1936 d tho fi .', on po es, e first experimental,,' " , an e irst operahonal L1 t th h p one calls was Installed in 1941 Microwave d' I sys em at could handle 480 tele ial ' ., ra 10 re ay systems dev I di -, coaxr cable systems, The first microwave relay syste ' ,e ope In tandem with broadband 1947 AT&T' m was Installed bet B "I , , s coast-to-coast micro,wave radi I' ,ween oston and New Yorkin, I t hdI 10 re ay system was In place b 1951 ' ,,, ems a ower construction and maintenance costs th ial ,y , MiCrowave relay sys-. I t~e, 1970s, AT&T's microwave relay system c~:;'ed 70~n cfo~xl cable (especially in difficult terrain). By' : VIsion traffic. 0 0 Its VOicetraffic and 95% of its broadband tele-:' ' At th ' e lime; most of these systems used 3I1alog forms of od la .' tion forms like binary frequency shlft keyin" (BFSK) ,m d u lion, although Simple digital modula-' techn I d "exlste Advanc . . ,'The FCC in 1968, in response to the congestion of the presently deployed system, asked for technical o ogy an digital modulation techniques that provide increas d '. es m microwave digital radio,' I ed th se data tproposais fora high-capacity, efficient mobile phone system, AT&T proposed a cellular system, In this ne caus ese systems to. gain jn popularity during th 1970 ' ra es over th e Same radio chan- ; , . , cellular system there would be many towers, each low in height, and each with a relatively low-power and geosYllchronous satellites proved to be disruptive te ehn I ~ and 1980s. However, fiber-optic ,cables radio by the Bell system was concerned M3I1y f th c 10 ogles as far as the use.of microwave digital. transmitter, Each tower would cover a "cell" or small circular area several miles in diameter. Collectively, be ' 0 e ana og and di 't I . .-.' the towers would cover the entire metropolitan area. Each tower or cell site would use only a few of the came bac~p systems to newly installed fiber- optic cable th gr a microwave relay systems in use total number of frequencies available to the entire system. Due to the small cell sizes, these same frequenToday, microwave digital radio systems are enjoyi s or ey were removed from service entirely" point I' ,. u mg a resurgence of s rts Man' ' ',.des could then be reused (hence the term frequency reuse) by other cells at a much shorter spacing than - o-pomt COMecUVItyare employing microwave and mill" to: y service providers qU· previously possible thus increasing the total potential number of simultaneous users within the entire sysus~ the most m,odern digital modulation techru'q',ues to obt';nlmhI,eer-wave radl,o tr3l1smission syste ms that ,"',:, ' . , ~ gh data t I nks "tern. Additionally, as a mobile user (car) moved within the metropolitan area it would be "handed off' from USIng econollUcal ~oint-to-point microwave radio systems to ba kh • ra e I . Cellular operators are, cell to cell 3I1dto different frequencies assigned to the different cells, AIl the cells would be connected to common network interface point from both remote d caul aggregated b3I1dwidth signals to a' provid (WISP) an not-so-remote cell 't W' 'a centra! switch that would in tum connect them to the wireline telephone network. As more users signed VI ers s are using digital radio eqUl'pment desi ned C ' s~es. lreles,s In,ternet sem,ice , Infrastru (u Nll g lor the U li ed ' up for the service and cells became too congested, the' cells could be' split into several smaller cells to cture . ) bands for point-to-point and point-to-m hinol n cens National Information. . increase their capacity. In theory, this process could be repeated many times yielding 3I1 almost infinite Internet connections to their customers. Cordless leleph d u POI~t,systems that provide high bit-rate. J all th ' ., ,ones a opted digltal radi hn '~:6i!(Aumberof potential simultaneous users for a limited number of available frequencies.. In 1970, the FCC e newest WIreless systems 3I1d network technologies ' od ',. 0 tee ,ology yearsago 3I1d,' ::=,',:,',~."""',.,re",."leased,, additional spec'trum foruse by the current.system and authorized AT&T's Bell Labora75 MHz of use m em digital modulation techniques to' ". . .. ' ",;. 'tories to test the cellular concept under urban traffic conditions. In 1971, Bell Labs reported that the test

'I

as

16, huroduaionto

Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks 17


413-589-4321 413-589-4320

!il,

had been successful. The cellular concept worked! In 1974 the FCC released 40 MHz more of spectnim fo, the development of cellular systems.Tn a far-reaching decision, the FCC also determined that both the incumbent Bell Telephone Company and other nonwireline en~ties would share the newly made availabr' spectrum. By late 1982, the FCC started to award construction permits for cellular systems, and .by lat~ ,1983 and early 1984 most major metropolitan areas had functioning systems that supported the user's abif ity to roam between systems. The rest is history. Twenty years later the cell phone has become a ubiquitous information appliance with well over one billion users worldwide.

1.2 THE DEVELOPMENT OF MODERN TELECOMMUNICATIONS


INFRASTRUCTURE
;

413·752-4345 ,[)igital Carrier Loop

The wireless networks and systems that have been rapidly evolving over roughly the past two, decades have' the basic function of connecting users to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) or, more recently; the public data network (PDN). Therefore, it is instructive to examine exactly what these two public ner~ works are and how they have evolved over the course of time. ' , Over the last four decades, several other telecommunications networks have evolved. The SS7 network is a packet data network used in conjunction with the PSTNto establish, manage, and terminate inter-: exchange telephone calls. Broadband cable television networks have been developed for the delivery of video services and more recently high-speed data services (Internet connectivity) and telephony service. The Internet, which is the world's largest computer network, has experienced phenomenal growth over the. past two decades and continues to expand both its reach and high-speed data capacity. Finally, in the United States, cellular telephone networks have become nationwide providing subscribers access to both the PSTN and the PDN.

em.
~

.. ~ ~ ........
" Central OfficeLocal Exchange

413-732-7654

~ ~

---------~
'MDF

= Main

Distribution Frame

413.732-8932 'Figure 1-2 A PSTN intraoffice call through a local exchange,

, The Early Days


Morse invented the telegraph in 1837 and formed a telegraph company based on his new technology in the mid-1840s. The Western Union Telegraph Company was established in 1856 and within a decade bought

the PSTN, it is instructive

to consider the various paihways of communication

available through the

system. CO) bscribe may be connected to the exchange in sevout most of its competitors. Early long-distance telegraPh, systems required many relay points becau,se Sig""", Wi.thin a local exch3 nge o~ c~~panYI ~~~o~ plai:-~~d ~:p:one service (POTS) the subscriber may be h nals had a limited maximum range, In 1867, an improved telegraph relay was invented by Elisha Gray. era! different ways as sown 10 Igure., ,. . . s In this case dialing inforGray's company was bought out by another company that in 1872 became the Western Electric Manufac- . con~ecte(d. th;~~I~rO~:~~!t:~r~~;~:c~e~~~~~~I:~~~i~~:af~~t:~ ~=g 7~sing]) sign~ls 'are thinterpd n:t~ turing Company. Alexander Graham Bell received a patent for the telephone in 1876 and formed the Bell manon via th connection through the SWitch to e esir Telephone Company in 1877. In 1882, Bell bought the Western Electric Company and in 1885 formed - ~!I:~ ~:~.e~ca~~r;n~~~;hi~~O::~o~~~:~~~~,ari~~~g~rCall-Waiting tones, etc.) is sent to the called what was to become the American Telephone and Telegraph Company (AT&T). By 1900, the Bell system served approximately 60% of telephone subscribers in the United States. Durpartlo::~ ~~~r::~~:C~a:~ ~~;:I:r;wo subscribers connected :ir~e :~~~~~~~o::ga;:~es~ft~~~ ing the next decade, AT&T bought out most of its competitors and in essence formed a telecommunications from the subscriber's telephone propagates throu~h the coppe~ ~ I ted (PCM) DSO signal, which gets monopoly. Starting in the late 1940s the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ) sued AT&T for violations of the The line card conve~ the analog Signal to a dlfltaloPn~:~t~d t: ~~ ~o:responding line card of the called Sherman Antitrust Act. This event signaled the start of deregulation of the existing telecommunications ,~ timed through the SWitch In such a way as to e c . f the digital PCM signal from industry. Eventually, other FCC decisions and U.S. government lawsuits resulted in what is known as the ~' party, This counterpart line c.ard performs the complementary con::e~ 0air of copper wires. A separate "Modified Final Judgment," which took effect on January I. 1984. In simple terms, AT&T was required to [ the switch into an analog ~ignal that IS sent to th: cal!~:dPa: ~:~~ne card ~rough the switch to the calling divest itself of all the Bell Operating Companies (BOCs) and the long-distance telecommunications market return path or connection IS also, created fr~m t e ca py site signal conversion functions for this became deregulated, therefore allowing competition. These events, coupled with the more recent Telecomparty's line card. The line cards also provide the nec~s~ary o~r for duplex operation for the duration of ' munications Reform Act of 1996, have helped shape our present-day telecommunications infrastructure. ' return path and together the two paths through the ~wltc provi e b a circuit and is using the resources

II
a

::7:

The Public Switched Telephone Network


In the United States and most other industrialized nations, the present- day PSTN has evolved over tirne tof
become an almost entirely digital network: Deregulation has allowed other competitors to sell telephone] service but they all essentiallyuse the same technology. In an effort to explain the physical infrastructure on

the telephone c~. Sincefthe call. ap~earts to bd~Fc~~:::~D:~~:~=" ~r in particular a "circuit-switched" . of the switch thiS type 0 operation IS erme . ithi th ti I'f the party to be called is connected to a different switch at another exchange WI n e same connec ion. II" bscriber' switch is timed through the calling area (an interomce call), the PCM signal from the ca 109 su sen r s , ed di it I switch in such a fashion that it is eventually forwarded to a multiplexer an~ tben transnutt ?ver a igi a interoffice transmission facility (trunk line). Figure 1-3 shows this typeofmterofficeconneclIon,

·. ---"HfJl£

UJ

wtretess Telecommunications Sy.stemsand Net~orks


Central '.

omICe-- L ocal.Exchange

. (752)

Wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks

19

Signaling System #7 ;>(5,fi&SQ{:OMSjoiJ)· .


L.·'_"_' :;'.~~~~-'~:~.'

;"~~ga~YCfretiitS\Yitch

:' ,~._', -.'".- "':'::_:;;':.~>':~.: .


TDF ~ Trunk Distribution Frame

413-531-XXXX

.~-

I I I I I I I Ilnterexcha.ge '1 Trunk Line I I

,,,.,,.; .,.--l--! .....


h '.

Figure 1-3

AP STN interoffice callover an inter

TDF ~ Trunk Distribution Frame -exc ange trunk line,

The. early PSTN used "in-band" signaling to set up and tear down interoffice and long-distance telephone calls. By this, we mean that the same facilities used to transport the call were first used to create an actual physical circuit for the call to be sent over. A big disadvantage of this type of system is that a voice trunk (an interoffice facility) or possibly many trunks had to be "seized" in order to do the signaling necessary to set' up the call. If the call is nonchargeable (the called party is unavailable or the line is busy); the charges for the seizure of the trunk circuits must be paid for by the service provider that owns the local exchange. Furthermore, this type of system was very prone to fraud since the signaling was performed by sending easily reproducible audio tones over the trunking circuits, As the PSTN evolved into a digital network, for economic reasons and for both efficiency and security, an entirely separate network was created for the purpose of routing long-distance calls (calls between different exchanges or switches), This system of using a separate facility or channel to perform the call routing function is known as "out-of-band" signaling, A\f&T's early out-of-band system was called Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS), With advances il,ttechnology, this common channel signaling system has been adopted by the international telecommunications community for use with both PSTNs and public land mobile networks (PLMNs), Today, it is known as CCIS #7 or simply SIgnaling System #7 (SS7), . The 887 system is a packet network that consists of signal transfer points (STP) and transmission facilities linking the, signal transfer points as shown in Figure I -4, The signal transfer points connect to service switching points (SSP) at the local exchange and interface with the local exchange switch or mobile switching center in the case of a PLMN. The service switching points convert signaling information from the exchange voice switch into SS7 signaling messages in the form of data packets that are sent over the

, This interoffice connection might us nught b ' e SOmetype of T carri tr e, carnedovercopper wires, but most lik I' ,er transport technology (T-I, T-3, etc.) that c:nsp~rlI,ng da~a at OC-I, OC-3, or OC-12 data r e y It. ~11l be some fonn of fiber-optic connection that is ned IS In a dIfferent calling area '(a Ion _ dis ates uSing SONET transport technology, If the party to be ~acketsto a long-distance carrier's multip~exed ';":~ ~all), ~e local switch will forward the caller's PCM co: call. The long-distance carrier's network Wil~c~ ities uSing ,the area code of the called number to direct d' ntry tYpIcally connected by long-haul fibe f /ve switching centers located in different parts of the Istance Carrier's netwprk to the correct local: adcllltes. Once the caller's signal is delivered by the long prOCess that en exchange it is d It' I d . occurs to connect to the called' emu ip exe back to a DSO signal th appropnate ed' h party IS the same as b f The si . ,e be se ' n SWIIc to connect it to the called ". e ore, e signal is timed through the S t up ~nthe call's return direction, . party s line card, Again, a Completely separate circuit will , ubscnbers that live a substantial distanc f . ~::ato a remote terminal that provides an :x;~:e~e 10C~1exchange are Usually connected by copper ex h nge. The remote terminal might use T ' serVIce area at some distance out from the local mers te': :~ge, ,thus extending the digital network f: 0; fiber-optic technology to connect to the local carner service area" to describe the er out rom the switch and also providing the desc ' ti To reca hP area served by the' np rve net p, t e STN consists of COpperpairs th ' remote terminal. Refer to Figure 1-2 again co work that digitizes the signal and then proee at ~ansmlt analog signals from the subscriber to a digital nverted ba k t sses II through d" I ' . wires 0 c 0 an .analog signal and delivered t a IgII~ SWItch, at which point it might be ers ' r, ~er processing by the switch, the si n ,0 another subscnber through another pair of co er an; :~muItIPlex~rs, and various tranSmission ~e::a;s !orwarded ~oa number of digital facilities (midti~~x_ their e of ~ vanety of digital transport technologi ~ trans~t the SIgnal to other digital switches usi~g users ~~::ation and the sequence of operations 'ne::~d f: digital switc~es use stored programs to control ected to the switch or users COnnected t 'th r, the appropnate tranSmission of calls between , 00 er sWllches, Figure 1-4
STP = Signal Traos~erPoints OSS = Operations Support Systems RCL ",'Redundant Communications Links SSP = Service Switching Points

OSS .... -----------1 Mobile Switching I Office :


I I '_'.'" I ~-.._--I I I I I I

The network elements of the 5S7 system.

Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks. 21

SS7 network. All SS7 data packets travel from one service switching point to another through signal transfer points that serve the network as routers, directing the packets to their proper destination. There are several different types of redundant links between the signal transfer points to provide the SS7 network with a high degree of reliability. The SS7 sysiern provides two forms of services: circuit related-the setting up and tearing down of circuits, and non-circuit-related-the access of information from databases maintained by the network (e.g., 8XX number. translation, prepaid calling plans, Home Location Register interrogation). Service control points act as the interface between the SS7 network and the various databases maintained by the telephone companies. The entire network is connected to a remote maintenance center for monitoring and management. This maintenance center is commonly referred to as a network operations center ocNOC. In the cellular telephone system, a service provider's cell sites in a metropolitan area are all connected to switching systems that are all tied to a common switch that is in turn connected to the fixed wireline network. This common gateway mobile switching center (GMSC) uses SS7 to signal between itself and the other switches and between itself and the fixed network, All PSTNs and PLMNs use SS-7 for signaling operations within the network and betwee~ the network and other networks.

The Public Data Network


In the early days of data transmission, thePSTN was used to carry data and it is still used today for this purpose. This was accomplished both then and now through the use of modems. After performing handshaking functions to set up. a circuit connectiori to another modem at a remote location, the modems perform the function of convening data from the host computers into digital signals (audio tones) that can be transmitted across the PSTN. Modem technology has gradually increased data rates close to the theoretical maximum possible through the PSTN switch or the digital network that extends outside the local exchange (recall the remote terminals used by the telephone companies to extend their service area to the suburbs). The physicallirnitation to these modem data rates is in turn driving new technologies such as adaptive digital subscriber line (ADSL) and cable modems to provide high-speed data to the home or business. However, even though data can be sent through the circuit-switched voice network this does not mean that it serves the same purpose or is as efficient as the public data network. The public data network (PDN) has been evolving for many years in response to. the connectivity needs of business, industry, and government for the transport of data over wide area networks (V{ ANs). The PDN is often depicted as a fuzzy "cloud"on diagrams that only show how the end users are connected to it. The reason for the use of a cloud is that the network uses many different types of SONET, transport technologies (T-carrier, xDSL, Ethernet, frame relay, ISDN, ATM, etc.) and physical media to transmit data within it and therefore from end point to end point. The connections to it might be through leased lines (copper pairs), fiber facilities, or wireless radio links using anyone of the transport technologies mentioned earlier. Furthermore, the data network transports packets of data that, depending upon the type of transport protocol, can be.configured in many different ways (size, overhead, etc.) and can take many different routes or paths through the network. See Figure 1-5 for one possible view of the PDN. Additionally, the PDN can support many different types of service structures, including permanent virtual circuits, switched virtual circuits, and semipermanent virtual circuits. These different so-called connection-oriented service structures provide different levels of quality of service (QoS) to tlie customer. The PDN also consists of "connectionless" systems that use connectionless protocols to forward data packets through the network. This type of data transmission tends to reduce overhead requirements and therefore be faster. Finally, many modern networks use a combination of both connection-oriented and 'connectionless protocols to obtain the benefits of both teclmologies. . Private data networks lise all the same technologies .previously mentioned andmay be constructed, owned, and maintained by the user or leased from some service provider. Virtual private data networks

.1

Laptop Corporale VPN Wireless


Hub

~
i.'

I
Figure 1-5

PDA

Proxy
Server Server

A depiction of the public data network.

. ..' the use of a tunneling protocol that effectively use the public data network, mamtammg pnva~~ ~hroUg:on by encapsulating it within the public network conceals the private netw~rk data and protoco m orovided through the use of data encryption and decryp'transmission packets. TYPically, further secunty IS P ,. tion procedures. . in an evolutionary upgrade phase in an effort to p~t)VIde Modem cellular telephone systems are cu?,~nt1y th .PDN Rapidly advancing technology for the implemobile subscribers with high-speed conne.etl vity to ~d' thi·· type of untethered connectivity at steadily . LAN d MANs IS also provr ing s . mentation of Wireless san. 'mber of geographical locations. increasing data rates and at an ever mcreasmg nu

./

22

I _ntro ducuon to Wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks

Broadband Cable Systems


B~adband cable systems have evolved from their earl -. wideband networks designed to dell' 1_ y beginnings to become sophisticated and complex I' ld ver ana og and digital vid . I ' aJ~-o telephone service to the subscriber The . I eo signa s (including HOTV), data, and P stations, satellite feeds of network or di t t-s . video content can come from local 'off-air -television servic e typica 11 connects to an InternIS tan -station program conte n t ,an d Ioca I access facilities. The data . y servi . PSTN. The most important change in ~ slervlce provider (ISP) and telephone service' connects to the fiber _co axia I ca b le system' shown in Figure egacy Th . , e 1-'6 cable-TV plant i s th e migration to the two-way hybrid . . . 870 ~z.' and the use of the frequency spectru~ be~:::dwldth of cable systems has been expanded to transnussion over the network Anothe . _ n 5 and 42 MHz now allows for upstream data opm en t an d standardization of . the cabl r Important aspect to the evol UfIon 0f t h e cable system is the devel ad (DO~S[S) project has led to mUltiple~v:do~~n~;M). Th~.data-over-cable-service interface specificatio~ premise and cable modem terminati operability of cable modems located at the subscribe c te "h aon systems (CMTS) located t th b ., r en rs or ead ends." These systems a1lowfo~ a sh . a e ca le service providers' network work to the Internet (access to the Intern t . . ared high-speed. data connection over the cable net from the subscriber's cable modemto the IS Pbrov~dedat the CMTS) that passes Ethernet packets to an~ becom e JUS one more connection to the e su d .t bli scriber's PC . The m 0 d ern b roa d band cable network has pu c ata network.

1
1I'
,

WITeless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

23

t The Internet is the world's largest computer network. Over the Internet any computer or computer network
maY access any other computer or computer network. The structnre of the Internet is shown conceptually in Figu~e 1-7. It consists of thousands of computer networks interconnected by dedicated special-purpose switches called routers. The routers are interconnected by a wide area network (WAN) backbone. This backbone actually consists of several networks operated by national-serv,ice providers (SprintLink, UUNet Technologies, internet Mel, etc.) These networks consist mainly of high-speed, fiber-optic, long-

TbdDtertret

WAN

haul transport systems that are interconnected at a limited number of hubs that also allow for the connection of regionallSPS.

<~

I
~ r f' ~

I
Figure 1-7 Conceptual structure of the Internet.

Modern two-way hybrid fiber-coaxial cable-TV system with fiber nodes.

These national service provider (NSP) networks are interconnected to each other at switching centers known as network access points (NAPs). Regional ISPs may tap into the backbone at either·the NSP hubs or the NAPs. If an individual wants to connect to the Internet, he or she must usually go through an ISP. The user might connect to the ISP through the PSTN over a low-speed dial~up connection using a modem that communicates with a "modem pool" at the ISP, or through high-speed cable-modem orADSL (adaptive digital subscriber line) service. These services are usually connected through the PON to theoISPo A local area network (LAN) at an Enterprise location will usually be connected to the ISP through some type of high-speed connection to the PON (usually leased from a service provider) and then through the

_ ••••

.,.__

u .. ~..., ..

rY ""~.).)-

.1.

eu;communzcattons Systems and Networks

I
I

Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

25

ii
"

ISP's high-speed connection to the PDN. The ISP will in tum be connected to the Internet through another .' high-speed network connection. Today, one may be connected to the Internet by a wireless device while roaming or while connected to a LAN. Cellular telephones and personal digital assistants (PDAs) allow one to connect through the packet data network. The Web "browser" experience is not the same as with a desktop computer, but it is an Internet connection nevertheless.

Cellular Telephone Systems


-Since their first deployment
some two decades ago, cellular telephone systems have grown at a phenomenal rate. The public has been quick to adopt cellular technology, and the operator's networks have expanded to become national in scope. The technology used to implement cellular systems has also quickly evolved from analog (first generation or I G), to digital (second generation or 2G), to systems with medium-speed data access (called 2.5G). High-speed data-access third-generation or 3G systems are already being deployed worldwide. Cellular operators have expanded coverage and capacity by using new frequency allocations, new air interface technologies, and cell splitting, and they have increased the functionality of their systems by expanding their scope toinclude access to the PDN, as weIl as the PSTN.

1.3 OVERVIEW OF EXISTING NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE


Figure 1-8 shows an overview of the existing network infrastructure in place today, As mentioned previously, wireless telecommunication systems and networks perform the function of connecting to the existing network infrastructure. The three major types of traffic carried by the telecommunications network infrastructure are voice, video. and data (often known collectively as multimedia). The PSTN was originally designed for voice transmission. To provide this function. the psiN was structured in such a way as to provide a circuit-switched path for the conversation, which occurs in real time and therefore requires a certain Quality of Service (QoS). This physical path would be set up during the dialing of the call and torn down at the completion of the call. Supervisory, alerting, and progress tones and signals are generated by the system to facilitate creation of the connection and perform call handshaking functions. The network would take care of authentication and billing functions. Today the PSTN is an almost entirely digital system except for the analog signals that ptopagate over the copper wire pairs that 'provide a subscriber access to the network. The cellular telephone system gives a subscriber access to the PSTN. The fixed network infrastructure developed to transport broadband analog video or television signals to the public is the hybrid fiber -coaxial cable (HFC) broadband cable television network. This system broadcasts the same video signals to all the subscribers connected to the network. A cable modem or set-top box allows the system to provide different levels of access to the entire suite of video signals transmitted over the system. If a subscriber has paid for premium services, these services are allowed to be passed to the subscriber's television tuner or are decrypted if they had previously been encrypted or "scrambled." Through system upgrades and rebuilds and use of the DOCSIS standard, the modern cable television network has become bidirectional, allowing both downstream and upstream data transmission. Most cable operators now offer shared high-speed Internet access over their systems. Presently, cellular systems do not provide access to this network infrastructure. However, one may easily set up a wireless LAN to connect to this infrastructure in one's own home or apartment. The data network was originally developed to carry bursty data traffic for business and industry. As technology has evolved the Enterprise data network has also evolved. Today's Enterprise data networks tend to .. have a wide area network (WAN) or metropolitan area network (MAN) high-speed backbone with a collection of locaiarea networks (LANs) connected to it. This backbone network may be dedicated or switched and might use several different types of data transport technologies. Voice, data, and video can share these

t
,

Figure 1--8

Today's existing network infrastructure.

~ . . ,

i
r
~.

" rivate branch exchange (PBX) is also connected to the hightransport facilities. U~ually, the Enterpnse pernet and the PDN are also interconnected. Some would argue speed backbone as weIl as the PSTN '.The ver IF VoIP becomes more popular that line will blur even more. that they are one and the same! A~ VOIce ov r ( h) Enterprise level through wireless LANs and through Wireless data networks tie into this mfrastructure at t e cellular systems connected to the PDN.

r.

1.4 REVIEW OF THE SEVEN-LAYER OSl MODEL.


. . . s infrastructure it is important to have some knowlAs we move toward a totally digItal. telecommumca~on . del This model describes how information ti n (OS!) re,erence mo . .h edge of the Open System Interconnec 0 ftw application in another computer eit er .. . e computer to a so are . . k. moves from a software applIcatIon 111 on . ti of networks or internetwork. An tmernetwor IS over a simple network or through. a ~o~plex conn~: t are connected together by intennediate network~sually .defined as a con~ti~n of l~dlYl~::::~ras mg devices. To the user. an mterne wor a s~ngIe large network. .

I,

..• _- •• ~W1ltmunzcatio1lSSystems and Networks

Wireless Telecommunicatiom Systems and Networks 27 . Since o~e ?f the major fUnctions of to ' . mSf,;llJedwlreline, wireless coax, day s wueless systems and netw k . PDN), it is very often ins~ctive;1 cable.and fiber-optic telecommUnicationso: ~ IS to link ~he user to the rotocols c~nnections through the OSI modOlexanune that particular interconnection ~n ~struc~ure (i,e., PSTN and though the aS! model provides one with a conceptual structure for the communication of information WIth emphasis on the lower Iaye ef·thTherefore, this section will give a b or er. wireless system inter. rs 0 e model. . ne f Overview of the OSI model. etwee~ computers, it itself is not a means of communication. The actual transmission of data is made posible through the use of communications protocols. A protocol is a formal set of rules and conventions that . The OSI Model . flows computers to exchange information over a particular network. A protocol is used to implement the The OSI reference m d I.. tasks and operations of one or more of the aS! layers. There are many different communications protocols f 0 e ISa conceptual dI . res particular netwo k funcn mo e that consists of se I that are used today for different types of networks, LAN protocols define the transport of data for various r . .I ,. .S tandardization (ISO) m thunchons . The ~o de I was developed ven th I· Each Iayer 0 fth e model spec], ' different LAN media (C AT-n, fib er, WIreess, etc.) and work at the physical and data link leve I . WAN pro198 . b ayers I mtemetwork data commu e . Os, and 11 IS now considered the ma~ e I ?ternatlOnal Organization for tocols define the transport of data for various different wide area media and work at the network, data link, , mcatIOns., The OSI mo del divi ~or arc . . matIon between networked e ivides the tasks th t. IItectural mod e I for network and and physical level Routing protocols work at the network layer level. These protocols are responsible for tasks assigned to each layer comp~Ie~Sinto seven groups or layers of sm:Uare lllvolved with moving infor, exchanging the required data between routers so that they can select the correct path for network traffic. tasks in other layers This allov retlively autonomous and therefore can ~~' mlen manageable tasks. The Network protocols are the various upper-layer protocols that exist in any particular protocol suite. An affecting the other la~ers. Figu:;sl_~r ~hanges or updates to be made to the :: ~mented independently of example of a netwotk protocol is Apple'Talk Address Resolution Protocol (AARP). ! Usually, the seven-layer mod I sows the s~~en layers of the OSI model nons of one layer without \ The upper layers are usually e . can also be diVided into two categori . . Relation of OSI Model to Communications between Systems layers handle data transport i::~OCI~d With application issues and are imesl~ Upper la.yers and lower layers. Infonnation that is being transferred from a software application in one computer through a computer net. ware and software. The lowe eS·1 e lowest two layers, data link and ~ I~ software. The lOWer work to a software application in another computer must pass through the OS! layers. Figure I-I I depicts speCificatIOns)of the actual h aY~r, the physical layer, is a des:Ci Y/Cal, are Im~lemented in hardthis process. ' make up the OSI model. In :s ware link between networks, Figure 1-10 ~~~n (electncal and physical physical layer When discuss: Ie.xt, emphaSIS generally will be on th d s the two sets of layers that ssmg Particular air interfaces. e ata transport layers and on the Network

:m

zr:

OSfModel

DeviceB

I
Figure 1-9 The seven-layerOSI model.

Layer 5 Layer 4 Layer 3

Figure 1-10 Th

~'-~~l
e two sets of layers

~ ~

I ~

FI,... 1-11

Information ~~,

between network "'.k"~

depicted bythe OSf_'

that make up the osr od I


m e.

Referring to Figure I-I I, data from an application in Device A is passed down through the OSI model layers, across the network media to the other OSl model, and up through the OS! layers to the application running on Device B. A closer look at this process might be instructive. The application program running on Device A will pass its information to the application layer (Layer 7) of Network Device A. The application layer of Device A will pass the information to the presentation layer (Layer 6) of Device A. The presentation layer then passes the information down to the session layer (Layer 5) of Device A and soon until the information is finally at the physical layer (Layer I) of Device A. At the physical layer level, the information is placed on the physical network medium and transmitted (sent) to Device B. The process is reversed in Device B with the information being passed from layer to layer upward until it finally reaches the application layer (Layer 7) of Device B. At this point, the application layer of Device B passes the information on to the application program running on Network Device B.

-rrvlOJ,.,J

UIlU

I.vetworks Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks h 29

More OSI Model Detail


In general, each OSI layer can cornrnum . di tl bo . umcate With thr t:;:~S: aFi;:~t, 1~~~t;~;~s~i~ectly equi vale~t to it~~t~~::r ~~~~: i:h~h!a~~ directly below it, the laye, provided by these layers The s a~ers co~umcate with their adjacent Ia ers er networked computer sys., allow a given OSI layer ~o conu::::t:~i:~d~d nected to the network.
I

by ~e adjacerit layers in Ythe ~S~:d~~e:::e .ser:ce s equivalent or peer layer in an th esrgn to o er computer system coni

Layer.1'

Layer 5 Layer 4 Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer I

FigUre 1-13

The process of data and header encapsulation during information

exchange over a network .

non IS passed down from one la e an mstructlOns that are sent to peer OSI la . n. r~m upper y r to the next the dd d yers As the inf . considered by the next layer to also be data. Thi a e co~troIinfonnation from the prior la .annat ISprocess wh h yer IS now a as encapsulation. Figure 1- I3 depicts thi . '. IC may be repeated several times' D IS through the seven-layer OSI model Note h s encahPswation process as infonnation is passed"d re erred and th " I . ow eac new head . dd own ward necti c orrgma data. Eventually, the entire assembled data u 'te~ IS a to any previously added headers Ion.. m IS transnutted via the h . P ysicaj network conInformation Exchange

,· ~ I.. ~~E,~;r.=!~:~~~~2~~;:'~';~:;~~~~S;:~~~': ,:, ::P::~:~::e:~ ~::v::lli:;t: I =


i
t

. i

Figure 1-12

OS!

d II rno e ayers communicating

with oth

I er ayers.

at The seven OSI layers use different forms of control 'info"

Computer System B receives the data packet and forwards it to the data link layer of System B. The data link layer of System B reads the control information contained in the data packet, strips this information from the packet, and forwards the remaining data packet to the network layer. The network layer performs the same type of pro cess, reading the control information meant for it, stripping this information from the data packet, and forwarding it upward to the next layer. This process is repeated by each layer until finally the application layer forwards the exact same data packet sent by Computer System A to the software appli-

As a final wrap-up to coverage of this topic, this section will present an' overview of each OSI model layer. Where possible, examples of typical layer implementations will be presented.

At this point it would be instructive to give :~:e:~~~:lj~~~pu;er s~stems that are both c::n:~:~~ aO!e~~o;;ti~: process of information exchange

Layer 7-Application Layer The application layer is closest to the end user. By that, we mean that the OSI application layer and the end user both interact with the software application that is running on the computer. Some examples of application layer implementations include File Transfer Protocol (FrP) for file transfer services, Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) for electronic mail, Domain Name System (DNS) for name server operations, and Telnet for terminal services. . Layer 6-Presentation Layer The presentation layer provides a variety of conversion and coding functions that are applied to application layer information/data. This is dune to assure that information sent from the application layer of one machine is compatible with the application layer of another machine (possibly a different type of computer system). Some of the types of coding and conversion that are performed are common data representation formats (st-andard multimedia formats), conversion of character representation formats (e.g., EBCDIC and ASCII converted to a syntax acceptable to both machines), common data com-

~i~1ab~I!~:~~ ~ay:%~~~~ol~:;;~n! t~P~~~:~i~~rl:;::e::d~·;~ec~:fi~:nnnu~:ti~~~~~::) ~:~~;~:;:::~: . pp icanon layer in Com t S a on to the data pa k th mformation and data) is forwarded to th . pu .er ystem B. The reSUlting infonnati k c et at ~~r the presentation I::;;:t~o~~~::re~~~~p~es~tation laye~ now :~:sa:u;'r~u~: a IOn packet IS forwarded t h . s process IS repeated s aI packet grows in size as the re uired c . 0 eac '. su~ceeding lower layer. At each I ~ver m?re the entire data packet is Place~ t ;:ntrol infonnation IS added to the packet F" all' ayer the mfOnnatlOn . on o : e network medium. Refer to Pi l' ID,)' at the physical layer Igure -13 ~gam. The physical layer of :::~i~:~~:~:

pression schemes (e.g., GIF, JPEG, and TIFF), and common data encryption schemes.

In each

case, the use

of these presentation layer coding and conversion functions all~ws data from the source system to be properly interpreted at the destination system.

..

_---- ...

__

._ ..

_.--

..

_-----_

..... ....

_----

i..

""

Introduction to Wlrekss Telecommunicatwns Systems and Networks

ess Layer 5-S ion Layer . The session layer has the task of establishing, managing, and terminating co
nications sessions Over the network. An example of a session layer implementation Session Protocol (ASP) from the AppleTalkprolocoJ suite.

, .. Wireless Telecommunications S']Sterns and Networks 31

is

the AppJeT

.: 1 5

ORKAPPLICATIONS, WIRELESS MARKhTS


WIRELESS NETW. . . th

Layer 4-Transport Layer The transport layer accepts data from the session layer and then segments data in the proper manner for transport across the network. Since the transport layer is tasked with deliv' ing the data in proper sequence and in 'an errOr-free fashion, flow Control is implemented at the transpo! general public WIth ~ hex~::: ;ersonal communications servl~es (~Cd~) phones that offer voice, data, .YO'. PIow 00",,,,1 d"" -~",i," "",~OO '"'k" Virtual circuits are se 'P an ": ceUular telephone. WIt n . the potential for a new generation 0 . rg tiate between cellular and PCS down by this layer, error checking and correction is executed, and multiplexing may be performed. F . ferent frequency band, ther~~~er However, there is actually little to dlffe~:al_ and tri-mode phones) in. an iar transfer protocols are Transfer Control ProtOcol (TCP) and User Datagram ProtOcol (UDP). and fax services to the subs . rs are offering both (subs~bers .have. lans with an ever increasing service and most network operato Most operators are offenng nal10nW~de p iented market has evolved Layer 3~Network Layer The network layer isolates the upper OSI layers from routing and switching fun effort ;0 achieve better coverage. ection time per dollar. The newer ata-~nl hone data-oriented martions in the network. The functions within the network layer create, maintain, and release connectio number of minutes of system ~o~~ technology. More recently the ~~llular e ::d multimedia messaging between the nodes in the netWork and also manage addressing and routing of messages. A typical netwo around the Internet and comput a in service (SMS), instant messa~m~ (IM)ThiS shift has been noted by .layer implementation is Internet Protocol (IP). With!P, network addresSes may be defmed in such a way th ket has been driven ~y ~hort mess ger ~ovel entertainment- type ap.ph~al1ons. 10 ment on entertainmentroute selection applying the subnet mask. tion address andcan be detemrined systematically by comparing the source network address and the destina. service (MMS) a~PhcaI10:::~~~evelopers and is focusing ap~ICal1~:nd:~:d~y gaining in populanty

traditional voice-oriented • . t basic categones. e b the . es have evolved into wo .. an amazing acceptance y The markets for wireless servic t d market. The first market has enjoyed onnection to the PSTN via market and the newer data-on~n ~ast take-up rate for the ser:ice offered-~e:s being built out on a dif-

m,,,,,.., the

i~~t

Layer 2-Data Unk Layer The data link layer provides for the reliable transmission of data across a pnysi.
cal network connection or link. Different data link layer specifications define different network an Protocol characteristics. Some of these characteristics include physical addressing, error notification, network topology, sequencing of frames, and flow control. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) has subdivided the data link layer into two sublayers: Logical Link Centro] (LLC) and Media Access Control (MAC). The LLC sublayer ci the data link layer manages Communications OVer a single link of a network. The MAC sublayer of the data link layer manages Protocol access to'tlie physical network medium. The lEEE MAC specification defines MAC addresses. This specification allows multiple devices to be uniquely identifiable at the data link layer.

both service providers an f the cell phone. Wireless LANs ave d ds that provide for the use of or "infotainment" -based uses o. nd home use. The adoption of new stand~t'ons of a fast uptake rate for & both Enterpnse a I d to many pre ICI ff f te and acceptance ror d higher data rates have e th . networks to 0 er as r . d frequency bands an as they evolve err new unlicense t" I threat to the cellular operators . the marketplace. this technology and a poten ia MANs and PANs are starting to be seen in .data rates. I n addition , WIreless II

V"",

'. the early 19705 at AT&T's wireless networks "8M in earnest during .0 ,,",1~ svstems W~ The development of vOlce-o~:n:;:quency division ~ultiple acces~ (FD8~~~ :e A~vanced Mobile Phone Bell Labs. The technology. he United States until muchlat:r m 19. a ear earlier in 1982 as the

.' NetworkEvolution

..

Layer I-Physical Layer The physical layer defines the electrical and mechanical specifications for the physical network link. Characteristics Such as voltage levels, timing, physical data rates, maximum distance of tranSmission, and physical connectors are all part of this specification for wireline media. For fiber-optic . media iimil~ ica tions exist rOC the "" of OO"",,k __ "'lmology ""Ploy" (FDDI. ATM,

,,,,,i£

SONET, erc.). Usually, physical layer implementations can be categorized as LAN, MAN, or WAN speci~l' fiCations., For cell,ular wireless networks, characteristics such as frequency of Operation, channel format, modulation Iype, timing, hopping sequences, Coding, and other technical specifications are grouped under, the term "air interface" and depend Upon the Particular cellular system being diSCUSSed.Today the most promi_, ph",", in the and pobli"",,,,, of coIlW" ar the E"",p." munications Standards lnstitute (ETSl), the Telecommunications Industry ASSOCiation(TIA), and the two Third-Generation Partnership Projects: 3GPP and 3GPP2. _ For wireless LANs (local area networks), PANs (personal area networks), and MANs (metropolitan area networks) the IEEE produced the IEEE 802.lIx, 802.l5x, and 802.l6x specifications (respectively) to cover the particular technology implementation. The physical layer also defines the procedural and functional specifications for activating, maintaining, .and deactivating the physical link between the deVices Communicating over the network systems. DUring the discussion of various wireless systems and networks in other parts of this book, the operation of these systems will at times be illustrated through the relationship of the Particular operations with the layers in the OSl model. For most of these illustrations, the lower transport layers will be of most importance and the physical layer will USUallyreceive interface that differentiate these various systems. the most attention since it contains the details of the air

'"cl",_

,_ti"",

T<"",m-f','
W

developed but not d.ep~Oye~I~:ms were deployed in the No:dlc C?~I;:IlUI~ networks were starting. to Sy stem (AMPS). SImIlar, ( y At about the same' time, digi ally became the Global h NMT) system. " p that eventu . Nordic Mobile Telep th ony S ' ial Mobile standardization grou . tt mpt to deal with interd Groupe peCI. GSM The GSM group was f 0rmed m an a Thi led to a new digita I e .. be developed un er e .. . '1 C unicatrons or. U 'on countnes. IS . System for Mobi e ~mm ious problem for the European . ru . GSM) that was deployed In . national roaming, which w~: ~;~MA) second-generation techno~ogy of cellular telephone use~s time division multiple acce . . late 1992 At present approxrmate y ity a digital North Amenmany parts of the world beginmn~:nUnited Sta~es, in an effort to in~r:ase cap,: w~ a hybrid air interface are serviced by GSM syste~s. Ind d'I'n the early 199Os. This new dl.gltal syste standard TDMA IS-136, . TDMA was intro uce .. ItS successor , h can version of d- eneration technology. At this lime,. I . 9% of all cellular telep one that used both first- and .secon g of over 100 million users or appr?~~ate yulti Ie access (COMA) techh as a worldwide subscnber base th llular mix has been a code diVISion II) d rd now has a worldwide . try into e ce . 1995 this stan ar . d t users. The most recent e~ d I yed in the United States In , I digital cellular (PDC), IS a First ep oveu.. dard persona nology-base sys em. '11' sers An additional stan ,. I 60 million users; however, . subscriber base 0 f over 170 nu It also has a subscriber base 0 f app roximate ysystems and shift to CD MA d d IOn u . PDC Japanese TDMA-based stan ar I' d announced plans to phase out their

?';i%

some Japanese operators have a rea y

to the wireless voice net-

. . systems. cellular technology,. cord Iess te lephones be ong . which provided a wife Iess Although notrod high profile. as . troduced in the late 1970s, these deVIces: tant commercial success . as IS also First In, , • "became an ins PCS work class of p uc ho e handset to a fixed "base statron, early 1980s and the concept of the connection from the telep on I hones appeared in the . dizit I cordless te ep r. Second-generation .lgI a '. h Although there have device evol ved. in the early .199~~.the next generation of residential COrdleSSt~;~;sn~'ave become a major A PCS service was consider ld .de none of the PCS s been some deployments 0 f PCS systems wor WI ,

Wireless Te!ecommuntcatlOlIJ
_ _.•••v~u",""

..

S terns and Networks


'is

33

ro wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks

i~~!:i~:~eC:!~~~~~eU:::!~~ ~:l:rnmunication infrasu;uc~:o:~at~t possibly use di~erent dete: :cu~~:r;~ mobility and high data . ent service provLders: ne . it Mobile IP Will allow o~ 0 , loss of connectivity or Data Network Evolution diff~r Internet without Iosmg co~nectlv ~;le in motion. The user will not no~e::n before the installation The concept of data-oriented wireless networks started in the 19708, but development did not start ,. t~te:ccess either in a f1X~ 10C:~~en;n;itions or the type of wirel~: ~~~o~~s~ speeds (over 100 mbps) .earnest until the early 1980s. Amateur radio operators had built and operated simple wireless packet ra ' r hang in service regard ess 0 me commonplace, 4G systems W! . this author, believe tha~ al~ost e networks earlier, but commercial development of radio-based LANs did not begin until 1985 when t ~f 30 cellular systems h~S ~~:IeSS research community. Man~nc;u:;: of wireless telecommUnications . FC~ opened up the industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) bands located between 920 MHz and 5.85 G being discussed by t e ':"1 wireless in the future. eu I .to the public. During the early 1990s the Institute of Electrical Engineers (IEEE) formed a "working group ate t the Internet Will become \ all access 0 ars to be unlimited! to set standards for wireless LANs. The IEEE finalized the initial 802.1'1 standard in 1997 for operation' technology appe . 2.4 GHz with data rates of I and i mbps.· '. ,l S AND PROBLEMS . Advances in wireless LAN technology have been occurring at a rapid pace. The IEEE 802.llx family 0' QUESTION . deseri tion of the theoretistandards has been expanded to include operation in the 5-0Hz U-NIl bands with data rates of up to 54 . b t Mahlon Loomis. Wnte a short P mbps through the use of complex digital modulation schemes. h f .nformatlOn a ou . dd 1. Do an Internet se~rc or~1 aerial wireless telegraph sys.tem.. I experiments. What frequenCIeS I d The IEEE has adopted two other families of standards, IEEE 802.ISx for operation of wireless personal cal operatlqn of his paten ~ f rmation about Marconi's fnst Wifeess area networks (wireless PANs), also known as Bluetooth, and IEEE 802.16x for the operation of wireless Do an lnternet search for In 0 riments1 mitter that he used at Brant metropolitan area networks (wireless MANs), also known as broadband wireless access. A greatdeal of 2. MarCOnifirst use for his ;ir~l~s;~~: antenn~ for Fessenden's. 50-~HZ ~~~~ernet search for information promise lies in these new standards and the technologies that will be used to implement them, but only 'time 3 Determine the length 0 a I 'gth of the antenna he used? ~In~: 0 ~ of light and f is the frequency. will tell if they will enjoy widescale adoption. • Rock What was the actua e~ ts Hint·).. = df where c ISt e spe h t date is HOTV broadcasting . 'I expenmen.· . HOTV By w a ' There are parallel development activities occurring in Europe under the European Telecommunications about Fessenden sear y h he deployment of over-the-alr . Standards Institute (ETSI) for high-speed wireless LANs that appear to have characteristics similar to 4. Use the Internet to researc ted? . IEEE 802.llx-based products. The ETSI HiperLAN/2 standard specifies operation in the 5-GHZ band and ex ected to be totally deploy . I? . tic lacility? Alter multiplex\i1gto ophandled by an OC-3 facility? also has the same maximum data rare-of 54 mbps, More detailed coverage of these topics is given in Chap5 w~at is the data rate of a 050 signa transported by an OC-3 hber . h how many 050 ca 11 scan . of D50 calls that can e ters 9 through 11. . Mobile data services were first introduced in North America with the ARDIS project sponsored by , 6. ~~h:~risn rate,s,~~:~~St~~:s~ra~!~~a:i~a:;~I~vera SS7 ~ansf~; ~:~~Iar telephone service extends the Motorola and IBM in 1983. Mobitex (an open version of ARDIS) was introduced in 1986 and then in 1993 ~ 7 . What ISthe typlcah' h spee d ca ble modem, xOSl servIce, cellular digital packet data (CDPD) service was introduced in the United States. Both ARDIS and MObi_\ 8 Describe how a Ig LAN) . II network ( . tex are based on proprietary packet-switched data networks. Mobitex service is still available from Cingular PDN. the extent of a oca area ork (MAN). Wireless in the United States with data rates of about 8 kbps. CDPD serviceaUows cellular systems to deliver packet data to subscriber phones albeit at low data rates (generally below 19.2 kbps). Currently there exist several data-only wireless operators. Data speeds over these networks range from less than 2.4 \ 11. In your own wo , I tion process in the context 0 12. Describe the enca~su a flow control occur? kbps for two- way paging applications to 19.2 kbps for the fastest systems. Note however that these peak 13 At what OSllayer oes MACsublayerl .' rf 1 I data rates do not translate into real throughput rates. These values are typically 50% of the peak rate. i 14: What is the lunction o~thethe specifications lor the .wireless ant~~;:ine the present total number 0 General packet radio service (OPRS) with its slightly higher user data rates of 20 to 50 kbps has been I 15 Which 051 layer provl bes't devoted to the GSM mdustry an I available over OSM systems since the early 2000s. OSM systems are implementing EDOE technology t 16' Go to an Internet We Sl e d determine the percentage 0 (2.50 to 30) worldwide to achieve enhanced data rates. EDGE stands for Enhanced Data Rate for Global I , worldwide GSM subscrib.ers voted to the cellular telephone indu~t7(~SM NA-1DMA, COMA, PDC, Evolution. The first operational CDMA systems offered data throughput rates to 14.4 kbps. The second ~ le 17. Go to an Internet W~~tte ntemajor cellular telephone technolog , dd phase of CDMA systems (IS-95-B) offer higher data rates (up to 56 kbps), The evolutionary pathway to subSCribers for the I ere f h lEEE802.11 wireless LANstan ard· third-generation (30) CDMA systems includes a phasing in of greater packet data transfer rates. The first k the status 0 t e . p's amen etc.). . eI standards Web site. Chec f f the IEEE802.11 working grou implementation phase (offered in 2002) of 30 is known as cdma20001xRTI and offers packet data rates Go to the I£EEWlr ess h port on the state 0 one 0 18 , paragrap re cf up to 144 kbps with real throughput rates of from 60 to 80 kbps. Write a short one. f inment use. . Cellular service providers are spending a great deal of money to upgrade their systems to offer higherments. to 802.~ \" telephone use that would be consi~:~ an I~;~ble over wireless LANs.Comment speed data throughput rates to and from the PDN, as well as continued traditional access to the PS1,'Nvoice 19. DeSCribea ce u ~r \ telephone data transfer rates WI ose network. Future plans for. all cellular technologies include upgrades to 30 technologies with even higher 20. Compare 3G ce u a~ . t1 standard data rates and increased mobility. Wi:ll the public desire these digital services and subscribe to on t\:Iedifference. Is It Importan . them? Only time will tell .

commercial success or a competitor to the cellular telephone systems. In the. United States the PCS b have been put into use, but the PCS standards were not adopted for use in these bands. As mention before, most operators are using the PCS bands for cellular service and to fill gaps in their coverage area ..

1.6

~ TTURE WIRELESS NETWORKS


l' U

; £ seamless connectivity. It eared toward the·~oncept 0 . the installed

presen~~~;:~:.=!o:~t~~~~i~~:::i~:;:~:sb~:'i~~t

~:1~:

be

1~:z:~:~ ~~

:~~1~ ::o~r~~~~~~~{S~~· ~:~l;:.~~: ::~~~~:


d

.#'¥

~,--

J,

L __

Evolution and Deployment of Cellular Telephone Systems


-

35

~
..

',-",

.'

"'

;',,':

'''\;;
.-,-,'

:f,:c,;c}.i 7':" c
. , ~. c

,,'. ,'; "

')M~;~ti.:Jf~;'

subscriber devices within different systems, in different locations, and increasingly in worldwide roaming situations. ' This chapter will attempt to give the reader a feel for the fundamental nature of wireless cellular systerns. This will be accomplished by providing an overview of the various generations of mobile cellular systems, the new types of technology involved, and a detailing of the steps entailed in the standardization, adoption, and deployment of these new generational systems. Some details of the evolution to third-generation systems and predictions about the fourth generation of wireless are given, but as always, no one can predict the future, Only time will tell how it all plays out

2.1 DIFFERENT GENERATIONS OF WIRELESS CELLULAR NETWORKS


Aside from use by the military and transportation industries, some of the first strictly land-based t,.o.way mO?i1e radio systems commence~ o~ration in the ~IY 19~Os in the United S~tes. These systemf were typically used for fleet commumcations by the public service sector (e.g., police and fire departments), Operating in atime division duplex mode, one mobile radio user at a time could talk and then use two-way radio jargon toindicate who should speak next or if the communication was over. Then in 1946, AT&T and Southwestern Bell conimenced operation of a mobile radio-telephone service to private customers in SI; Louis, Missouri. The system operated on a small number of channels licensed by the FCC in the 150·MHz . band. It was ndtuntil1947 that AT&T, on behalf of the Bell Operating Companies, petitioned the FCC for additional radio frequency spectrum meant for use by a mobile radio system that would connect the user to tbe public switched telephone network. The FCC granted the use of a limited number of channels for this application in 1949. At the time, the FCC felt that the interests of the public were better served by the legacy public land radio services than public use of this new service proposed by AT&T. As it turned out, this new technology, known as mobile telephone service (MTS), was extremely popular in large metropolitan areas and its capacity became totally exhausted by the mid·1950s. Technical improvements like automatic dialing were quickly added to the MTS system making the system easier to use and more transparent to the user. The cellular telephone concept that had first been put forward in the late 1940s received minimal research and development effort during the 1950s, primarily due to the FCC's continued reluctance to increase the amount of available spectrum for MTS use. Even so, the cellular concept and possible models for its implementation were the subject of several internal Bell Laboratory technical memoranda in the late 1950s that later served as the basis for several publicly available journal articles published by the Institute of Radio Engineering (IRE) in 1960. Even though the Bell system petitioned the FCC for, additional spectrum for .the MrS system in 1958, the FCC did not act on the request In 1964, the Bell system began to introduce Improved Mobile Telephone Service (!MTS). This new service allowed full duplex operation (i.~., both parties could talk at the same time) and provided for automatic channel selection, direct dialing, and more efficient use of the spectrum by reducing channel spacing, However, !MTS did not increase the capacity of the system enough to meet the public demand, It should be pointed out that the other providers of mobile radio services, the radio common carriers (RCCs), which owned half of the available mobile frequencies, constantly opposed the Bell system's requests to the FCC and in essence helped delay the implementation of any new high-capacity technology. Ultimately, ten years later, in 1968, in response to the backlog of requests for MTS and lMTS service, the FCC asked for technical proposals for a highcapacity and efficient mobile phone system to augment or replace the current system. , AT&T proposed a new mobile phone system using the cellular concept. Through the use of small coverage areas or cell sites, many low-power transmitters would be used to provide coverage to a metropo' area. Furthermore, the use of low- power transmitters with their limited range would allow for the r' the scarce number of radio frequencies or channels available to the entire system on the basis 0' shorter spacing than previously feasible with earlier systems. Additionally, the system would i'

Upon completion of this ch h • Discuss the concept of :~tedr:~ e student sh?uld be able to: •D ne evol'ltion and edeplo megenerations of WIreess cellular Systems, IIIerent 'I ISCUSS t • iXPla!n thheb~sic operations anlstru~~u~~ :I;:I~~ ~elilluir systems on a worldwide basis, • xp am t e difference between a lG 2 e u ar systen, • Discuss the different subsc ib .' G, a.nd 2,SG cellular system. • D' h n er services available 0 2G ISCUSS e characteristics of 3G ' I t ,ver mobile systems. • Explain the concept of 4G I WIreess mobile systems. . WIre ess, • ExplaIn the function of standards hod', res, , The wireless mobile industry started ma could support These fi . ny decades, ago with systems that th ' ..

~:~::~:l~;:~:::~~::~~~yru:~~d~:mthl~~~~~~e~~~~~~~:~:~~o~:~~2~I~i~ffi~:~~:;~~~~~~;:' kets As ti 0 ma e ese systems ex . ,lClent ~tg~=c~::~~!:~:~;~~~~~~~I~~~~oi:~;~:~~~~

transrrusslOn

systems. New, more ef~~i::r~tc d~.~elephone system became available ov~~~:~~: ~d rel~abiIity..Eventu. the start of cellular service in ~e cellular .telephone systems evolved from th: cap~cIty mobIle r~dio expansion of cellular service th t h OIled States Slightly over twenty years ago th hearlier systems. Since These systems have und~ a as r:sulted in nationwide networks that off, 'b e~e ~s been a tremendous and in tum gained remar~~~e generatIOnal changes that have improved their er;t VOiceand data services. over a billion subscribers wo I~ a:~eptance by the general public. Today mo:'; o~ance and potential Uses Recently, other wireless teleo e. ,. ' I e ce ular systems have well ecommUlllcatlOns one to be connected to the Inte systems and networks have be ' wireless local area network e met or ~ome other data network through a wi I come ~vaJlable that aIIow mobile information societ ,~uI:ment ~s growing at a very rapid pace The .ess deVIce: The market for imprOving. y IS ecommg more widespread and . , v~slon of a WJrelessly ena,bled more obtamable th ' , , The wireless mobile indu ...., . " . as ec nology keeps Iod ' s••J IS standards based Th ay s global marketplace. In today's SOCiety, th~re i~ :e~or a standards·based industry is dictated b erent need for the interoperability of use~

e:

~~;o~ef:~i;l::~::i!~~;~:::~!:tt:::S:b~~

u::

sen er moved about the metropolitan

process by which the mobile subscriber would 'be "hand d ib ' . e area.

ff"

as needed to

. a new cell SIte as the sub-

Evolution and Depluyment

of Cellular

Telephone Systems

37

In 1970, Bell Laboratories, under authorization from the FCC t d' ' systems operating in the Newark, New Jersey and Balli 'p M' este Its cellular concept with prototype or that its tests had proven that the cellular con~ept work: -.'th ;;Iand, areas. In 1971, Bell Labs reported , 197~, the FCC released some 40 MHz more of frequency s :ctr:~o: t:: small as 2.8 miles in diameter. In ulation-based cellular systems. There are reports that in 1876 545 develo.pment of early analog modsystem mobile phones and a waiting list for this service had dver 3;;~t~:ers ID New York City had Bell 1978, a trial cellular telephone system known as the Ad d M' rnes on H. After more delays in . '. ' vance obile Phone S ' into operation In the Chicago area by JlJinois Bell and AT&T . ystem (AMPS), was put g Shortly thereafter, a service test with real custom d uSldn th~ newly allocated800-MHz band , ers was con ucte and It d th ' tern could work. Worldwide commercial AMPS de I ~ II . prove at a large cellular sysThe i , P oyrnent ,0 owed qUICkly b t . e impending breakup of the Bell system and th FCC' .' u not In the United States' , e s new CompetItio . ' cial deployment. Finally, in 1983, commercial AMPS 0 ration be ' n r~uuement delayed commer, In July of 1983, the FCC released BUlletin No 53 ir:,m th In the ~mted States, , This bulletin, titled "Cellular System Mobile Stati~ri-Land St:tion ~e of S~I:~ce and Technology (OST). the core specifications and thus became the definingstandard for theOmpatlbIllty Specifi~ation," provided developed to ensure the compatibility of mobile t t' ith anv AMPS system. This document was ' ' Ions ' States. To ensure compatibility, it was essential ths a both WI any cellular sy s tem operatmg in the United t di . a ra paramet d . d ures b e specified. Release of this document thus heralded to-system'of th ce the start ers an c~l-processing pro-

functionality or applicationsbuiIt into the system. The ability to provide medium- to high-speed data access to and from the public data network over a cellular telephone system has resulted in a half-generational step that is presently referred to as 2.5G (halfway' between second- and third-generation technology), The next generation of cellular telephones with functionality that meets the recently adopted 1MT-2000 (International Mobile Telecommunications-2000) standards are referred to as third-generation or 3G technology. Many are already referring to cellular telephone systems with more advanced functions and near asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) data transfer speeds as 4G technology!

2.2

IG CELLULAR SYSTEMS

0;::

or standards-based technology for the development of ad II I . e use of technical specifications E Ii . . m ern ce u ar radio, ' ar rer, an AMPS system With eighty-eight cells began " rdi , operation In Toky . I N o IC countnes of Norway, Denmark Finland adS d "1 0 mate 1979, and in the -. ',n we en a SlID! ar analog b d . . hrstgenerauon or IG cellular system was put int t;' 198 - ase ,volce-onented AMPS, , 0 opera Ion in I with t th ' were experienced in the United States This first mit' ti I II I I ou e bureaucratic delavs that . mauona ce uarsyste known a '" T elephone (NMT) system, used the 450-MHz band uand i di t Ibm, own as the Nordic Mobile' e The rest of the world was not Waiting for the Unl'tedmmStt la e y ecame extremely popular, ' t . a es 0 create a univ I ' severa I different systems evolved in different tech I ' II d I ersa standard and therefore ·h . no ogrca y a vanced areas f th d us ed s IIg t1y different technical implementations ad f . 0, e worl , These systems e. hei n vel)' 0 ten used different . spec tru m ror t err first-generation systems The use f diff f portIOns of the frequency , '0 rerent requency band ' d country has Its own frequency administration agenc dh d d's IS ue to the fact that each f . h' Y an a rna e previous freque 'all ' or various ot er legacy radio services or spectru tili h ncy ocanon deciSions . rn u I izatron sc emes These d " on use of the particular service only within the individ al try 'th' ecisrons were USUally based ' coun ~ , O nIy In recent years when the World Administrsr] I U di C fWI out reg ar d ror use In other countries R di , ve a 10 on erence has th . ' coor matron started to result in the almost harm ' f ,me as worldWide spectrum, the ss , onious use 0 several diffe tb d ' e same mobile service, In many instances howe I ,ren an s of radio spectrum for , ver, egacy uses of vanou di . th·' unr versal use of much of the radio spectrum N e rth I th s ra 10 services still preclude d ired b ' d' ' eve e ess, ere are usuall fJ ' em an s that nations can free up for the same t f di Y requencles close to the other countries worldwide. ype 0 ra 10 technology and service offerings as most The legacy of this reality is still with us today as several romi t fi systems still maintain popularity around the globe Thi d P nunen irst- and second-generation cellular ' ' rr -generanon or 3G sy t to bnng thc world closer to a universal standard in th .f s ems are theoretically going away e near uture, but most feel that day is still . I many years As new technology has been deployed to upgrad II I ' ' , ch e ce u ar system capacity d fun . srve te nology changes have been designated as 'new ti I' an nClionaIity, comprehengenera rona systems Di";tal I' genera IIy re~erred to as second-generation or 2G tech nolo . The GSM . e- modu anon Schemes are pean countries and now worldwide is considered a s gdY . system fust deployed in the EuroTDMA .. ' econ -generauon technol . or IS-136. Within a particular generational' techn I' th ,ogy as IS North American to the standard to reflect the use of newly evolving technology ere freq usually many updates and changes o ogy, new uency spectra all" ', ocanons, and new

As previously mentioned, the first analog-based, voice-oriented cellular telephone systems, which became available in other countries during the late 1970s to the early 1980s and in the United States during 1983, are now referred to as first-generation or I G cellular technology. This chapter will provide an overview of the characteristics and operational aspects of these first-generation systems. While there are several other types of first-generation systems, most of this chapter's coverage will be devoted to the AMPS technology first deployedin the United States, Although the requirement to provide support for AMPS technology is now due to be phased out in the United States by 2007,.it is instructive to look at the technical characteristics of AMPS because all succeedirtg generations of cellular telephone systems have evolved from this earlier technology.

Introduction
All first -generation cellular systems used analog frequency modulation schemes for the transmi ssion of voice messages with two separate bands for downlink (from base station to mobile) and uplink (from mobile to base station) transmissions, This type of system is known as frequency division duplex (FDD). Also, within these two separate bands, frequency division multiplexing (FDM) is used to increase system capacity. The exact characteristics of the audio channel frequency response, other audio-processing details, and the allowed transmitter frequency deviation were defined by the particular system standard. The channel spacing was typically set by the appropriate regulatory agency (the FCC in the United States) as were the allowed frequency bands of operation (channels), Identification (ID) numbers were assigned to the cellular system (SID) and the subscriber's device (mobile transmitter or handset). These ID numbers are used to' determine mobile status (within home area or roaming), to perform authentication of the mobile, and to define the mobile's telephone number for correct operation of the network. The system standard further defines physical layer technical parameters such as maximum permissible power levels, audio preemphasis standards, and maximum out-of-band emission levels. Most importantly, the standard sets the required procedures for the operations between the mobile subscriber's device and the cell site transmitter or base station. The standard also prescribes the required protocols and signals necessal)' for the successful exchange of messages retween the mobile and the base station that will implement these operations.

AMPS Characteristics
The AMPS system began operation in the 800-MHz bandwith the eventual following frequency assignments, The downlink or forward band was from 824 to 849 MHz and the uplink or reverse band was from 869 to 894 MHz. The channel spacing was set at 30 kHz arid each base station's transmit and receive fre, was separated by 45 MHz. The FCC introduced competition into the mobile phone arena by the allotted frequency spectrum into "A" and "B" bands. The A band, was allocated to one service and the B band was allocated to another service provider within a specific serving area, These

""'"
...,fplf.~

'

- 7==;-. ...

a- J " t . .L ... J ."" He Wor"" serving areas were created . '1 and were kn pnman y from statistical data from th V S own as cellular market areas (CMAs . . e '. Office of Management and Bud et g ~TAs and MTAs. In the vast majority of th ) smular ~othe concept of basic and major trading areas Incumbent Bell Telephone Company (assigned ~~e m~k~t areas, one of ihese service providers was t;;AMPS Channels anne s m the B band by default). e Iniiially, the A and B b d Ab . an s both consisted.of333 ch' . . and were traffic channels (TCHs) used for . anne!s. ~f these 333 channels, Channels 1-312 . :e::t :Sp~nfidor slystemallcontrol Unctions. These 2~o:~~~ncbher s eJscalls, channels 313-333 in the AI~a~~ f and c ear c sand oth ann are used b th bil for control channels and h ~r network operations such as handoff Th Bye mo I e and base station added for use by the syst~m~~s 355--666 fortr~c Channels. An additio:al band used channels 334--354 total of 416 traff d the channels agam evenly split b 5 MHz of spectrum was later . . IC an control channel' etween the two 0 t '. Iize the control Chan' I' n h s per Operator (see Table 2 1) Th pera ors. This Yielded a . e s In w ateve th .,... e system ~c:>up the voice channels and ass .r way ey deem~ost appropriate. Theref . ~perator.s are able to utitlveness of the system. cerate each group With a particular control ham III m~st cases, operators c annel to mcrease the effecTable2-1 T hi . a e of AMPS channel numbers and fr .
equenCles.
".

38 Int,.pductiontc JIIj. '. '.' ....".,,,.~

Ies

.' sI::elecommunicationsSvstems

Evolution and Deployment

of Cellular

Telephone Systems

39

Communication Links

Figure 2-1 Transmitter Center Frequency in MHz MS BTS 825.030 to 834.990 835.020 to 844.980 845.010 to. 846.480 846.510 to 848.970 824.040 to 845.000 824.010 870030 to 879.990 880.020 to 889.980 890.010 to 891.480 889.510 to 883.970 869.040 to 870.00 869.010

An early AMPS cellular system.

SysremBand A

BandWidth in MHz 10

Number of Channels 333

Boundary Chanl1ei #s I to 333

10

333

334 to 666

AI

. referred to as base transceiver stations) form cells that provide coverage to mobile subscribers over a partie'ular geographic area. The base stations are connected to the MTSO that is in turn connected to the public switched telephone network (PSTN). Together, the base stations and the mobile stations provide the air interface that permits subscriber mobility while connected to the PSTN. The MSC performs system control •. by switching the calls to the correct cells, interfacing with the PSTN, monitoring system traffic for billing, . performing various diagnostic services, and managing the operation of the entire network. The mobile unit • is a frequency and output power agile radio transceiver that has the ability to change its operating frequen.' . cies to those designated by the MSC and its output power level if so instructed. The base station provides the interface between the MSC and the mobile subscriber. The base station receives both signals and instructions from the MSC that allow it to receive and send traffic to the mobile station. '

1.5

50

667 to 717

Typical AMPS Operations


The first part of this section will provide an overview of the typical operations performed by the mobile station and the base station. The second part of thesection will give a brief overview of the operations that occur between the base stations and the MfSO. The purpose of providing this information is to give the reader an insight into' typical cellular system operation. Very little detail will be included about the exact nature of the signals or the formats of the data sent between cellular system components (the reader can obtain OST Bulletin No. 53 from the FCC Web site if more detail is desired). The details of more advanced cellular systems (second generation and up) will be covered in other chapters of this book. The AMPS base station uses the dedicated control channels mentioned previously to send a variety of control information to idle (turned on but not being used) mobile stations within its cell. and the mobile stations use the corresponding reverse control channel to ~ommunicate with. the base station while in the idle mode. When the mobile station is engaged in a voice call, control and signaling information may be also be transmitted over the traffic channel being used by the mobile and base station. Figure 2-2 depicts the flow of information over these channels. The need to transmit "radio link status" signaling information over active voice channels is facilitated by the use of supervisory audio tones (SATs), also known as analog color codes. Three SAT frequencies are used: 5970 Hz, 6000 Hz, and 6030 Hz. These tones give the base and mobile station the ability to keep informed about each other's transmitting capabilities and to confirm the success or failure of certain mobile-operations. The base station periodically adds a SAT signal to the forward voice channel (FVC), thus transmitting it to the mobile station. The mobile station, acting like a transponder, transmits the same frequency tone on the reverse voice channel (RVC) back to the base

BI

2.5

83

717 to 799

Al

33

991 to 1023

Not Used
'Additional frequency

N/A

990

spectrum added Jarer to s Y ste m

AMPS System Comlvw.-ts and Layout ~,~"

As shown in Figure 2-1, tJie typical earl' . several to many base staf;i y AMPS cellular sYStem c . any mobile stations, and a mObileo::ste: of the_foll?wing components: Today the MSTO has b oDS, een rep aced by the mobile Switchl'ng ep one SWitChing office (MTSO) center or MSC Th . . . . e base stations (often

EvOlution and Deployment ofCeUular TeltphoTU! Systems


'W

41

mtroauaion to Wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks

i
AMPS dedicated control channels used to set up or tear down a call ReveISe Conaol Channel (RECC)

Forward Control Channel (FOCC)

Sigtl.ali~iirifri, .~'i!(r~tm~~~g~i&\tm~;@}g~~{#Jt!~~~ G
AI

Reverse Control Channel'(RECC)

~~~'~~~Wl'@~{C~t.M"s~ages;DCC,.·etc.

...

Forward

VoiceChannel

(FVC)

..

Voice,$~'l";,r&iei;jPjk'iiil'm~~_;;~\i§FifQi{~~_Y'
zt,

AMPSvoicechannels
used to transmit voice messages and needed

Reverse Voice Channel (RVC)

<$&-fo.,~"'-' ' ,~ll¥t'' .'fl'' J~'' '~' '.ifS'' :l't' '-' ' '_~ThlI'' ~' '~·-'' ~~'' ;b'' -.!'' .~c:1lI7}~¥"'¥"''ss-ag-e'::-s,'o-n-es--"" --"'T ' 'an'::-d-··cST'

I signaling

information

."
Base Transmitter Station (8TS)

Base Transnlitter Station (BTS) . f d nd reversecontrol channels. . 1information over the AMPS orwar a . Figure Z-3 Thdr!,nsfer of contra. . . d data over the reverse control . , h I while the mobile stallon sen s th f rward control c anne, b sends data over \,e or _ .. . . . DM) format as depicted Y channel as shown 'Ill Figure 2 3 streams in a time diVISion mUluple~d ~ the busy-idle stream. Mesctata . The FOCC transmIts three are known as Stream A, Stream '. . umber (MIN) equal to Figure 2--4. These three d~: ~~e= signifIcant bit of the mobile' s Ide~~a:~~ ~e least significant bit sages to mobile phones WI and messages to mobile phones that have : the capacity of the control channel. e "0" are sent on Stream A B The use of Streams A and B doubl 1 h 1 The reason for the busy- . equal to "1" are sent o~ s~eam the cutrent statuS of the reverse contro c a:~~ hones in a particular cell P e . many Th- busY-idle stream mdlcates fact th a t the RECC can be shared byd'cated m th e b u sy-idle stream, message t the CC· by 11 idle stream is to cou~terac. e With the status of the RB .In I d b the mobiles within the ce . thus creating contentlon for Its us. d gree by software algonthms use y b -' mized to some e collisions can e null! te at a 10 kbps data rate. Both control channels opera

Mobile Station (MS)

MobileStation (MS)

Figure 2-2

AMPS forward and reverse control and voice channels.

station. If for whatever reason a mobile station is captured by an interfering base station or a base station is captured by an interfering mobile station, this situation will be detected by the system due to the return of an incorrect SAT and the mobile receiver will be muted. A similar function is performed by the transmission of a digital color code (DCC) (an example of overhead information) over the forward control channel (POCC) by the base station and returned over the' reverse control channel (RECC) by the mobile station. A SAT color code (SCC) may also be transmitted to the mobile within certain mobile station control messages. Additionally, a signaling tone (ST) of 10 kHz can be transmitted over a voice channel to confirm orders and to signal various requests. In some cases, signaling over active voice channels is accomplished through the use of changes in the SAT status or through the use of short bursts of the signaling tone or a combination of the two. For instance, the handoff operation makes use of both the SAT and ST signals to first initiate and then complete this process. Additionally, both the forward voice channel and the reverse voice channel may be used to transmit digital messages from the base station to the mobile station and from the mobile station to-the base station as needed. The base station may transmit Mobile Station Control messages that specify orders to the mobile over the forward voice channel, and the mobile station may transmit two types of messages over the reverse voice channel-an Order Confirmation message or a Called-Address message. The response to a digital message sent to the mobile station over the FVC will be either a digital message or a status change of SAT and/or ST signals transmitted back to the base station over the RVe. Voice signals are inhibited when digital messages are sent over these channels. The SAT and ST signals are filtered out of the audio delivered to the mobile user.

, I

.l!

__O_~O-.O
.....----Time
~~ani .

Forward ControlChannel(FOCC)

~
Figure z--4

Busy-IdleStream

Stream

iJ

More Details When an AMPS mobile station is turned on but not connected to the PSTN for a telephone call, it tunes to the strongest control channel in its area and locks on to it. The mobile station will continu- ously monitor tills control channel to receive control information from the base station. The base station

M pS forwardcontrol channel. Data transfer over [he A t be transmitted over d Th types of messages 0 consist of one or more wor s. e control-filler messages. Each FOCC message can bile station control messages, and rf the Initialization Task, to the FQCC are overhea~ messag~s, ~~ used to allow mobile stations. t~ peth~~test system parameters, and Overhead message Information itoring a control channel by proVldl~g trol messilges can be sent by update mobile stations that are ~~~ stations. Two types of mobi1~ stanon ~o~ an order message that initito support system access by ~o I e ""~r page the mobile stallOn or sen 1 tiller" word that is sent b stallOn may enne . f one "space 1 the base st~tion. The as~ The control-finer messal~e consists 0 ntrol-filler message is also used to ates a particular. operation, essage to be sent on the FOCC. The co f obile stations accessing the syswhenever there IS no other m. ode to adjust the output powers 0 m specify a controi mobile attenuation c tern on the RECC.

~i§,

iff ##i--

Evolution awl Deployment of CeUular Telephone Sys/<ms 43

an AMPS system controls the mobile phone by sending order messages, messages are the alert order message-used to inform the mobile phoi the audit order message-'-used by the base station to determine if th the change power order message-used to alter the mobile's RF outpu ,hp' ;""" rc-ent order message-used 10 inform the user that a procedural error has been made in pia: ing a call; the maintenance order message-used to check the operation of a mobile station; the releas order message-used to disconnect a call; the reorder order message-used to indicate that all facilities are in use; the send called-address order message-used to inform the mobile station that it must send ames' sage to the base station with dialed-digit information; and the stop alert order message-used to inform a' mobile station' that it must stop alerting (ringing) the user. .

i
c:
. I Channels are Transmitted by BT~ Contro... . .__"_,.,,,~.•' "~ " contJ~I~".sS'~~.~:~.~~~~~:!~;::~

Time

Task # I: Mobile powers up Task #2: Mobile scans control channels of selected system (A or B) Task #3:

~~~~~.~~~::u
infonna1ion

AMPS Security and Identification

Task 1l4:'Mobile establishes paging channels

(C~on~tr~o~1 ..s.~.s~g.e~s:iare;;. ..':;".::llU::·tted::. "'=' b::y::M::S==.:::::I:: Task #5~ Mobile registelS with M~e~ .• :;TtanS:: Three identification numbers are used by the AMPS system: the mobile station's electronic serial number, .., ...+ ....... F'.-~~,o ".S . .., ,.' ' cellular system (ESN); the mobile service provider's system identificatio~ number (SID), and the mobile station's mobile' Task #6: MS aulhorization identification number (MIN). The ESN is provided by the mobile phone's manufacturer and is not able to\ be easily altered, SIDs are IS-bit binary numbers that are uniquely assigned to cellular systems. These c: numbers are exchanged by the base and mobile station to determine the status of the mobile-at home or Task #7: MS authorizatio~ Mobile Statio" roaming. The MIN is a 34-bit binary number, derived from the mobile station's IO-digit telephone num'1erified , (l\tS) ber-24 bits are derived from the 7-digit'local number, and 10 bits are derived from the 3-digit areacode,'lIase Translllitter In the AMPS standards, these two groups of binary bits are referred to as MIN 1 and MIN2, respectively', I Statiol\ (BTS) . I 5 AMPS mobile phone initialization.. not the same, the Summary of Basic AMPS Operations \ Figure 2rh ad message, lfthe two system IDs ,are f ons to take . .., d to it in the ove e allow roanung opera I As one can see, the AMPS cellular telephone system uses several methods to provide control,signaling,: that of the system ID debv.e~ . ming status. and sets par~ete~ to f the home system to be and identification information between the base and mobile stations. Depending upon the control signals' mobile station knows that it is 10 a .tha t it is attached to, This action IS necess~ed°rucce.ssfuUY, the mobile sent between the base and mobile stations, the mobile station might have to perform one or more complex place between itself and the system t bil phone If Task #4 cannot be comPlledt t\y or register itself with th .d 'Furth . thi ., " 1 tion of the mo Ie' h mobile Wilen I '11 sequences of steps to pe rform e require operation. ermore, s information may be sent over either able to update the oca 1fT ks #1-4 are complete, t e k #5) These ID numbers WI control channels or traffic channels, a necessity dictated by the use of single transceivers in this first-generreturns to Task #1 ~d st~rts over a:nd SID numbers over th~ REC~ (~as b'jjry 10 have roaming sta~us arion cellular system. Finally, although the AMPS system uses analog FM voice transmission, it should be I the network by sending Its ESN, the MSC to validate the mobile staUO~ sal "fy that the initializallon noted that the majority of control information is transmitted using a form of digital modulation-binary frebe compared against a database .~t e ds a control message to the mobile ~ol~enxecuted the mobile goes e n se quency shift keying (BFSK). The next several sections will provide some additional insight into common ~ (Task #6), FinaUy. the base slallo #7 )n fter Tasks #1-7 have been succe~s u Yk A . \ process has been camp leted (fask which it continually pe rforms four ongomg tas s, . AMPS operations. . ,

MIN

The process of AMPS mobile phone initialization is depicted in Figure Z-S, When the mobile phone is first powered up, it goes through an initialization process. This process allows the cellular phone to set itself to use e.ither cellular provider A or B(designated as Task #1 in the figure), The second step in the . d h process is the scanning of the twenty-one edicated control c annels of the selected service provider's system by the mobile phone (Task #2). AI the completion of Task #2, the mobile station will select the strongest control channel to Jock onto, This control channel will in all probability be associated with the cell in which the mobile is located. The third step in the process will be the updating of overhead information by the mobile station, The base station transmits a system. parameter message that is used to update the data .b h II I Iii' stored by the mob ile station a outt e ce u ar system. f the mob e station cannot complete this task within three seconds, it will go to the next strongest control channel signal and attempt to complete the task within· a second three-second time interval. If unable to complete this task, the mobile will now return to Task #1 and enable itself to use the other provider's system, If the mobile station can complete Tasks #1-'3, it moves on to the next task, Task #4 requires the mobile station to scan the paging channels (a control channel) of the system and then lock onto the strongest paging channel. Within three seconds the mobile must receive an overhead message and verify certain overhead information, If this portion of the task cannot be completed, the mobile will go to the next strongest paging channel and attempt to complete the task within a second three-second time interval, During this task the mobile will compare its home system ID '(SID) to

Initialization

. to an idle mode (Task #8) dunng .'1 hone will respond to contlDUm WIDI in the idle mode, the AMPS mooi e P ch of tbe following four AMPS Ongoing ldle Mode Tasks ~ It" on The mobile phone must execute ea , ous control messages from the base sal . ti e to receive overhead "m tasks every 46.3 rm se conds' . d Th obile must con nu SID l erhead infonnation. em h ost recently received ~ Idle Mode Task #l-Respo~ ~ ~~ with the last received SID val~e. If ~e ~1D value is the same, the messages and compare the r~celve ,the initialization procedure again. If e k has been performed, the B is different, the mobile station ~nt:s rhead information. Once the last tas v ~ mobile phone updates the recel ~ved if any in the overhead message. '1 .: n control messages for H messages receive " nicor mobl e stauo ,j mobile responds to any h The mobile station must mo . sponse Idle Mode Task #2-Page ma~ , 'U nt~r the System Access Tas_kwith. a page ~:l mess~ges for orders, page messages. If paged, the mobl e WIbile station must monitor mobJle station con Idle Mode Task #3-Order, !he mst 1 spond to it.: ,.' 'tiate a call, the System If an order is received, the m~b~l~:ustir: When the mobile subscnber deSIres to I~l Idle Mode Task #4-Call ~u iza ~gination indication. .' Access Task must. be e~tered ~th an -ral more examples of AMPS operations, This next section wJll prOVide sever

Evolution and Deployment of Cellular Telephone SysteT1lJ 45 .....: . ·..Jnobile subscriber wants to make a call several handshaki . nal (Step #5). As explained before, the mobile station responds to this message over the Rye with the . ..' . 'p~one and the base station over the various co ng messag~s must .IA.gT.···.~ignal, confirms the radio link (Step #6). The mobile station now awaits completion of the call .which . .' .: .' . to complete this task. First, the mobile sta . ntrol channels. Figure .. I' f th k (MSC) (S #7) F all th . . . then attempts to seize the RECC once it becomes idle Ste tion enters the System Access Task m ··iththe resultant signa cormng rom e networ tep. III y, e conversation takes place II s~ 10 transmun service request message to the base ~ ~ #1). Once the mobile has seized the RE St:lP' #8), To disconnect or complete the call, either the base station sends. a release order message or the will Include the mobile station's MIN ESN d tation Over the RECC (Step #2) Thi :bbile sends a signaling tone (ST) for l.S·seconds, at which point the base and mobile station drop the se . , ,an the phone nu b f' ' IS mess' , I di link (St #9) r:'lce request message to the base station .. . m er 0 the dialed party. After '. oice channe fa 0 I ep. staaslleOnt gtranthsthe service request it will senthdeamnOI·bnll·ltel'alstavtol?n Await Message mOdtreanlsfffilthettlbng gOhesinto an sa I Ice c Id . nd_to_Mobile and Mobile-to-Mobile Calls The mobile station can receive a call from another mobile b etary ndo as a.so passed this info on to the network id (l anne esignation message (Step #3) h d h PSTN ( I dli ) F b th th d dh ven or-specific messaging s stem (al si e I.e., the MSC) usuall throu h . .•. station or from a telep one connecte to t ~ . a an me, or' 0 cases, e nee e andshaking h~s been standardized as TIAlErI-634-B ~oh'Step ~2). ~oday, messaging between ~SC a!d ~ome pr~p stepsilre the same. As shown in Figure 2-7, the network (MSC) sends the ID of the mobile station to the vlded by the b' . e mobIle will switch t th . ase stallo base station (Step #1). The base station constructs a page control message. The 10 information (ESN, for the mobile :ds:~I~~cO:er in.forma~ion is also included in the ~as: ~:~al voice channel number p. MIN; and SID) is added to the message as is the initial voice channel information (Step #2). The mobile both the base and mobile stan at W~l deSignate what SAT tone to use on the ~"at~ess:ge-the power lev station responds to the page by returning identification information over the RECC in a page response the next sten f th ons ave sWitched their communi Ii IC C annel, At this poi message (Step #3). Another control message is sent over the FOCC by the base station that containsi an pOe process, the base station sends a mobil ca ons to the voice channels (Step #4) Sec. value to inform the mobile as to the correct SAT to be used onthe voice channel (Step #4). The . I e Control message over the PVC WI'ththe SA" base and mobile station both switch to the voice channels (Step #5) and alternately use SAT tones to ver~('.. ij»' ify the radio link (Step #6 and #7). After this last handshake occurs, the traffic channel is then opened to conversation (Step #8). . '., •...

i'!

Ii II.
Step # I: MSC sends mobile ID to the BS

~!~
"

Step 112: Can inConnation is passed On to the MSC

c= Step
::::J

#3:

Base Station sends control messages (Initialization~~~~ete';~orc:;;)"-·'''·

Step #2: The BS transmits a Paging message

<:;},-<

·.c ...... '. ,.·.·, ....··,h "C*#f<~ (ID information - ESN, MIN, SID)

Step 114: Base and Mobile Stations switch to speCified voice channel Step #5: Mobile ~Qntrol message (SAT) is
C

Time

======tr=a=ns=m=llt=ed~o~Ve;r~th~e~F~V~C~b~y~B~Sza;;mm~ .' .. , .'-.,•. ,' ,y·-·,,,,",..·,tM. Step #6: Confinnation message (SAD is nS;lIted OVer the RVC by MS

Step #7: Call response from the network cC============.::::3l>

$ ..."tra ",.
~teP#8:

I
Station

«".",.,...

Step #3: Mobile transmits Page response message Time

(SAT information) Step #5: Both BS and MS switch 10 specified voice channel Step #6: SAT tone transmitted to mobile (FVC)

Voice convemation takes place

.,.4>

$,_."".. _~~MS--radio or

Step #9: Call is lenninaled by either the link is dropped

B.,. Transmitter
Station

"'<1+
Mobil. Station

Step #7: SAT ~'h""":'-""_""""""

lone returned by mobile (RVC)

(BTS) •

Figure 2-6

AMPS mobile-originated

call.

(MS)

Base Transmitter
(BIS) call. Figure 2-7 AMPS mobile-terminated

Mobile Station
(MS)

L _ ..

46 .Introduction to Wirehr

Telecommunications Systems and Networ1cs . Evolution and Deployment oj Cellular Telephone Systems

47

AMP, N...... 0""""", At this time, it will be m,","""to 100", what is "'ppe nin g on the """ "do of the _M operations .. Consider a mobile-originated PSTN ''',,"0",). before 2-8 Figure 2-6.e the details of these 'Y''''''' (bore stati on ro MSC and MSC <0 call like that shown ,,~ in 'h,,,,, som
. '.. the """,k"", of tho -~ system, <eo are ""',"~ exc hanca .~g"Ib,_o <he base station and <he "'. and between the MSC and the PSTN. These messages are a combination of IS-41 and SS7 messages. To . TIAlEIA-41-D is the intersystem standard and TINEIA-634~B is used between the mobile sWitching ceo' and the No"", that after <he h",_ the n, base n, and Mse. PSTN " contacted """ <he radio link between the mohl. station and the base ,,",,'0 " confirmej, . telephone call is put through 10 the called party over the PSTN. Several more operations are performed' handshaking between the called party and the mobile station. If the called party answers, the alert ring-b ; signal is removed and a conversation ensues on the forward and reverie voice channels. Either the calf party or the mobile station may tenninale the call. . th

",.,!off

""" mobile switching center an active ca figure' that Base Station A is handling connected to . ~ ea. Consl er d

o_~ "'!!:"
.

A handoff handshaking operations that y. ~ 2-'J details thooperation occurs In a cell. take "'':;;:",,_ r handoff to occur. In this case, within some geographic

..

. ular s stem when a mobile station m~ves to

'"""""00.

b,,,,,,,,

""'bil"",,,

'''0

i
._

[I .
.

;;-'::'0'':b'" m:
".

Ii~ . . :.. , . ._,


,"",00withi

its area of coverage,

~:t>=:::'I,-'\f-l

t=.._-.-~


c:
~~~n

rm rwe
..... ......,:....~ . ,....

Mobile Originates Can

II
. .

..

. R~CC.O~,:~:s~~:=¥,~

Base Station A Notes Low Received Signal Strength

Request is Passed to MSC

Randolf Measurement Request is Sent to Base Station B ==R=V=C'=·c=o=nve==rs=at;:;;io::;:;n;zs;._1P RVC ~ Base Station B Measures

c::==:
Channel Assignment is Passed to Mobile
•• ,.

.~
-=:J

Mobile is Authenticated Call setup Between MSCand PSTN

$:~.""

Radio Channel is Assigned

Ic========4F===~·;:;·"1E··''''-'~'"'!1l'·Il'~Z;.'

t!"-I' Received Signal Strength

. BS and MS Switch to Voice Channel SAT Tones are Exchanged Called Party is Alerted Call Status is Relaye I~""'"'" . :::=J Connection BetweenlPSlN I¢"~·"_.,v"" "" " and MSC Called Party Answers
._.,.'

...... ---'----~t-::-~:::-::~::; ~\! ;. Rt ''';IITP.i:EYil. VI ;YALIWA f~''''::':'' 'j


r:

. ,., c (.~::,

"\"'~F

t:NGlNi ERING,lIBR.l\it'(

I'.
,

Handoff Measurement to MSC


"N'"

.•

2>-

Time

~.".
Ring Back Ring Back RemOVed

ST Alert is Sent to MS

to MSC

Ace
-

BANG.l\tORE . TrafficChannelAsslgn~d No5.8~~ .. C.l. No ..P'(i.~S 1<@""" ..". .. .

<iiP'~'-~""""""
~ Alert is Removed ... =" ..,, . " .

..

YEAR

.. .I. f .... TCR ...


-_it-,

Assignment Con!'l111led

b>

Randolf Order
.•_".r .....

Randolf Order
'.f','<:: , .....,::-.~,"'-, •..".,~ ..•..,'

iI.-1'··

Conversation on FVC

Conversation on RVe Mobile Terminales Call ST of 1.8 Seconds CC======.,::: SAT Tone Transmitted

...:;:.:$

I<';"'=~''"·~,·,·'"'''''' . ~
SAT Tone Returned

Mobile Station (MS)

Base Station (BS)

Mobile SwitChing Center (MSC)

Figure 2-8

AMPS network Operations for a mobile-Originated call.

Public Switched Telephone Network (pSTN)

·Mobile Station (MS)

Base Station A

Base Station B

Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

Figure 2~9

AMPS handoff operation.

, EvolutIon and De"loyment of Cellular Tel£phoneSystems 49 'l' .. .

Other AMPS Details


One other type of infonnation transmitted to the base station frqm the mobile station in the AMPS system i; the station class mark (SCM). The SCM COntains infonnation about the mobile station's maximum outpuf power (its class) power additional details about the mobile station's ability to support various operations' concemingoutput and somechanges.

Other 1G System&
As mentioned before, numerous other analog first-generation cellular systems began to be deployed around the World starting in the early 1980s. Considering the recent rapid deployment of advanced digital cellular systems, the importance of these systems is limited at this time. However, it is possible that these first-gen_ eration systems will continue to be supported in some of the less developed Countries in the world for a, long time. Taking a brief look at some of these other systems now will help the reader develop a better appreciation and understanding of how the cellular industry has arrived at its current Position. A listing of deployed cellular systems by country and type is available at www.cwt.vtedu in the Wireless FAQ (frequently asked questions) section. Table 2-2 Worldwide 1G analog cellular systems, Downlink .Frequency Band 824-849 MHz 890-915 MHz 872 905 MHz 453-4575 MHz Uplink Frequency Band 869 894MHz 935 960MHz 917 950MHz 463-4675 MHz

Cellular

Standard

r-r
I

AMPS TACS,

"

Channel Spacing 30kHz 25kHz 25kHz 25kHz 12.5 kHz 10kHz 25kHz 12.5 kHz

Region United States European Union United Kingdom European Union European Union Germany & Portugal Italy France

TACS Cellular
The TACS (Total Access Communications System) cellular system developed by Motorola began operation in the United Kingdom (UK) in 1985 and spread to other Countries of the European Community (now the EUropean Union) shortly thereafter. This system was a variation of the AMPS system and operated in the 800-MHz and 900-MHz bands (refer to Table 2-2). The system employed a reduced channel spacing of 25 kHz thus yielding a total of 1000 channels in the allotted spectrum. 'Two UK service provider networks evolved-Cellnet and Vodaphone. Due to a need for additional capacity, the networks persuaded the government to release additional frequency spectrum for TACS. TACS Was Upgraded shortly thereafter to Extended-TACS or E-TACS in the UK. TACS cellUlar systems Or some Variation of TACS systems are presently still emplOyed in approximately tWentY-five COuntries worldwide.

E-TACS NMT450 NMT900 C-450

890-915 MHz 450-455.74 MHz

935 960MHz 460-465.74 MHz

RMTS Radiocom 2000

450-455 MHz 165.2-168,4 192.5-199.5 215.5-233.5 414.8-418 MHz MHz MHz MHz

460-465 MHz 169.8 173 200.5-207.5 2075-215.5 424.8 428 MHz MHz MHz MHz

NMT Cellular
The i\TMT 450 cellular system was another variation of AMPS that Was first deplOyed during 1981 in the Nordic countries of Denmark, Finland, Norway, and Sweden. The first NMT systems operated in the 450MHz band with channel spacing of 25 kHz. An upbanded NMT cellular system operating in the 900-MHz lar systems have since' been deplOYed in apprOximately NTT

1
6.25 kHz 6.25 kHz 6.25/25 kHz 12.5/25 kHz 125125 kHz 12.5 kHz Japan .

band came online abour fi" '''''' Iater in 1986 wi.

,=-""""",,,k&. NMr_. '''''.g 0'125


fifty countries Worldwide. .

915-918.5 MHz '922925MHz 925940MHz 898-901 MHz 915-925 MHz 918.5 922 MHz

860-863.5 MHz 867-870 MHz 870-885 MHz 843-846 MHz 860-870 MHz 863.5-S67 MHz

Japan

JTACSINTACS

"II

~IZ/rilduction10 Wireless Telec~mmunications Systems and Networks

Digital AMPS
Digital AMPS (D-AMPS) technolo . . " attempt to increase lh . gy was Introduced in North Am' . cally advanced as it !~sa~~c: o~ the origi~al.AMPS celiular system.e~: durmg. the ear1Y)9908 in. considering the rapid evolun h~d limited capacity and had beco AMPS system, as technolo \ t hn Ion 0 new hIghly effici di me very bandwidth .. 'ffi " ec ology provided a desirabl '. icrent Igltalmodulation techno me ICI~ tern capacity without h .' e mIgrauon path that-the cellular service id Iques. The use of D-AM'

Evolution and Deployment of Cellular Telephone Systems 51 This continual and unrelenting onrush of technology has quickly brought us from the first generation of cellulat telephone systems through the second generation to the half-generational step of 2.5G and beyond (2.$G+), with the promise and implementation of the third generation of wireless cellular service at our .doorstep.

t:

economics must be cons~~~~:dt~~~~a~~e chan~~ over their systems. A~r~~~i;~~I~o~~duse to increase sy& base of equipment and man . CO?SI ers changing Over to a new s ~ew technology f corned the use of a hybrid y mobIle subscnbers using AMPS mobile h ystem. WI~h a large instal! ,. with the installed base of frr:r-;:m th.at used. second-generation technol~g~n:~; the s:"lce providers we~ The D-AMPS neraUon equipment. was ackward compatibl' f system allows for the continu d' o the ~S procedures. The novel as ect of ~ Use of the AMPS bandwidth (channel s aci' temusmg lime division multIple acces; (TDMA)-AMPS cellular systems is that this sec ~ ng) ~d man! fi , ust-generation AMPS system Tho all ~hnology is able to use the on -generauon sy tern In . IS ows aD-AMPS s t same traffic channels th '. many cases, to upgrade to D-AMPS ' . ys ern to be overlaid onto .. as' ,~ cell ~Ite in same base station cabinet a 't:eAMsefVIce r~vider Could colocare D_~~~stlll~ p AMPS sys service proVIder an evolution s .e PS equIpment. The use of D eqUIpment at, th~ taiDing traditional service ary path to proVIde the capability of digital s .' -AMPS therefore gave the .. ervices to subse 'be hi ,0 T YPICally. in a D-AMPSIAMPS . n rs w ile mainanalog traffi envlfonment a cert . ' . ICand the rest allocated Tn ' am percentage of chann Is callonscould be adjusted as neededtoAlth~~h traffic. As subscribers migrated to ~_A:;~ld be ~eserVed for'

Jp.troduction
There are several defining differences between first- and second-generation systems that will be outlined here. The most basic difference is that first-generation systems used analog modulation techniques for the transmission of the subscriber's voice over the traffic channel. All subsequent generations of cellular systems convert a user's voice' from an analog signal to digitalform and then use some form of digital modulation to transmit the digital encoding of the voice message. This conversion to a digital format usually results in the ability of a communications link (in this case, a traffic channel) to accommodate more than one user at a time. This attribute is usually referred to as multiplexing. The two most popular forms of rdultiplexing used by second-generation cellular systems are time division multiple access (TDMA) and code division multiple access (CDMA). The controlsignals for first-generation systems used digital modulation to send digital control messages over the dedicated control channels and over the forward and reverse voice channels when the mobile station was in the.conversation mode and thus using a traffic channel. First-generation systems also relied on , supervisory audio tones and signaling tones to facilitate system operations. Second-generation systems also " use digital modulation techniques to send digital control messages but have no need for analog supervisory or signaling tones. As a further consequence of using digital encoding for the user traffic. digital encryption may be employed that provides both security and privacy for the mobile network subscriber. This was not possible in first-generation cellular systems and it led to the use of scanners that could be used to listen to private conversations as well as numerous cases of the fraudulent use of a subscriber's intercepted identification numbers (ESN, MIN, and SID). Furthermore, the use of digital encoding and modulation allows for the use of error detection and correction codes. the use of which. to some extent. combats the type of fading and noise effects peculiar to the radio channel (more about this topic in Chapter 8); The AMPS system worked remarkably well when it was first deployed in the United States. Subscribers could move country-wide between different service provider systems and as long as they were in a coverage area they could receive service. Roaming was not a problem within the United States since all systems had to be compatible. This was not so in other areas of the world. As just outlined, many different systems were deployed in different regions of the world. This situation was nowhere more troublesome than in the European countries. Therefore, in the early 1980s, the European countries began working together to develop a pan-European cellular system. This process was set in motion when, in 1982, the Conference of European Posts and Telegraphs (CEPT) formed a Groupe Speciale Mobile study group to research and then develop this new system. The study group proposed that the new system meet certain operational criteria and in 1987 the Global System for Mobile Communications was formally initiated by the European Commission in the form of a directive. In 1989. responsibility for the continuing development of the new system was transferred to the European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI). In 1990. the first phase of the GSM standards were published and commercial operation commenced soon afterwards in late 1992. The system' chosen used digital technology and became known as the GSM cellular system. .

t?e

s~stelm capacity would increase bec~use theui) :~mber of analog channels would be ~~ervl~e the allo-. sing e analog channel that f I system could supp rt hr uce , the total The original specificatio~r;;:r YD W~;~able of only supporting a sing~e utse;e users simultaneously in.a IS-54-B defined dual-mode . -. were pUblished as Interim S . . I '. fications remained identical ~~eral1on Within th.e same 8oo-MHz cellular ~:~dard 54-B or Simply IS-54-B. ' work control chai!nels However both AIMPS specIfication in IS-54-B as did th the . ":'fillh, frequency spec]. te . . ,ana og and di .tal . e speCI icatio f ~:~:~~Ptember of 1996 and replaced b;ITI~~_~~;"~~shwere.defined by IS-54~~. ~~~:_~~og '•• b system developed for North A' . It the Introduction f as een effectively SUperceded. . menca and published as IS-136 0 a true second-gen_ , D-A¥PS technology has

2.3 2G CELLULAR SYSTEMS


The flfst-generation cellular systems u back at the technology of the earl sed the technology aVailable at the time of . . Was the same era as the introd . y 1980s when these systems were first intr their desIgn. If one looks lived through that time period :~: ~f the IBM .personal computer or PC. Th~~C:d, one realizes that th!s these devices could only process 16 bi~:v~lve~ WIth technology recall that the Intel ~us old enough to have early PCs came without a hard dri I a a time and access an extremely limrt d croprocessors used in had to be programmed' . ~e. Mass storage was provided b e amount of memory. Most today's PCs and it is di;'~:ft ~~el.clall:ed thProgramminglanguages anls:~~PYcodISkS! Sth°ftwareapplications PC If magine at we we" . rnpare ose earl PC . eariy d~~~,: j:~~ ~~a;~:g~l t~:e~.te.:.what r ha:: jo~~esa~:.u~~n;o::o~~~~ng~" just to be a~e tosu:;~ the shelf of your faVorite teehn I Igl technology-based consumer electr .0 IS to tell you about these o One more fact to consicier is ~g~ sl~ore .and the world without an Internet I orucs products removed from be put on an IC chip has increas e 0 oWlllg: over the last twenty years the' . a substantial factor and the f ~ by well over a factor of 1000 the f number of tranSIstors that may th ,unctJonaIity f th I ,cost 0 the same IC h e processing power of yesterday's super~om;ut;r~~s increased significantly. Today's mO:I:;~:~~;~~~

General Characteristics of 2G Systems


Only a brief overview of the general characteristics of second-generation systems will be provided here since these systems and their succeeding implementations will be covered in much greater detail in subsequent chapters.

E"~lution and Deployment of Cellular Tclephonl! Systems 53

=: 5i"2.;;·>

. ."'lilti'6iiudi~oiitii,W;i:eiess.ielecdm~Wiica( IOns ·S·. ,. 'Y1temsaoo Networks "" . . '.. .

, The of:adV 'ability .ofrth ese cellular systems to support more than .one user per radio channel is through the use .' use t:ced digtthl:_multiplexing_!;echniques. TDMA s (fr ue: to allocate a fixed periodic time when :stems ~GSM, North American TDMA. and PDC) aU' lots su~ort The GSM system uses a transmission fon::rbs~nbe~ has .exclusive use of a particular channel'

:1'J])MA "l'" a tree '';.", O",.d

~ I"'=~::::f:~~~:':. ;"'7:'~ ~~ ~:"::':;::!':~,"l;~:~:~;::::,:;;:~:I~~"= " re<ci::,:~:gldttodi"


tec:nique timeslots and therefore the system can t users per radio channel simultaneously C;:Aelght nal is further ~:~s ~Pbread sp~ctrum. In this system, 'at the tr cellular systems lise a digital modulation,

~i)'

_,d.g~a"oo TDMA was developed for use a the SOO·Mlh and then the 1900PCS bands. This TDMA system is published as lS-136 and it has many similarities to MHz OS}.1. Today it is known as North American TDMA (NA-TDMA). Currently, only 10% of the world's cellular subscribers use this technology.

,y,"m

lJIl

100" noise 00 a "''''00 have the unique bit stream.11< ,peri.! a CDMA system many radio sis oes not share the same code as the transmit e y at e~ch received signal ter interfering with each oth Thlgnals may be simultaneously transmitt d th of the signal. Therefore, in

, the Japanese Ministry of Post and Telegraph began a development study with the ultimate goal of creating a digital cellular system with a common air interface. From this" study came the Japanese Personal 989 mOW Comm~'''"'''' (PDCl'y"= 10 J 99 L Using TDMA ""hoolo" smular to IS·" in both the SIlO· }11Hz and ISOD-MHzbands, PDC systems supplied by Motorola were deployed starting in 1993. Currently,

broadband spectrum comer. de only de~acting aspect of this technOI:" ~n e same radi? channel without, For either TDMA or COParMAother digital modulation schemes to e oY IS that CDMA Signals have a very cellular st' cannel. For IDMA . ys ems, both control info . h gled within a data s:::::~t'nce b~th forms of information are ;:~~n. and traffic share the same radio, control information is carried btra~s;tted by a single transmitter over agl~fo~at they can be lntermin0 channel element Channel lye icated channel elements and traffic' ra 1 Idnk.For CDMA systems, : fr e ements (CEs) ... IS P ace on an '1 equency simultaneously are individual transmitters th a t are all trans y avar able traffic .' itti Finally, although mobil d lID tmg on the sa.. e m . I e ata services w . proprietary systems were generall no ere available over first-generation cellul . '. (CDPD) service was introdu . y. t used by the general public In 19 . ar systems, these early any cellular subscriber' " /ed in the United States, The ability to 'co 93, cellular digital packet data Note: First-generat::: istinguishing feature of all second- and suc~nect to the pu~lic data ~etwork by . switched) the old-fa hi dcellular systems were capable of trans . e~dmg generation cellular systems,! " s ione way by using a modem. milling data over the PSTN (circuit

only 5% of the world's cellular subscribers use POC technology.


.,i

'i \

pes Systems During the midc1990 ,

in response to the Omnibus Budget Act of 1993, the FCC auctioned off portions of s the electromagnetic spectrUm in the United States for use by commercial mobile radio service providers. The peC had allocated 153 MHz of spectrUm for Personal communication Services (peS) and took the stance that the "inarketplace should dictate the use of this spectrUm. Many cellular service providers bid on the tWOfrequency block" available in the flfty·one major trading areas (MTAs) and the 453 frequency blocks available for basic trading areas (BTAs). A large number of these licenses have been used to extend cellular CO\erage by the cellular service providers. In only a limited number of cases, service providers have deployed pure peS networks (e.g., Sprint PCS and T-Mobile). Typically, CDMA, GSM 1900, and NA-TDMA technology have been used to provide service in these

pes bands.

2.4 2.5G CELLULAR SYSTEMS GSM


The first GSM systems, originally sch duled GS M handsets first becam ' e u e to be deployed in 1991 be service. GSM t hn e available. Before the end of 1993 ' .gan operation in late 1992 when ec ology has becom th over one million custo hd . 72% of the world's cell lee most popular cellular teleph mers a Signed up for ks u ar customers sub ibi one technology with wor in operation in 174 . sen ing to the service. At this . approximately t hn countries world .d . point, there are ove 500 GS ec ology uses TDMA t 11 WI e With an estimated one billi r M netbasic system uses frequ 0 a ow up to eight users per channel Chan Ilion users as of early 2004. GSM at 1800 MHz (GSM 1S:~les in the 9OO-MHz band (GSM 900) but I ne s are spaced 200 kHz apart. The 1900), There are curre and the 1900-MHz band was added I~ the ate.r an upbanded version was added GSM service when fir~t.P~~ to expand into the S5D.MHz and 450.M~m~d !tates for PCS service (GSM . in 0 uced supported circuit-switched dat z an s (GSM 850 and GSM 450) CDMA a rates of up to 9,6 kbps, ' After second.generatio cellular systems began operation there was an increasing desire for mobile data n delivery. During the 1990s, the PC had been in existence for over a decade and the Internet was starting its explosive growth. Worldwide, more and more telecommunications was becoming computer-to·computer oriented and society had become extremely mobile through the growth and efficiency of modern transportation systems. Several proprietary systems had been developed early in the life cycle of I G systems, but in 1993, IBM and several mobile carriers published a specification for a system called cellular digital packet data (CDPD) tha could be ""d,id 00 the AMPS ,,_, A1'hoogh 'mpro"'""" an iliat al Iowol users wireless e-mail access, file transfer capabilities, and the like, CDPD service could only deliver data at very limited transfer rates (typically, 9.6 kbps).

Evolution of Mobile Data Services

In the early 1990 s, m . f ormance requirementsresponse to the C IIular Telecommunications I d f; h .e

. .. " as Code Division MUlti;~: ~cnext generation of wireless service, ant~t~7 ASSocl~t~on's (CTIA) user perCDMA air interface stand cess or CDMA was developed b y new digital technology known C?rporation. In 1993, the .ercIaI network began opera-

tion in Hong Kong in 199~~i~~:5, w~s adopted and the first c~3~a~::: bands extensively in the U "t that time, CDMA systems have b rapid growth and presently ~~~ :;~~s .

With the advent of ~IIdigital second-generation cellular networks came the very real likelihood of increased data transfer rates over cellular systems. It was not long before the service providers and the eel[ular standards organizations set their sights on third-generation cellular systems that would offer high-speed data rates and many more features tied 10 the access of the PDN by their subscribers. However, before the appropriate technology and sufficient frequency spectrUm exists to build these systems, an evolutionary approach to upgrading the existing cellular systems was outlined by the interested parties. A broad framework of 30 specifications has already been laid out, but for most systems in operation, however, we must pass through 2.5G and 2.5+G first!

and ~oughout ·the rest of th:~o~~.d ~~ both the cellular and PCS e world s cellular telephones use tho t h MA has expenenced very. " ~ec~~

._.l__

·_·-

EvolutIon a
iJ't

nd D ,M-i of CeUulllr TeleplwRe'Sysums 55


el'~"'-"

mtroduaion

to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks BTS'

Bse

Today, the most important cellular systems are GSM, CDMA, and NA-IDMA. Together these systems represent approximately 95% of the world's cellular subscribers. The next few sections will give a brief description of the technologies used to provide access to the PDN over these systems. A more detailed dis.cussion of these technologies will be given in Chapter 7.

CDPD
CDPD was originally designed to provide mobile packet data services as an overlay system for the now legacy AMPS cellular system, It can be extended to CDMA service but CDMA is, following a different' path. CDPD service may continue as a viable alternative for the delivery of low-speed bursty packet data in the near term but will most likely fade away as time goes on.

HSCSD
Although HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data) is not a packet-switched data service, it should be included here because it was the first plauned enhancement for increasing circuit-switched data rates on GSM networks. This enhancement takes place in two steps. Phase one, deployed in 2001, yields data transfer rates up to 43.2 kbps, and then a follow-up enhancement, phase two, will allow transfers to 64kbps. This technology works by giving a mobile subscriber multiple timeslots out of the standard GSM IDMA, frame with its eight timeslots. Since this technology deals with circuit-switched data, its importance to' enhanced data services is not as great now as when it was first proposed. Effectively, HSCSD service has been superceded by OPRS technology. .:., \ 2-10 The CDMA interworkingfunction node. d ds are beingfaeilitllted by the . F~~ ,'. . . d lobal IOaining. These stan ar di around the world (Sl!e . ":" tees (e.g.. voice, data, ~d v~deo),~o: (lTU) and other regio~al b~~:ununicatiou2000 (IMTseI,:tv1ter'national Tele,commUnICatthlOnrrus'ormed tile International MOdbilerTthetwenty-first century (see n I 1990s e 1 • 'nee so· as neW 'figure 2-11). In the ate b' mobile telecommunicatIOnS has started and witl be ongomghi Pro2000)~.~:)~;:0~~~:~e
WWW.,

GPRS
General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) was defined by the European Telecommunication Standards Institute as a means of providing packet-switched data service that allows full mobility and wide area coverage on GSM networks. The standards were published in the late 19908 and the service was introduced at the beginning of the new millennium. GSM OPRS service is designed to ultimately provide data transfer rates up to 160 kbps. This technology is also being deployed by NA-TOMA Systems with data rates up to 45 kbps. Interestingly, it is felt that the use of OPRS technology for packet-switched data services for both GSM and NA-IDMA will eventually drive these two similar technologies toward a converged system as 30 is approached.

td:PIOymendto~ ~:~ ~ ::~~:ts~es~:teros. Pr~s~~ ~~~;~~~:~ of the 3G standar ar . these efforts on e evolutionary phases d the 30PP2 group are overseemg ject (3GPP) groU1?:holders respectively. mobile systems st e ,
3G Developlllent on a Global Level

JDMA

Packet Data over CDMA


The COMA system used an InterWorking Function (lWF) component that is necessary for both circuit and packet data (see Figure 2-10). For circuit-switched data, the IWF supplies a modem connection to the PSTNand the modem function is built into the mobile subscriber's COMA telephone. For first-generation CDMA systems (IS~95A), the maximum possible data rate for circuit-switched data is 14.4 kbps, For packet data, the IWF provides the interface between the wireless system and the external packet network with a maximum data rate of 14.4 kbps also. For 2.SG COMA systems (IS-9SB revision) higher data rates of 115.2 kbps are possible. However, the real data throughput of.the system is more in the range of 60 to 80 kbps, Note that both IS-9SA and IS-95B systems are now referred to as cdmaOne cellular systems.

Figure 2-11

. .. . olved with the development Organuauons mv

f he 30 cellular standards. t

2.5

3G CELLULAR SYSTEMS

Introduction

The term "third-generation mobile systems" or 30 is used to represent a number of cellular systems and their associated standards that have the ability to support high data rate services, advanced multimedia _

f an increasing demand ed neration cellular systems onl~ ~rvice even thoU~ ~ The deployment of sCC?nd-ge ervices. 20 systemS prunarilY P volutionized the data mark . for more system ca~aclty:r::eWs:rviCes. The arrival of the Internet re could also support ow

ser:

~!:~~::;

':56 '-Introduction to Witeless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


demand for data' th ' .. over. e psrn increased drastically and sad th ROelOgies b.th ~e n~adband, cable modems and digital' sUbscn'bePrIWI'nnee(DSeL)develo,pment..ew wireline t~· :"'Table2-3 30 c h aractertstics by ce II'SIZean d ~,0 bil spee d , of n ' f hi h '''' ue th sam tun . e e, e wireless subscriber's demand for Inte t or g -speed Internet acce :.-'-------~.---:---~r---'-----.--:----.-----_,_---___, satisfy the demand. ' u mterne access and data services grew but 2G cou:~' Macro Cell Micro Cell Pico 20 cellular systems are limitedby bandwidth ' :'L.-:C.:·e_II_T::yp~e -+ Global Cell -+ Mega Cell -+_-------j--,-------jf-----I Cell of cell~lar systems were designed priman"ly' c. and,roanun~ capability. Since the first several ! .!'·,Mnvlmum Cell bandWIdth for th hi h dara t lor VOIce servrce and d generatio ~ used for the e d'~ data transfer rates desired today Also . not a~a, they do not have sufficie "'Radius patible with :~Yo I erent cellular systems already depl~yed tmUltlPle air interface standards a Operating Environment limitations, lack of i:e;~~~ ~:~:::tt!:~~l :~~in~. ~dditiOn~~y ~~gd~y~::Ss~:~ :~a ns~r~~~ 1000's ofkm 100--500km 35km 1 km 50m

Evolution and Depwyment of CeUular Telephone Systems 57

3G Ch

!~~~~~

::r~~:c;

Global

Regional

aracteristics

'

ac

support for multimedia services

Suburban (low user density) Tower or building mounted 144 kbps

Urban (high user density) Building facade or lamp-post 384 kbps

In-building

'

"'., .;.

Installation Type

,.

'I
:"

:j ;j

30 mobile networks need to be able . able to pennit global' to prOVIde high~speed data tr f ' dia) and to be able to ~:~. ~e~ore, they need to suppOrt a::::e!o~ .p·acket ~etwO~ks and to b to ~uburban to global locationsvanous dIfferent operating environments (low ~tal se~lces (I.e:,. multime SCriber might be located ( , etc.). In other words, as shown in Figure 2 12 ugh high moblltty, urbar networks The IMT 2 . except for the most severe radio envi -, anywhere a mobile SUbl: allo~ed S~bscriber ~O~~t:~:t:e~~n:d , ~h~se various hierarchical ~:~;=~:~r:~o~~:, be Supported by 30 nuDlmum supported data t '.' ir correspon!ling size; ra e as shown III Table 2-3,'.,

>:
, .

Satellite GEO,MEO, LEO 100's ofkbps to several mbps*


N/A

Satellites LEO 100' s of kbps to several mbps+


N/A

Inside ofa building 2mbp~

'Dala Rate -.
Maximum Mobile Spe~d (Kmlhl.

500kmlh

\~~~~----~----~--~--~--~
'No, pan of the JG standard

lOOkmlh

10kmlh

-.
Global Cell

~(\.W'

3G systems must be able to support varying data rates by providing bandwidth on demand to the subscriber. 30 subscriber devices (SDs) or end terminals (ETs) will be required to support multiple techaologies and frequency bands and have the ability to be reprogrammed by their home cellular system, Today's mobile phones have dual-band and tri-mode capabilities, can provide limited video multimedia support, and have limited reprogramming features, Advanced, reconfigurable, multimedia mobile phones or subscriber devices based on software radios are under development now. Additionally, 3G systems must be able to support multiple simultaneous connections, IP addressing; and be backward compatible with 2G networks.

3G Radio Interfaces
The IMT -2000 requirements for radio transmission technology (RTI) are driven by the basic 3G requirements. Therefore, the radio technology used to implement a 3G system must have the ability to support all of the features referred to in the previous section, As mentioned before, the vast majority of cellular subscribers use either GSM, CDMA, or NA-TDMA technology. Many different proposals were submitted to lMT-2000, but only five were accepted by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU), Presently there are only two major 3G cellular technology proposals moving forward. They are cdma2000 and UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access or UTRA (Universal Wireless Communication-136; UWC-136 has recently been dropped as a viable alternative). A brief overview of these technologies will be given next. More in-depth coverage of these systems is given in Chapters 5 and 6,

UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunications System Terrestrial Radio Access Network or UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access or UTRAN is the evolutionary pathway to 30 for GSM mobile systems; This system was proposed by ETSI and is supported by the UMTS Forum (see www.umts-forum.org) and several major manufacturers. This 3G system is slated to use present spectrum allocations and new frequency allocations in the 2-0Hz band and to also employ combinations of wideband .CDMA (W-CDMA) technology and either time division duplex (TOD) or frequency division duplex (FDD) CDMA technologies depending

F' 19ure 2--12 3Goperatina

-oe

' envuorunents.

Evolution and Deployment ofCeUular Telephone Systems 59

3G Mobile Network Evolution


For earl}' second-generation mobile systems services like v . ". . the traditional cellular system components With th . oice and CIr~t-swltched data were supported by elements had tobe introduced into the ne~ork. Fo: ~~:~~isacket-swlrched data services, new functional all the data traffic. As GSM evolves to UMTS the n . systems two new nodes are used to process Theextremely rapid acceptance of the Internet and wireless mobile technologies is paving the way toward toward an all-IP architecture for the core network w~~W~rkwin h~ve to .evolve again. Eventually, evolution new and innovative digital services for the mobile user over emerging high-bandwidth, high-speed mobile evolutionary roadmap for its all-IP netw k Thi . .so OCcur III v:mous phases. Cdma2000 also has an networks, The rapid transformation of wireless systems from voice-only networks to multimedia-capable . or. S tOPICwill be covered III more detail in Chapter 7. networks will usher in the mobile information society much faster than anyone could have predicted .a -fewshort years ago. With already more than a billion mobile phone users, many, including this 3G H annolllzation predict that the use of some type of mobile appliance or end tenninaI will be the most common In the hopes of achieving a quasi world standard for 3G' . '. . of connecting to the Internet in the very near future. With the introduction of 3G technologies, the ent regions and standards bodies .are I . WIreless, harmoruzation .activities between differindustry has started moving toward that goal. Major efforts are underway by the service providers to .international bodies have been formed: ~~~ ~ngOlllg: In an effo~ to bring this task to fruition, two services and applications to the mobile subscriber over a packet-switched lP (Internet Protocol) netalso standardize the similar 3G proposals from ET;Iner~tio~ P~~ShiP Project (3GPP), to harmonize and The ultimate goal is to eliminate circuit switching (the PSTN) and thus totally reconfigure the an 0 er - DMA proponents, and 3GPP2, for the •. ftttlcture. of the existing wireless cellular network.

Evolutian and Deployment of Cellular Telephone Systems


00

61

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Sysiems arul Networks

Work has already begun on the theoretical design and initial standards work needed to implement IP'end-lo-end system. Commonly referred to fourth-generation (4G) wireless systems, 4G will aHo, transport of high bit rate, rich multimedia content over an all-IP network. 4G networks will most r evolve from the several different air interface standards currently being used for 3G. There are inany t nologic challenges that will have to be overcome to get to the point of having an ail-If' network. Div mobile appliances or terminals connected by an assortment of access technologies will provide dau engineering problems for the network system designer in terms of operations, management, interope eality. billing, QoS issues, protocols, and so on. Not to mention the literal possibility of hundreds of billions" devices connected to such a network. Will it happen? That is not the correct question. When will 4G b" . ~letnentation Groups , . . or a standards development organization., pen, is the question to be asked! . ,;:. standardization begins in an Implementation group icular manufacturing industry, the acaTTIe procgroe~p~fgenerauy consist of"interested me~~s fr:~u:tryPru;ervice providers, and users. Some of the These titles trade associatIOns, Oro p UMTS Forum, IEEE 802.20x deDrlcworld and government en. • IEEE 802, CDMA Development up, W b it i,for ess are~~are and so on See the IEEE WiIeless Standards e si e, In late 2002, an IEEE 802 study group was 'formed at the request of the IEEE Computer Society. Under' up's presently active in thewuel gro . -4S f th TlA GSM Assocla on, ...' category of Local and Metropolitan Area Networks, this new project has the title: "Local and Metropoll cotiHnittee TR .: 0 e... ' f typical implementation working group.. Area Networks=-Standard Air Interface for Mobile Broadband Wireless Access Systems Supporting Ve. irifOrinationabou: the actiVItieS0 a . ular Mobility-Physical and Media Access Control Layer Specification." It is designated as IEEE 802.20: According to the IEEE Wireless Standards Web site (see http://standards.ieee.orgtwirelessl)the proj''Oegt'onal Organizations df 'mplementation groups. The regional , . . . .' ~ , I d standar s rom I . f scope and purpose is as follows: ., . standards or<>anizationsreceive deve ope all members of the pertinent subcoIl1lIlltte~0 . \R,eglo.nal. '. ked"'wnh approving the standard. Usu . y, II-known regional organizations Project scope: Specification of physical and medium access control layers of an air interface for interopera s are tas f the more we mobile broadbandwirelessaccess systems,operatingin licensed bands below3.5 GHz, optimizedfor IP-data .' organlzatlon .' will vote on the standard. Some 0 " T I ommunications Technology , the regional orgamzatlon munications Stalldards Institute (ETSI),. the \~) in Japan, the Telecomport, with peak data rates per user in excess of I Mbps. It supports various vehicularmobility classes up to 2, are the. EurocrrpeanC)Taneldecth°emASSoC'latl'on of Radio Industrithes nChid. a Bauscmoemmsseusm'catl'ons Associ.atio. Standards n KmIh in a MAN environmentand targetsspectralefficiencies,sustaineduser data rates and numbersof activeu ' ttee . ill Iy hl her th an achi ed by exrstmgmobile systems. .. " ' Co11lffilons Technology ASSOCiation ,. rM'A) in Korea, (ANSI-TO in the United States, and the ElAiTIA en. . that are aII sign icant Ig lev .I '. ti \". .. mUllIcaI. . TI _ TelecommunIcations .. Project purpose: Thepurposeof ihis projectis to enableworldwidedeploymentof cost effective,spectrumeffici (CCSA) in China, Comrruttee . ations Industry ASSOCiation). , Industries Alliance!Telecommumc Ubiquitous,always-onand interoperablemulti-vendormobilebroadbandwirelessaccessnetworks.It will provide': (electrOniCS efficientpacketbasedair interfaceoptimizedfor IP.The standardwilladdressend usermarketsthat includeaccess Internet,intranet,and enterpriseapplicationsby mobileusersas wellas accesstoinfotainmentservices. National Organizations .. . th United States is the American II known national standards organization thdate~lsts~:;fu ~merican wireless standards and This initiative, by the IEEE 802.20 study group for the standardizing of what are known as a new class The most we ANSI The TIA and EIA eve op .za tions have been radio LANs (RLANs), isjust one more piece of the puzzle as we move toward 4G mobile networks. or . National StandardS Institute fi at approval as a .na ti on at standard. Other national organl I ' e forward them to ANSI ror m . already mentioned. 2.7 WIRELESS STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS

as

, standards bodies have started to .;, ; ,S is the nature of the beast, so to speak, In m:m~ casee:'technicaIlYfeasible to iinplement !;~~(ma~er':next generation of wireless tec~ology bef~re ~ :a~~ continued to evolve in that fashion. el(land P an these efforts have be::.! on a reglonalleve an f wi reless cellular mobile systems was lp;Jliany cases, f IMT-2000 a global forum on the future 0 WI t moves toward a single global i¢h)!Y. in the fOr:p~d out a pathway for the evolutio~ of 3G cedllUl~yth~ore years before it becomes a IdThat forum m .' .' but will most likely nee m ~~d; That process IS still contlnumg

The modem era of technology {the last three decades by this author's definition), has provided the telecorri munications world with increased complexity, speed, and capacity of the available wireline, wireless, and fiber-optic facilities. This fact by itself has produced increased activity of standards bodies. Standardization is usually considered necessary for low-cost implementation and speed in bringing services to the market Furthermore, with the present global nature of the telecommunications industry, standards are necessary to ensure interoperability of equipment from different vendors on a worldwide basis. Standards organizations] usually consist of manufacturers, service providers, and users working together to promote physical characteristics for the anticipated telecommunications requirements of the future. With standards in place, user> can develop applications that build upon the standards. There are several levels of standards organizations; with their sphere of influence depending upon their makeup. Standards bodies are sponsored at the imple: mentation, national, regional, and international or global level. . :~
d

Global Organizations

. e ional organizations. These worldwid.e .' ceive recommendations from r g lobal standards orgaruGlobal standards orgamzatllons reva!for an international standard. There are.~ ~tandards Organization organizations give the fina appro .' Union (ITU) the InternatiOna . I T I mmunlcatlons ' zations: the Internatl~na ~Ieco technical Commission (IEC). (ISO), and the International ectro

QUESTIONS AND PROBLEMS


ff d' ision duplex t in St louisMO, was 1. Explain the concept. 0 t~~e ~~tenna for th~ first m~biJe radio-teleph~e sy~:; assu~ing li~e of sight 2. Assume that the transml~n~ ht of 250 feet. Determtne the range of. IS sy . I communications syslocated on a tower at a elg . h of 6 feet. Hint: Reference a tyPlca . .

Introduction
In the wireless 'telecOIn~unications arena, we have seen that many region~'standards

for wireless mobile systems have evolved. At present,there is no one·global wireless standard for cellular, Or wireless LAN~

transmiss;onfjan: a reeqc~~~~~~~:~;n:~~:n~ range that is givehn ~e~ml~e~na~~~~~h~~~load it and !n terns text to. In an .. FCCgOYand locate Tee mea u. . 3 Go to the FCC's Web site at ~.. " • bring a copy to class for diSCUSSion;

92

'Introduuiotl,to Wi~less Idei . .. . .,.. e . e communicaiions'Systems

and Networks

4:Search theint~rnet for Web sites about the e . of at least two Web sites devoted to thl t ,arly days of cellular telephone operation, Give the 5' . Ex I' ho IS OPIC, • pam !)wJrequency division duplex 0 eration W ' 6. Determine the ~ownlihk and uplink freq~encies ~ ~ achieved by first-generation cellular SVsbm,o-Ja", type of channel ISit? or MPS channel 445 on the B-side chan I 7 Det ' th d neis, . ermme e ownlink and uplink fre ' type of channel is it? quenctes for AMPS channel 326 on the A-side h I 8 Wh t tw AM· c anne s • a.o PS system components id ', . ' 9. Explain the purpose of the AMPS Pn:'VI e the air Interface? 10. Describe the sequence of e ts thsupervlsory audio tones, 11 Of ven at Occurs wh 12' Wh ~h,at~se ~s t,he ~PS cellular service provide~~ :;s~P,~ ce'~~'ar ~elephone is first turned on. . a IS e aslC difference between a mobil " m I enn rcanon (SID) number? ~~t event triggers an AMPS handoff opera:i~-~rrglnated cali and 'I m~!;i:e-terminated call?· , • yare supervisory aUdio tones and a' . I' n. 15. How many D"AMPS SUbscribers sAM,gnamgone needed for the AMPS system? t 16. What is the fundamental diff can abn . P5 channel support?' Illerence etween fi t ' c~ IIu Iar systems? . rs -generation cellular systems and sec:on,jil'~ne!rati:. 17. List at least two d-' 18 a vantages of the use of digital e d' 1 • How do second-generation cellular systems su nco Ing for cellular telephone systems, 9. What ISa 2,5G cellular system? . pport more than one user per channel? 20. What packet data transfer rate can the f ' Upon completion of this chapter, the'student should be able to: 21, What features do 3G cellular telephone ;51;mplemer~tation of COMA cellular support? 22. Compare the UMTS 3G II I ys ems proVide? • list the components of a wireless cellular network, 23 Wh ' ce u ar system and the cd 2000 • Discuss the functions of the following cellular network hardware components: MS, RBS, BSC, and MSC. • at ISmeant by harmonization in th ma 3G cellular system • Discuss the functions of the following cellular network databases: HLR, VLR, AUC, EIR, and so forth, 24. What are the basic characteristics f e context of 3G cellular telephone syste~sl • Discuss changes in the network components used to implement 3G wireless networks. 25. What is the PUrpose of the IEEE8~l~~poSed 4G cell~lar telephone system? ' 26, What are regional stand d ' ' , standards proJectl • Discuss the use of identification numbers with cellular ne~ork components. s 27. What are national stand:rd organ~zat~ons? What is their function? • Explain the basics of 557 signaling used in wireless cellular telecommunications networks, 28 Wh ' r s organrzatlons? What' th . f • Explain the basic operations needed for call setup and call release. ' at ISthe function of th It' ' IS err unction? 29. Visit the Web site of the T~An::;atl,on~' Telecommunications Union? 30. What organization puts th f I at ISt e fUnction of the TR-34 Committee? As wireless cellular network technology has matured the system has become more sophisticated and come tna stamp of approval on the IEEE802,11 wire"ess LAN standards? plex in an effort to implement increased system functionality and cope efficiently with an ever increasing number of subscribers. This chapter takes a look at the various hardware network elements that are used to create a wireless cellular network. These network elements may be divided into three basic groups: the mobile or subscriber device that provides the user's link to the wireless network, the base station system that provides the wireless system's link to the subscriber over the air interface, and the wireless switching system that provides, the interfaces to the PSTN and PDN and the correct information and. connections to locate the subscriber and the databases needed to support system operations, In this chapter, the structure and operation of 20 and 2.50 network hardware elements (i.e., SD, RBS, BSC, MSC, OMSC) is described and their relationship with other network elements is explored from both a hardware and software viewpoint. Also, an example of how the wireless network coverage area is expressed in logical terms is presented. The functions of the various network nodes that supply database information to the wireless network (HLR, VLR, AUC, EIR, etc.) are also presented to the reader. Additionally, this chapter gives some further insight into the signaling operations performed over SS7 that take place between wireless network elements that are used to set up the transfer of messages. As these network devices and their functions are still fresh in the reader's mind, the future of cellular wireless is foreshadowed by a brief description of the generic system architectural model for 30, The transformation of the wireless telecommunications network continues as it evolves toward an all-IP core network and radio access network (RAN), The presentation of more details about this topic is delayed until Chapter 7. This chapter concludes with-a section on the numbering and recommended identification systems used by wireless networks and several detailed examples of call setup and release operations. These examples are designed to tie together many of the hardware and network concepts presented within the chapter.

;!.

The t . I yplca post-fIrSt generation (IG) wi I consists of a1' . rre ess cellular telecomm . . entire Syste:v~OI: ~ubsystems or network elements designed to :~catlOns s~stem as shown in Figure fixed radio b~estati~n ~~G !~;u~!es~~6 ~ellul~?etworks, the air intedace ;:;:c~:~~~opera~ions in suppon ~ase station is u:al~y~~nl!::I~~~ ~~~rs~~~Scriber device (S~)~~~~~%~:::ed m IS UsuallyrefelTed to as the base st ti . IOn controller (BSC) and this poru a Ion system (BSS).· .. " s: on

-~~AJVLJll{

NeTWORK COMPONENTS

Ciimmon Cellular System Components

65

.uar wireless systems are standards based and therefore both the names of the system subunits and the CoIDmunicationinterfaces between them are-defined by the standard for the particular type of technology
'lIsed by the system (OSM, NA-TDMA, COMA, etc.). . .. In this chapter, the subject matter will.be dealt with in as generic a way as possible using common terms and definitions. Later chapters devoted to particular systems will present the names of the system componenls and interfaces using the correct nomenclature for them as specified by the appropriate system
standard.

elements and brief overviews of their basic functions. It should be pointed out again that all cellu,

I I I

,- ------ ~~~~~"-S~~t_:~ng System


--------

(NSS)

Subscriber Devices
The first generation of wireless cellular systems provided connectivity to the PS1N for voice service. The initial term used in several standards for the mobile transceiver supplied to the cellular system users was mobile station. As cellular systems have matured and added ever faster data service delivery to the traditi;'nal teleservices ava:ilable to the user, the term subscriber device (SO) has come to be used to describe the 'll1cl,ile transceiver for these newer systems. As the wireless network evolves toward an all-IP network, the ex.pressionused for the mobile transceiver is' expected to rnorph one more time with the eventual adoption of the term end terminal (ET). This name change wiU be in keeping with the mobile station's ability to connect to an all-Il' network and thus provide the functionality of an end terminal device. The subscriber device is the link' between the customer and the wireless network. The SD must be able 'to provide a means for the subscriber to control and input information to the phone and display its operational status. Additionally, the SO must be able to sample, digitize, and process audio and other multimedia (e.g., video) signals; transmit andreceive RF signals, process system control messages; and provide the power needed to operate the complex electronics subsystems that provide the functionalities mentioned earlier. Therefore, as shown in Figure3-2, the basic sections of the SD are as follows: some form ofa man-machine interface, an RF transceiver section, a signal processing section, a system control processor, and a power supply/management section.
Multimedia. Inputs (video, etc.) Local Data I/O

-'

__

---

I I I I I I I I I I I I I

I I

_____ Figure 3-1 . S.se Station

TypIcalwirelesscellularsystemcomponents.

SY;~(BSS)--

Base Station Controller (aSC) and l"ranSCoder

: :

~J
I

t__
I

Audio

r------------------------------------------,
I I I

Transmitter Subsystem

Multimedia

.DigiiaIs~~
.

Coding ,,;JdSigria!

:
I

PrOces.;ij,i:

'

L-...:...cc....c,r--~I

: Antenna

.The base sta:tion system is connected t VOicecalls and data se . 0 a fixed switching system (SS) th at usually consists of a m:~~:s to. and from the mobile station or subscriber d ~andles. the ~out~ngof both support the mobility rna SWl!chmgcenter (MSC) and various datab evice. This SWitching sy.stem nagement and secu .t· ases and functio I od .. connected to the PSTN th PON. n Y operatIOns of the system Th '. na n es used to networks through gate~ay e . h' other pUblic land mobile networks (PLMN ; sWltchmg system is usually work management systems s::~c ~s (GMSCs~. Other typical connections to ~ , an~ v~ous data messaging The various network el or er accounhng or .~dministrative data entry e sw!tchmg system are to netlink tha ernenrs that make up th .I systems . s t transport system me e wire ess system are intereo . . the actual voice call or dar ss~ges .between network elements to facilitate :ected by Communications . . . a services mformation. The rest of this s ti . ne ork operations and deliver , I ec on ISdevoted to desCriptions of these
Figure 3-2 T ypicaisubscriber

==."....,.J,-.,,__..~.,I

~~~:.~.'~'~~'~-~-:~:-~
To ail Subsystems

~
Receiver Subsystem

I I I I

deviceblock diagram .

....... --. ·1

L.

Common Cellular System Components

67

firi;ieJl'n~coiiiiii:uni'i:atl'o,!s

Systems and Networks as a standard telephone keypad, an alphanumeric text

:Wf~~:=S)E;:~ti~v,~~d':'i~Hi.IiCi1ip.) ~o1ie/speatker'

i'~I'l~irt\Hii.te'ririice··

can' be as slmple

combination. Or,it may be more sophisticated with soft-key keyp Jui~Cfi'oIis aild'iriUititnediacapability >rith a~igh-resolution color display and video camera or cameras f the transmission and display of video messages. Additional accessory interfaces usually also exist 10 ' vide' the option of hands-free operation, battery charging, and a service port or a data port for connection •• The RF transceiver section contains the high-frequency RFelectronics needed to provide the proper dig· ital modulation and demodulation of the air interface RF signals and the ability to transmit and receiv these RF signals. This section must also permit both variable power output and frequency agility under sy" tern software control. . The signal processing section of a subscriber device is usually based on digital signal processor (DS technology. Some of the functions performed by this section are speech sampling and coding! charmel c" ing, and audio and video processing. . .The system control processor provides overall subscriber device management. It implements .tIj' required interface with the other wireless network elements to provide radio resource, connection nianage; ment, and mobility management functions through software control of the various functions and operatic it must perform to set up and maintain the air interface radio link. Finally, the power supply section provides the power to energize the entire system. Usually, the SD i~ battery operated with sophisticated algorithms built into the system to save and minimize power usage ~ '-, much as possible in an effort to extend the battery life. When the battery becomes discharged, it may bd, . recharged through a home accessory battery charger or through the accessory connector of one's car. .

a PC.

.. 3 3 Fiigurc -

The base station controller's funcnon .

Base Station System Components


The base station system handles all radio interface-related functions for the wireless network. The BSS': typically consists of several to many radio base stations (RBSs), a base station controller (BSC), and aj transcoder controller (TRC). It should be noted that these last two network elements did not exist in the fhsr analog cellular systems. In IG systems the RBSs were connected directly to the MSC. The radio equipment' required to serve one cell is typicalIy called a base transceiver system (BTS). A single radio base station: might contain three base transceiver systems that are used to serve a cell site that consists of three 12()degree sectors or celIs. The radio base station equipment includes antennas, transmission lines, power couplers, radio frequency power amplifiers, tower-mounted preamplifiers, and any other associated hardware needed to make the system functional. The base station controlIer's function is to supervise the operation of a number of radio base stations that. provide coverage for a contiguous area (see Figure 3-3). It provides the communication links to the fixed part of the wireless network (PSTN)and the public data network (PDN) and supervises a number of air interface mobility functions. Some of these talks include location and handoff operations and the gathering of radio measurement data from both the mobile device and the radio base station. The base station controller is used to initially set up the radio base station parameters (channels of operation, logical cell names, handoff threshold values, etc.) or change them as needed. The B SC is also used to supervise alarms issued by the radio base stations to indicate faults or the existence of abnormal conditions in system operation . (including those of its own). For some faults the BSC can bring the reporting SUbsystem back into operation automatically (i.e., clearing the fault or alarm) whereas other faults require operator intervention in the form of an on-site visit by a field service technician. The transcoder controller performs what is known as rate adaptation. Voice information that has been converted to a standard digital pulse code modulation (PCM) format is transmitted within the PSTN over standard T1tEll1l telephone circuits at 64 kbps. Both TDMA and CDMA systems use data rates of 16 kbps or less for the transmission of voice and control information over the air interface. The transcoder controller's function is to convert the PCM data stream to a format suitable for the air interface. Vocoding is

Figure 3-4

. , d RES) (Courtesy ofLG Electronics Corp.). Typical cellular wireless equipment (SSC, TRC, an

. . di 'tal format suitable for cellular transed for the process of convertIng audio to algi another common I e rill us . . .' . . di I y rack enclosures. l11lSSlon.· RBSs) are contained Iii. standard ra 0 re a .0 . Physically, these units (I;ISC, TRC, and . Within the rack enclosure are subsyste~s d~voted I ns, Figure 3-4 shows what a·typical system I~ks ~e .. ental conditioning switching, commurucauo ~r~functions such as power ~~pply ::d:=d~:~:t cessing, and so on. Addillonal Chapters 5 through 8. cellular . base sm'tion. systems will. be presente In

Cammon CeUular System Components 69 68 Introdllction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks
Radio Access Network (RAN)

Radio

Base

Station

The racllo base statlon consists of all radio and transinission interface equipment needed to establish a radio link with the MS. the typical RBS is composed of several subsystems that allow it to transmit to the, MS on one frequency and to receive signals from the MS on another frequency. The two major wireless! cellular systems used today for the air interface function are a form of either time division multiple access1 (TDMA) or code division multiple access (COMA). The architecture and functionality of the air interface; components of the RBS 'will depend upon the particular type of access system it is used in. ' For TDMA systems, since frequency spectrum is a scarce resource, the primary function of the SSS is to optimize the use of available frequencies. The RSS supports this goal by having the ability to perform fre-i quency hopping and support dynamic power regulation and the use of discontinuous transmission modes. All of these features tend to reduce interference levels within a TDMA system. For CDMA systems, all transmission is performed on the same frequency. However, precise timing, power control, and COMA" encoding and decoding are required to optimize system operation. The necessary subsystem components required for the proper functioning of a CDMA radio base station reflect this fact. ' ,~ TDMA Radio Base Stations A typical TDMA radio base station consists of a distribution switch and an .. associated, processor that is used to, cross-connect individual timeslots of an incoming data stream to .me correct transceiver units and provide overall system synchronization, multiple transceiver units (one per timeslot) with the ability to perform RF measurements on received signals.Rf combining and distribution units to combine the output signals from the transceiver units and also distribute received signals to all the transceivers, an energy control unit to supervise and control the system power equipment and also to regulate the environmental conditions of the RBS, and power supply components (both rectified AC and battery-supplied DC) to provide power for system operation. CDMA Radio Base Stations A typical COMA radio base station consists of many of the same 'switching function, RF transceiver, power supply, and environmental conditioning components as the TOMA radio base station with the addition of a timing and frequency module that receives timing information from a Global Positioning System (OPS) receiver colocated with the RSS and channel cards that are responsible for the COMA .encoding and decoding functions on the forward and reverse .links to and from the subscriber devices. For CDMAradio base stations, a typical design might consist of a main and a remote unit. The main unit provides all the functions except for RF power amplification. The two units are linked by fiber-optic communications cables and power supply cables. These cables supply all the signals needed by the high-power RF amplifier and the remote electronics that are typically mounted on a tower near _thesystem antenna.

Iriiedace ,

l-IgdO'

Packet Core Network

. I CDMA wireless system (Courtesy 'of Ericsson). T yplca . I '.', . controlled by processors under stored progr~m. cO.ntro , , The operation of each of these ~ubsyste~s IS. nals and connectivity to every subsystem within .It and Furthermore, the SSC system provides. Uffil~::lg etwork or element (subsystem) management functions. computer interfaces to the entire syste~ for er r ward the MSC using message transfer part (MTP) protog Additionally, the SSC will supply slgn.alm tOnected to SS7 signalillg terminals located within the MSC col to transfer the messages over a PCM Ii!tc~n RBSs is done over a PCM link using link access protocol d the SSC Signaling between the BSC ~e . . . ~: o-channei modified for mobile (LAP~m) slgnahn~t f~~~~n;~nnected to the BSC will be discussed in Connections to the PON through an mterface UUl

Figure 3-5

greater length and detail in Chapter 7.

'

Base Station Controller


The base station controller functions as the interface between the mobile switching center and the packet core network (PCN) and all of the radio base stations controlled by the SSC. The PCN is a term used for the interface node (network element) between the SSC and the public data network. Figure 3-5 shows how the systems are interconnected. Aside from the necessary power 'supply and environmental conditioning components, the BSC typically consist of several subsystems all colocated in a main cabinet or possibly several cabinets, The system organization tends to divide up these subsystems into those that are used to provide a connection or link between the MSC and the radio base stations and those subsystems that control the operation of these aforementioned units. The typical connection from SSC to the MSC or TRC (if it is not integrated into the SSC) is over standard TllElIJ1 PCM links as is the connection fromBSC to RBSs. A standard switching fabric IS used within the SSC to direct incoming voice tails from the MSC to the correct RBS. Another switching fabric that can deal with subrate transmissions (less than 64 kbps) is usually also available within theBSC adding increased functionality to the system, If the TRC is colocated with the BSC, transcoding functions are also performed within the-combined sscrmc unit. .

Transcoder Controller. rf transcoding and rate adaptation, ranscoder Controller (TRC) consists of subsystems thlyat cpoem~:ed with the BSe; to yield an inteThe T , T 't or more common " . .' If The TRC can be either a stand-alone unn or, .' option of discontinuous transffilSSlon, rated The TRC also can ~uppon. the ~ow~r::~~!e transmission and the TRC will generate :auses in speech are detected, the mobile station ~I:l dls~d BSCrrRC can typically handle many l00s of f ," back toward the MSCNLR. An III egra "com ort no~se , " . odin techRBS transceivers, , h e the air interface using digital enc g Both TOMA and COMA systems transmn spe:cpS~~ ruses a PCM encoding scheme that yields a data niques that yield data rates of less than 16 kbps. Th 'from the PSTN must be transcoded to a rate rate for voice of 64 kbps. Therefore, ~oi~e messa~es ::~:g es originating from a mobile station, must be suitable for the cellular system and, sirnilarly, VOl~:0 rati~n takes place in the TRC. The incommg PCM transcoded into a format suitable for the PSTN. anal ~ I At this point 20-ms segments of the analog signal from the PSTN is convened back to dan an kn°go:~n:s'a vocoder. The vocoder compares ~e 2~edms di .tal code by a evice th tual value IS us to signal are converted to algi .. . the table that is closest to e ac .od ' . eech segment against a table of values. The entry in ndin PCM codes for the same 20-ms pen,

sscrec.

:oduce

a code word that is much shoner than ~e co;es:e

s s;m.

At

the

MS,

the process is r~versed to

This compressed code word is what ~ets ~ansrrutt~~ ~ the ~posite Ciirectionthe steps are duplIcated but obtain an analog voice signal. For VOIceSignalS go g f oding is the reduced data rate needed for
, . in the reverse order. The
0

b. dvantage to the use VIOUS a .'

vOC

r:

Common Cellular System Components 70 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks
BSS

71

speech transmission. Additional enhancements to this process have led to half-rate speech coders that encode speech signals in only 8 kbps, and other variations on this theme.

Swiching System Components


As stated earlier. the switching system performs several necessary cellular network 'functions. It DfO'VIOe,lIl the interface (MSC) both to the radio network portion of the system (BSS) and to the PSTN PLMNs. It also provides an interface to the PON and other network support nodes and gateways. Included]1 in the switching system are functional databases (HLR, VLR, AUCIEIR, etc.) that contain ItolJIliltlOn. about the system's subscribers, their network privileges and supplementary services, present SOs 10catilJnsi. and other, information necessary to locate, authenticate, and maintain' radio link connections to the scriber's devices. The following sections will provide brief overviews of the functions and' operation of various switching system subsystems and databases.
11'

VISitor Location Register


The visitor location register (VLR) is adatabase that temporarily stores information about any mobile station that attaches to a RBS in the area serviced by a particular MSC. This temporary subscriber information is required by the MSC to provide service to a visiting subscriber. When an MS registers with a new MSC service area, the new VLR will request subscriber information from the MS'sfiome location register (HLR). The HLR sends the subscriber information to the VLR and now if the MS either sends or receives a',': call the VLR already has the information needed for call setup. In a typical wireless network the VLR is • integrated with the MSC to form an MSCtVLRthus reducing the amount of SS7 network signaling neces- : sary to perform wireless network operations.
MUX - Muitiplexersrrraffic Interfaces

Fi
19ure

3-6

Typical MSC subsystems.


.

f 64 kbps

A Tl/H

carrier can transport

ied over these facilities as a OSO signal tha~ ha: abll

Mobile Switching Center


The mobile switChing center (MSC) is at the center of the cellular switching system. It is responsible for the setting up .. routing, and supervision of voice calls to' and from the mobile station to the PSTN. These functions are equivalent to those performed by the, traditional telephony circuit switch (e.g., 5ESS, OMS1001200. and AXE 810) used in a central office by the wireline PSTN. The traditional equipment manufacturers of this type of switching system all sell a cellular version of their standard wireline switch. Most of these systems also combine VLR functionality. in addition to the telephony switching functions, yielding an integrated MSCNLR system. The basic functions performed by the MSCNLR are as follows: the setting up and control Of voice calls including subscriber supplementary services, providing voice path continuity through the use of the handoff process, call routing to a roaming subscriber, subscriber registration and. location updating, subscriber data updating, authentication of MSs, delivery of short messages, signaling to other network elements (ESC, HLR, etc.) or networks (pSTN, PLMNs, etc.), and the performing of charging/accounting, statistical, and administrative input/output processing functions. . As shown in Figure 3--6, (he typical MSC consists of the following components or subsystems devoted to network operations: a central processor and associate processors, group switch. traffic interfaces, timing and synchronization modules, and software to provide operations and maintenance (O&M) functions. The next several sections will provide some additional detail about the operation of a typical MSC. Today's "trunk" connections (i.e., high-capacity facilities) between local central office (CO) exchanges and gateways to long-distance 'provider facilities make available the transport of high bit-rate digital signals. These local and long-distance interoffice connections are most often supplied by fiber-optic cables that are carrying SONET-based optical signals at bit rates in the lOOs of mbps range or higher (the ST,'?-3 signal carried as OC-3 is 155.520 mbps). SONET is capable of transporting multiple TIIEI/JI carriers and asynchronous transfer mode (A 'I'M) traffic. The standard voice call is

:ty-four digitized voice calls and the EI 'ta~a: ~~~:wn local exchange routing number(s~i.e .. f as just another central office exchange in t ~ .1 de and NNX is the exchange number). ere~I10N-NNX-XXXX where NI/ON is the three-digitthareap~~s is usually provided in the same man~~.as . 'th MSC to the PSTN or 0 er . nlEnlJ aerier faclitlles . fore, the connecuon from. e, b k facilities or through traditional T nc other interoffice connections, over fi er trun . depending upon the needed capacity.. th bTty to multiplex and demultiplex signals to and fro~hthe Therefore the MSC needs to prOVIde e a I I. subs stems (refer back to Figure 3-6). ese PSTN This 'functionality is built into the traffic mterface ~o the base TllEl/JI carrier signal after d interf~Ce units will bring the high bit-r~~a~ :~~~:sel;~~ey can be used to multiplex t?g~the~ m.~y demultiplexing of the signals from the P . . e transmitted over a high-speed transmiSSion aCI I y TllElIJI signals to form a high bit-ra~e SIg~a1I~o b ferred to as backhaul) or other networks as neede:. back toward the PSTN (this operallOn I~ t~ICa ~t:n Th connection between the MSC and t e ~e. S controllers it services is also implemented _ a acity fiber facilities. Recently, WI~ tl e ce u ar

car;:e;

rateit~ of thirty ~alls. The MSC can be thought

sa~e standard transmission TII~I/J1 f~~ltt~~e:~ ~:::~~i~-to-point digital microwave backhhau,;;~ providers have been providing their o~n ig te RBSs to BSCs and then from BSCs to t e works with TllEl!Jl or higher capacity from re~~ ble or prove to be too costly to install and lease. I location when traditional facilities are either n?t a~~ a. the MSC as it does in the PSTN local exch:mgej n The group switch provides the same funct.lon li;~lIH carrier arrive assigned to a particul:rr times o~ . both cases;the incoming voice ~al~ on t::::~:I~rrect BSC a combination s~ace and ti::l~lf::e~~:~t In order that the voice call can : irec . all to both the correct output lme an~ als . I group (TSl) switch must be used to ~edirect the vOIce:, example will describe the operanon of a typlca ., TllEltJ1 carrier Signal. The ronow g , . WIthin the" _ switch in an MSCNLR.

MSC Interface and Switching Functions

.I.&<

In<roauctltm to Wireless Te!icomTJiunications Systems and Networks Common Celluillr System Co_mponents 73

Example 3-1 ;,The'BSSAP protocol supports messages. between the MSe and the BSS and also between theMSC and MS. BSSAP is divided into two subparts: direct transfer application part (DT AP) that is used to send A certain mobile subscriber is registered to a certain RBS' .. . Cell BS,c:s t~ control the RBSs in that area. Show how the M;~ di that ~s loca.ted in an area that uses si .onnection and mobility management messages between the :tI~se and the MS, and base station system -agement application part (BSSMAP) that is used to send messages between the_MSe and theBSe scriber if the MS's RBS is controlled by BSe.#4. rects an mcommg call to the mobile sub· ']ated to the MS, a cell within the BSS, and the entire BSS. Database Functions As stated previously, the various :functional databases contained within the cellu'1 larnetwork switching system contain information about the system subscribers, their network privileges , and supplementary services, present location and other information necessary to locate, authenticate, and maintain radio link connections to the subscriber'S devices. Therefore, the MSCNLR is continually sendingand receiving data from the HLR, and AUe/EIR databases. The signaling and data transfer between the MSeNLR and these databases is carried out using MTP and secp over SS7. More detail about these operaiions will be supplied with the descriptions of the databases themselves.

MSC

---j----L_____

: ------~-----t-----~----- ------~-----l--I ': ---~_____

___

------L-I I

"

~_- _
I I

Output Lines

-----.

ToBSC#1

'-----.,. .
To BSC #6 ToBSC#4

H~Location

Register

Circ_-;'_ii_Cr,~nn_-_~~_ti_~n-:;'~~-_-_-_-_-_'-i-r_-_fun_. -_;_c..;~_·-_e~_ii.::o~:...-+~::-~ ,-~~~-_.

""

------j-----t----I I

"'1'-

___ ~--_--

___ L,_____

---f---~- ------~-----t----, ,
Group Switch

------, -----+----"

-~----~-----t----L '

-.

-. -. -.

To BSC #3 To BSC #2 To BSC #5

The home location register (HLR) is a database that stores information about every user that has a cellular serVice contract with a specific wireless service provider. This database stores permanent data about the '!Ietwork's subscribers, information about the subscriber's contracted teleservices or supplementary services, and dynamic data about the subscriber's present location, The type of permanent data stored includes .mobile station identification numbers that identify both the mobile equipment and the PSTN plan that it is : ·ils.~ociatedwith. This information would include a mobile station ID number that consists of a country '; cede, either a national destination code or a number planning area code, and a subscriber number. Other ID numbers as defined and required by the particular wireless network are also stored by the HLR The HLR also plays a major role in the process of handling calls- terminating at the MS: In this case, ihe -j. HLR analyzes the information about the incoming call and controls the routing of the call. This function is ;I j usually supported by the transfer of information from theHLR to the VLR within the MSe where the subscriber's mobile is registered.

Figur~3-7

-~3.ITSoo1TSQf./rso2ITs().jlperation of the group switch for Example 3-1.

'-J

f 0 igure 3-7, assume that the i . rom a to 23 could be used here) on a TI . e .mcolIUng VOicecall occupies Timeslot #21 (a I any earner signal co ed . ny va ue necessary demultiplexing, the signal is applied t th . nnecr .to a local exchange in the PSTN. After ments a path that allows th . al 0 e group swItch The grou .tch #4 (this latter' ~ '. e slgn_ to be redirected to available Time #2 P S~I processor imple37 10 ormation IS prOVided by the MSe) Th .. s or on the hne connected to BeS ~~eSe-d.and the voice call is correctly .routed toward B;~:c~e~;ns this function as indicated by FigT' n 109 messages to one another over SS7 so that th· - _e e and the BSe have been in contact

Solution' Referring t P-

p::~~~o~ #2. Note that a ~unctionally identical call path ~=S~~l:s:are of~he ne.w incoming voice call on task. or duplex operallon. There are duplicate subsystems aV~1 btsta?h~hed 10 the reverse direction to a e within the MSC to accomplish this ".~ zng unctzons To coordinate the . BSe must e~cha~ge messages using message ~:s~::m::f

MSC Sian"l

. calls both to ~d from the M.S, the 'MSe and

HLR Implementation and Operation An HLR can .be implemented as a stand-alone network element or it can be integrated into an MSeNLR to create an MSeNLRJHLR system. The HLR itself consists of the following subsystems: storage, central processors, I/O system, and statistics and traffic measurement data collection. Additionally, SS7 signaling links are maintained between a network HLR and the MSCNLRs and GMSe that compose a cellular network. Usually, a wireless service provider will have more than one HLR within a public land mobile network (PLMN) to provide the necessary redundancy to support disaster recovery. The information about subscriber subscriptions is usually entered into the HLR database through a service order gateway (SOG) or an operations support system (OSS) interface, The HLR has two basic functions. It maintains databases of subscriber-related information. This information may consist of both permanent data such as subscriber-associated MS numbers and dynamic data such as location data. The HLR is able to support typical database operations like the printing and modification of subscriber data and the addition or deletion of subscribers. More complex operations like the handling of authentication and encryption information and the administration of MS roaming characteristics are also performed. The HLR also performs call handling functions such as the routing of mobile terminating calls, the handling of location updating, and procedures necessary for delivery of subscriber supplementary services. HLR Subscription Profile A basic function of the HLR is to store a subscriber's profile. This profile defines a group of services ihat the subscriber has signed up for when ftrst contracting for mobile service. The types of services available are typically referred to as teleservices (telephony, short message service, fax, etc.) and bearer services (i.e., data services). These services are typically grouped into basic service groups that are packaged for sales and promotion purposes. A user's profile stored by the HLR may be updated or

!~Cdl~:~f~;:!~s:m #7. (~S7) ..The MTP provid~sreC:~) =s:~ ~r:~gn·nalg.connectio~control part . .,. ansllliSslOn links rennin . ara1l . mg messages over stan t~ ~ sidehan] co~ec~ons). Refer back to Figur: 0 el digital traffic links (sometimes referr~ s non system application part or BSSAP. It is used for'sta::~;d G~ se~p u~ei' functions is known as base . . M signaling between a MSe and BSe.

3~t ;~th

Common Cellular System Components

75

,-Uc _.'(

Introduct' ,!qn" to Wzre/ess Telecommunicatiims .",.,'

Systems andNetworks ~ommands or more easily by clicking on graphi,'•

,;t~~''''Y''''''W;fu''~'''''-Win~:~_:~:~pppu~er ifi ,11,~~)ll~1"fa,<;eOw) icons i~ a (

;",$t1pplel_IJentaryservices ' .' ca on program. ,......,.lli!" .. _" connected line,;ue system functions forw~d-ding, call :: d .call holding, multiparty service, C _, " "," ,-" like call waiting . 199:, .~ and identification, call ~ategones" there are many options that may be selected. These su amng, and so ~n. Within each of the :to aus~r s profile fairly easily as mentioned earlier. As well pplementary services, may be programme I y a~artIcular system standard, systems wil'l typically ff as the normal services that may be s '£i" used ill an attempt to provide some form of marketPlac~ d~;f;:e:~~:~:CifiC supplementary services p:a: , HLR/AUC Interconnection The authenti ti . mation for the MSs being used' th lea Ion center (AUC) provides auth '. " the authentication of a mobile I~ e cellular network. For GSM systems s:_nti~t~on. and encryption info; a ciphering key a random' b pon a request from a VLR the HLR' '1lcb e lvere tnplets are provided fa '. ' num er and . "WI e del" d a tri ', receives the triplet information in' a Signed response) for a particular b'l a tnplet (i.e., HLR forwards the rand response, to a request to the AUC f ,I_DoI.e subscnber. The' HI. forms a calculation lISin~~~u::;:er to the MSCNLR where it is passe;~:~:catIon ~f a subscriber. Th' the results are the same as th . dom number and returns it,to the MSCNLR the mobile. The mobile pc: il,
,

n~orking units (IWUs) are required to Units 'tefW sed to connect the base station controller orking

provide an interface to various data networks. These nodes are and hence the radio base stations to various data services netorks. This is necessitated by the fact that the MSC is a circuit-switched device and inappropriate for the smis of data packets. Presently, for both TDMA and COMA systems, these interworking units have voiv~d sion specific functional nodes such as gateway GPRS support nodes (GGSNs) and packet core into 7 .

network (PNC) nodes, respectively. These IWUs will be discussed in greater detail in Chapter

ViitaTransmission [nterworking Unit


u~

An early interworking unit, the data transmission IWU (DTl), was to alloW the subscriber to alternate between speech and data during the same call. The main functions ,.,.,...,. by." DTl were pm"""! w._;oo ....... ~" "",,,,,on for fax and data calls

,,=M,

through a modem.

SMS Gateways

and [nteT\llOfking Units To provide short message service (SMS) (i.e .• the sending of a text fflesSageconsisting of up to 160 alphanumeriC characters either to or from a mobile), two network elemetits

'

in GSM networks: the short message service gateway MSC (SMS-GMSC) and the short mesintdw?rking MSC (SMS-IWMSC). This first device is capable of receiving a short message ","0 resources of the ~..:::' response, the mobile is au then ticated .:' hum there to theHl.R. • frOIn ari SMS center (sq, interrogating an HLR to obtain routing information and message waiting data, non for each subscriber mal e AUC contains a processor a database f ~t IS now able to access ~il' artd finally delivering the short messag~ to the MSC of the receiving mobile. The second device is capable communications with the HLRal~~;;nce functions for subscriber info ror . e storage of key informa. A systems use a similar system f rmat~on: and an interface for· of receiving a mobHe-originated short message from the MSC or an.alert message from the HLR and deliv~nng these messages to the subscriber's SM3 center, Multimedia message service or MMS uses. a different lnterworking Lo . or authentication. ' providing data transmission through the wireless network than SMS does. Again, more detail cation Register ' " means

S~geservice

ate required

of

Interw ki I' , ., or ng ocation registers (JLRs) ed scriber to roam in several different are us': to provide for intersystem roarni o ' '; ILR, a subscriber could roam t systems. For instance, in a wireless cellul ng, The ~LR allows a sub-] consist of an AMPS HLR a d e ween an AMPS system and a PCS s st arIsyst~m using ~ appropriate] n partsofaPCSVLR. y em., nthlscase,theILRwould'·,

about SIvlS and MMS operations will be forthcoming in Chapter 7,

Network Management System

AuthenticatiOn , Center and Eq' Ulpment ldmtity Re . ter • ,


The authentication center (A UC) . d gIS vides the HLR with authenti .IS a atabase that is connected to the HLR keys, si.gnaling, speech, and ~:::o::arameters and ciphering keys for GS~eS authenticat~on cente~ pro, encryptIon provides over-the-air sec .all encrypted before transmission over th ys~e~s. Using the Cipher The equipment I'd ti . unty for the system. e air Interface. The use of' ..., , en ty register (EIR) d . ' GSM systems, the MSCNLR atabase IS used to validate the . database maintained by the G;: :que~t ~heErR to check the current sta~~at~s of mobile equipment. In status of an MS. The MS can be" ssocla~lon,,~is. global database is u date~ ~ MS through the global thus not approved for n t k black listed indicating that it has b p daily to reflect the current' approved for normal op:r:~~n iration. Or, the MS might be "white I~:::;~ported stolen or missing and within a wireless network. . he hardware necessary to perform AUCIEIR functions might be colocated and ~erefo~e registered and

Ailmodern telecommunication networks have some form of network management built into the system. this overarching management tool provides for overall network surveillance and support to the operation arid maintenance of the entire network. A wireless service provider will usually have a network operations center (NOC) devoted to the use of this network management system (NMS) to provide 2417 coverage of the system. Different equipment manufacturers have different names for these management systems; however, they all tend to have the same functionality, They provide fault management in the form of network surveillance, performance management. trouble management, configuration management, and security usually, management. the NMS has subnetwork ~anagement platforms that provide management of the circuit, packet, and radio networks. These subnetwork management platfonns also provide configuration, .fault, performance, and security management of their respective subsystems.

.Other Nodes

GatewayMSC
~ gateway MSC (GMSC) is an MS . cations n~tworks. Although a cellular ~t~at Inte.rfaces the wireless mobile network to . geographical area, not all of th ,.ork might have numerous MSCs t f " other telecommuniother PLMNs. Usually thi ese ~wltching centers need to be conn ed 0 .acilitate coverage of a large s connection i d ect to othe . lin gateway MSC or GMSC' T . s rna f: at one particular MSC d' r wife e networks or fu?~tion for obtaining I~ati~:,:ort I~ function as a gateway, the G:SC ~ MSC i.s now. known as a abili,?, to reroute a call to an MS ~r;atIon ~.om the HLR of a subscriber The contain ,an interrogation functions are typically im I . mg the Information provided by th' GMSC will also have the , p emented in the GMSC. e HLR. Charging and accounting

Other nodes that may be connected to the s).'litching system but are not really part of the telecommunications network itself are the SMS or service center (SC), the billing gateway (BGW). and the service order gateway (SQG). The service center acts like a store and forward center for short messages, the billing gateway collects billing information, and 'the service order gateway provides subscription management functions. '

Sewice Center The service center

is'used to facilitate the operation of short message service. 'It performs two functions: a mobile-originated short message is transferred from the cellular network to the SC for storage until the message can be transferred to its MS destination, or the SC stores a mObile-terminated short message from.

Common Cellular System Components 76 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Netuxnks

77

some other short message entity (5MB) that might or might not be a M5 until it can be accepted intended MS.

Billing Gateway pally, the


,\
oj

The billing gateway (BGW) collects billing information from various wireless network elements MSC and GMSC). The common term used fortheinformation collected by the BGW is call records (CDRs). As these call records are collected from the network elements they become files used customer administrative system to generate billing information for the system's subscribers. Int,)rm,.,;,. about monthly access fees, home usage and roaming usage charges, data and special services charges, and so on, are all used to generate a monthly bill for each subscriber.

Service Order Gateway


The service order gateway (SOG) is used to connect a customer administrative system to the switchirlll system. This system is used to input new subscriber data to the HLR or to update current subscriber already contained in the HLR. The SOG also allows access to the AVC and the EIR for ,,'!UJpUl"lIL tration. When a customer initially signs a service contract with a cellular service provider, the lnf<lffilaUOliI about the contract is entered into the customer administrative system. The administrative system '''lItlS'CUS,_ tomer service orders to the SOG. The SOG interprets the service orders and delivers the anrlfOlnri;,f'. information to the correct network elements in the form of network service orders.

3.2 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE VIEWS OF THE CELLULAR NETWORK


At this point in our discussion ofthe various hardware elements that are used to realize a cellularsystem, will be instructive to examine a possible implementation of a typical 2G/2.5G/2.5G+/3G wireless How the components are actually physically laid out and connected to provide coverage to a will be discussed. How the network. elements are viewed by system software is slightly different This view will also be presented and contrasted with the hardware point of view. See Figure 3-8 for illustration of a possible hardware layout used to cover a specific geographic area. Figure 3-8 depicts a fairly large geographic area with a potential subscriber base of approximately 100,000 that is served by a cellular network consisting of two mobile switching centers and a total of six base station controllers. The reader is urged to try and relate the demographic and geographic features of his or her own hometown location to this example. For the sake of clarity, all the radio base stations (cells) for only one BSC are shown. All the details of the individual cells are not included at this tiine. Fil1""~ 3-8 Hardware view of a cellularsystem. . MSCNLR, and between the MSCNL~s. : BS and its BSC, between each BSC and Its the may be implemented using ~X1st etween each ~ h b I sed from the local telephone company o~ . Y f both facilities. The gateb 'These PCM ~i~s nu: \.~ei:slalled by the service provider o~ a combl~all~~c:neror fiber span. Actual inicrowave. dlglta~ ~~ I~y~inked to the PSTN by some fonn of hlgh-Cd~~~ systems are available from the

way MSC IS mos e . d tenna statistics of cellular an that may be found statistics about cell site 10cal1O~sa_n an .: ed i the universal licensing system database FCC's Web site. This infonnatlon IScontain in at http://wireless.fcc.gov/uls/.

SoftWareView of aCellular Network


ed

Hardware View of a Cellular Network


The area on the left side of the diagram is served by MSC-l and thus will be known as the service area of MSC-I. The right side of the diagram is served by MSC-2 and is thus labeled as the service area of MSC-2. MSC-l interfaces with three BSCs (BSC-IA, BSC-IB, and BSC-IC) that are used to cover the three areas that the MSC-I service area has been subdivided into. Each of these BSCs has several to many RBSs serviced by it depending upon the population density and nature of the various areas (urban, suburban, business district, industrial, etc.). In some of the areas there may be both microcells and macrocells whereas other locations will just have macrocells, In the service area of MSC-2, there are three more BSCs (BSC2A, BSC-2B, and BSC-2C). ' . The RBSs might be named to reflect their connection to a particular BSC (i.e., RBS-2Al, RBS-2A2, and so on for RBSs connected to BSC-2A). In this diagram; the GM5C provides the gateway connection to the PSTN for MSC-l and MSC-2, and MSC-l has the switching system databases colocated with it. PCM links

II keep track of a mobile's location, complete ca s, d 'thin the cellular networ k t0 . ed b the network elements un er The operations p~OrIJl WI handoff but to name a few, are all direct. Y 'fferent appear~nce to the and maintain radio links thr~U~~~ cellula'r network therefore takes on a. sl.lghtlyhdithemfrom each other and program orsoftw~~ ~~cn~~bjects and areas take on logical na~es tOFidl::;~; shows the same geographic system software. y .. erfonn the required operations. Ig view oint. to allow the software the abdl~ t~~e the cellular network is shown ~om a s~~:::r~:um:rs and cell global area as Figure. 3-8; however,. IS twork is defined by location area Identity AI numbers define an area , As shown in Figure 3-9, thCeGnrembers locate a particular cell whereas .the L ge (that would include . I) b rs The nu . pdallng messa . identity (CG num e . .. h moved since its last locatIOn u II ithin the location area. 'for paging. Because a.mobl~e m:~l t:v~e mobile will result in a page to ~va1lery ce its location with the the LA! number), an mcommg . it is required toautomauc y up a mobile moves into another 10caUon area, . .

d:'~

, If

..VLR for the new location area.

C<tmmoTl Celluta System Components 79 78 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks
Location Area Identity LAl = MCC + MNC + LAC

~
Location Area Identity LAI=:II0-64-11

-- ... _
I. 1 I

Location Area Identity LAl=310,64-12

: Location Area : Identity 'LAI=310-64-21, :.______ ------\ ~ _••• ---\ Location Area Identity

Location Area Identity LAl = 310-64-22 ~- •• --.--_ , •• __ • "


I I I I I \

/ / /

/ / /

/Radio Network Controller (RNe)

_._,.__

• - -' -' Cell Gioballdentity (CGI=LAl+CI) 310-64-13-58 ~

Location Area Identity LAI=310-64-13 __ :..

.. LAI = 310-M-24 : ~ •• ' _- \ Location Area ~------: Identity ' \ LAI=3IO-64-23 ". " ,

\
\

:',

. :1
-

Location Area Identity LAI = 310-64-25 MSC~2 Service Area

\',.._

~~

MSC

--- ------'--

MCC - Mobile Country Code MNC - Mobile Network Code Figure

Boundary

3-9

Softwareview of a cellular system.

3.3

3G CELLULAR SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Figure 3-10.

For 3G cellular systems the network elements have transformed to reflect the transition of the toward an all-IP or packet network. This system evolution has resulted in the transformation of the function to that of a radio network controller (RNC). As shown in Figure 3-10, the function of the node is to provide the interface between the wireless subscriber and the core networks. The core are the circuit core network for all circuit-switched voice and data calls and the packet core network for all packet data calls. The RNC, although similar to the BSC, has additional functionality that guishesit from the BSC. Each proposed 3G system uses the same designation of RNC instead of BSC. Much more detail will provided about the components in 3G systems in Chapter 7.

erated by the translation . . r ng point addresses are gen . f d to SS7 signaling points. These sl?na I dation E 214) during the processmg 0 addresses asslgne. _. . t mobile global titles (Recomrnen . ofE 164 and E.212 mformatIon mo. for
e ra

Th 30

dio network

controller.

opeTh;a~O~:cbJo~:~~I~!:n!~~es~~~e:re~~. basic numbetring Fs~=:sd~::i~ IS th t alee up the sys em. the different network elements am offered in upcoming chapters.

i:b:~t:;:~~b~;s~:~:o:l

be

Subscriber Device Identification

3.4

CELLULAR COMPONENT mENTIFICATION

To switch a voice call from the PSTN to a mobile subscriber the correct cellular network elements must involved in the operation. It is therefore necessary to address these elements correctly or the' operation not be completed properly. The International Telecommunications Union (ITU), acting in its capacity global standards organization, has adopted several standards and recommendations to deal with issues. Recommendation EJ64 is known as the international public telecommunication numbering This recommendation, adopted in 1997, details the numbers to be used for assigning PSTN numbers on a global basis. This same recommendation followed when assigning numbers to cellular ~hones and provides a dialable number with which one can connect with the mobile through a wireless network. Furthermore, Recommendation E_212 deals with the numbering schemes for mobile terminals a global basis. As stated before, the transmission of messages between cellular network elements used facilitate cellular switching and control operations is accomplished through the use of SS7, in the fashion as the PSTN. Therefore, network switching elements or processing nodes are associated with

.d titication numbers associated h veral different system 1 en MA GSM or The mobile _subs~ribe~ de~i~~a~~~:eda;:~:dS upon the type of cellular tec~nt~gy n~~nal ~r inte~awith it. The Identification in ..b. ed in and the scope of the networ e.x., I d b the network It IS emg us CDMA) emp oye y. ill expand upon this topic. tional).1'he next few sectIons WI
Mobile Station ISDN Identification Nu~er
. . ~::::l~~~~::nations

ISDN (MSISDN) number IS a Glalable num

ber that is used to.reach a mobile te~ephon~. . h ther one is in North Amenca or In

is

in the MSISD~ number d=~th:~u~:ewM~ISDN numbers are formedld F ure 3 11 proVides a grap 1. other parts of the wor . Ig. -. SISDN number consists of the fol owmg: As shown, in North America an M . . MSISDN '" CC + NPA -+- SN _ d S~ = Subscriber Number Cod NP A= Number Planmng Area, an . e, ,

Where, CC = Country

80. Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


North American
1""'-"

Common Cellular System Components 81 . Assbown, the IMSI number consists of th~ following: IMSI = MCC + MNC + MSIN ere, MCC = Mobile Country Code (see Recommendation E.212), MNC = Mobile Network Code, and SIN Mobile Subscriber Identification Number. For a GSMnetwork the IMSI number is stored in the (s~bscribeddentity module) card that is inserted into the mobile telephone and provided to the subs~ri~r by the service provider. There is. also a temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI) number that may be used instead of the IMSI. This TMSI number is used to provide security over the air interface and therefore only has local sig'ficance within an MSCNLR area. .

Version

=\c-'-c=· ~

National Mobile Number

sThi

Rest of the World

International Mobile Equipment Identity


National Mobile Number

Por mtemiltional mobile networks, an international. mobile equipment identity (1MB!) number is defined aDdis,used to uniquely identify a MS as a piece of equipment to be used within the network. Figure 3-j!3 mclicatesthe structure of the IMEI number.
6 Digits 2 Digits

Figure 3-11 Formanon of the MSISDNnumber.

TAc

__
6 Digits SVN. '. [__

2 Digits

Example 3-2
A cellular telephone subscriber signs up for service in Springfield MA USA Wh .' .J MSISDN? . . ' , . at IS th~ subscnber Soluti6n: Since the country code for the USA is + I and th MSISDN will take the form e area \c, for Western Massachusetts is 413, ode

--1.:<

TAc

IFAcl

SNR.I

r - Identity (1MEl) Number

International Mobile EqUiPme.nt and Software Version

Formationof the IMEInumber. The be modified information about the software ~I IMEI can or application to includewithin the identity number. version of the subscriber device operating system software Cellular System Component Addressing

~-:---~--------------------In the rest of the world an MSISDN number consists of the following: MSISDN = CC+ NDC + SN

MSISDN = + 1-4 !3-732-XXXX

Where, NDC= National Destination Code. The NDC is similar to the NPA '.. The rest of the cellular network hardware components that make up the switching system or the base station network (fixed, wireless, etc.) being called. but can also identify the type o! system have either signaling point (SP) addresses or some type of logical name assigned to them to distinguish them from similar components within the network. Some of the addresses are predetermined by the International Mobile Subscriber Identity ITU Recommendations E.I64 and E.212 and some are translated into new addresses that conform to RecF. , ommendation E.214. The logical names of devices are assigned by the system operator. or International public land mobile networks an international mobile sub iber i . .,Additionally, physical areas of network coverage are also defined and given logical identification names to each subscriber. Figure 3-12 indicates how the IMSI I'S &0' rmed. sen er identity (IMSI) is assigned l' and.numbers to provide for the mobility management functions of the system or to define billing areas for regionalor national service plans.
3 Digits

MCC
National Mobile Subscriber identity (MS!) Numb.;

l¥tion Area Identity


.The location area identity (LAI) is used for paging an MS during an incoming (mobile terminating) calI and I9flocation updating of mobile subscribers. Figure 3-14 shows the structure of an LA! number. ~\i4s shown, the LA! consists of the following:
.M.SJ,Ni': '

·•.. .'·;'.A.i.,.'/"

IntematiOnalMobile SubScriber Identity (lMS!) Number

'~f'··

LAl = MCC + MNC + LAC

Figure 3-12 Fonnation of the IMSI number.

:~ete, again, MCC = Mobile Country Code, MNC = Mobile Network Code. and LAC = Location Area ~~, which is 16 biis in length and therefore alIows th€; network operator 65,536 different possibleareas '.l!r'.cOdes ithin a network. The code is assigned by the mobile operator. w

~I"------------------------

'I

82~I~trriluai01i to Wlrele,ssTelecommunications Systems and Networks


3 Digits 1-3 Digits

Figure 3-14

Formation of the location ar:a identity number.

3 Digits

1-3 Digits

-16 Digits Maximum .

Common Cellulo.r System Components 83


actually be a combined node that performs several functions (e.g., MSCIVLR or SS7 messages use one address for the node and another subsystem address (SSN) to '''''"\ll''~W the individual element within the node (SSN 6 for the HLR, SSN 7 for the VLR, SSN 10 for etc.), might

S'~(hfJ-- Location(LAl) Number Area ,Identity


Maximum 16 Digits

Qk,bal Title and Global Title Translation


titie(GT) is an address of a fixed network element. However, the GT does not contain the information needed to perform routing in a SS7 system, The derivation of the correct routing information is p~rformed by the SCCP translation function. The global title is used for the addressing of network nodes such as MSCs, HLRs, VLRs; AUCs. and EIRs in accordance with E.164. , ' Consider an incoming call to a GMSC. The first operation necessary by the wireless system is to locate the MS. The GMSC uses the MSISDN (MSISDN = CC + NP A/NDC + SN) number to point out the appropriate HLR. Usually the CC, NP A or NDC, and one or more digits of the SN are used from the MSISDN to .,create a GT to identify the' HLR A mobile global title (MGT) is created during various location updating or mobility management functions initiated by the mobile. In the case of a GSM system, during a location updating function, the MSCNLR only knows the mobile's IMSI number. This number is used to create an MGT number that points to the'mobile's HLR. Figure 3-16 shows how the MGT number is formed. In this case, the E.164 part is used al~ng with the E.212 pan to form theE.214 MGT.

A global

Maximwn 16 Digits

Location Area Identity (LAl) Number

~=."'=M='CC=··=",·=·::==MN:.;,CC="
Figure 3-15

.=.

===:'L:A=b;.::·

=:'I~·'·.=,:':";6;li;,;,-

,;:1-

~~g~::bI:rentity

Fonn.3tion of the cell global identity number.

id~~t~y '(CG~) is used for the u?ique identification of a cell within a location area. It ' a location area ng . Its to t e e?d of a LAl This also allows for the possibility of 65,536 cell sites . Again, the code IS assigned by the mobile operator Figure 3 15 h the CGI number. . sows e Structure

io~:~~l~:~:;i

Cell Global Identity

IMSI

Radio Base Station Identity Code


A radio base station identity code (BSIC) is used by the mobil '. .s-: less network. [his code allows an MS to distinguish between ~~ff~~:::tor. to Ide?hfy RBSs ~ithin the . usually consists of-a 3-bit network color code and a 3-bit base station C:l:;~~~~ng base stauons. The

E.l64 Part MCC MNC MGT (E.214) Figure 3-16 Formation of the mobile global identity number. " MSIN

Location Numbering
ID numbers may be assigned by th ice provii] scriber features such as regional or :a::~~~~~in~

;:a:.~.

. various regional or national areas to provide

Addressing Cellular Network Switching Nodes


Messages between both PSTN and PLMN k . .... networ elements are sent over the SS7 network this operation, signaling point addresses or point codes are assi ned .. processing nodes. Recall that one of SST s func . g . to ,the network switching provides the ability to communicate with wireles~o~~b~::~:nts, slgna.llD~ connection control speech connection. Additionally, message transfer part (MT~ork s~~tchl~g system databases ~belreq.uthi~edthroushs'ng the signal message to the correct destinat:~~~:: of e WI tn e 7 network. ' T
0

',

elements and part (SCCP), , without any

The necessary global tide translation (G'IT) is performed by a SCCP translation function to provide the correct signaling point address information for the subsequent routing of the message to the correct network node. This SCCP functionality permits MTP routing tables within individual signaling point locations to remain a manageable size as wireless telecommunications networks become larger and more complex. The next section will provide some examples to tie all these concepts together.

t~eeV:=ol~.!I:~~~7t:attoanePerfO~I' ' avat .

ii
U

ANSI-based SS7 network numbering for th k SP . ' addresses that specify the telecommunications se~i;:t,:r'd (Ns ~nslsts of constructing c 3-byte (24-bit) P'£ vnl ". 0-255), and the member number (M _ 0-255)' th - 0-255), the network cluster number (C ID e 0 owmg format: . ali . CoM. Cluster numbers usually denote network geographic areas . . slgn mg pomt code (SPC) = Nd specific node within the network The servi id odes or secuon, s an member numbers identifya . ervtce provi er c es are • b B II '. member numbers may be set by the service ' .d .'B 11 S~L Y .e ~re whereas the cluster provi er or e core In Special instances. Since a ""lliUIUI:.

3.5

CALL ESTABLISHMENT

The topic of call establishment was first introduced in Chapter 2 during an overview of thefirst-generation analog AMPS system. At that time, the reader was introduced to the many handshaking functions that were performed between the MS and the BS and between the BS and the MSC to complete can setup and handoff functions. Now that more detail about the network elements and databases of digital wireless cellular systems has been introduced, it would again be instructive to take a look at some of the basic wireless

84
,:·'1

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems andNetworks Common Cellular System Components 85

"network system functions that are involved with voice call establishment. The discussion of the delivery of 1 digital services over these networks will be Covered in Chapter 7. , Within the wireless mobile industry, the various possible voice call and data service circumstances that i can occur are called traffic cases. Depending upon the type of traffic situation, radio resource mariagement, oi " connection management, and mobility management operations are needed to maintain the radio link: between the mobile station and the

base station

system and the MSe. These management

functions alii

reside at the Layer 3 or network layer level of the OSI model. The messages sent between the MS, RBS, :,

, . '1' be' I ased Step #8' Using the mo b'I e s MSISDN '; the MSCNLR determinesI the hi temporary MSRN num r IS.re ~ '. . #9' The MS is paged in all the cells' that malce up I IS ocalocation area where the mobile IS located. St~p . th ing message, authentication is performed and g tion area. Step #lO: When the MS respon s to .e pfua tions are confirmed the call is connected from I th ti ti 0 and encryption nc , encryption enabled. If the au en ca I n ffi h I has been selected for the air interface. the MSC to the BSC to the RBS where a tra ICC anne ,

BSe, and MSC using eitherLAPDm (modified for mobile LAPD) or MTP protocols implement Layer 2 or' data link layer operations. The type of radio signals, modulation, and timing specifications used by the MS and the RBS are Layer I or physical layer characteristics. In Chapter 4, the suite of radio resource, connection, and mobility management operations will be presented in a slightly different view after the details of cellular architecture are presented, ,

Mobile-Terminated Can,
, The mObile-terminated call consists of the steps shown in Figure 3-17. Step #i: Any incoming call to a mobile system from thePSTN is first routed to the network's gateway mobile SWitching center (GMSC). Step #2: When the wireless mobile system detects an incoming call at theGMse, the mobile system must first determine where the mobile is located at that particular moment in time. To determine the mobile's location, the GMSC will examine the mobile station's MOISDN to find out which home location regiSter (HLR) the mobile subscriber is registered in, Using SS7 (SeCP), the MSISDN is forwarded to the HLR with a request for routing information to facilitate the setup of the call. Step #3: The HLR looks up which MSCIVLR is presently serving the MS and the HLR sends a message to the appropriate MSCIVLR requesting an MS roaming number (MSRN), so that the call may be routed. This operation is required since this information is not stored by the HLR; therefore, a temporary MSRN must be obtained from the appropriate MSClVLR. Step #4: Ari idle MSRN is allocated by the MSClVLR and the MSISDN number is linked to it. The MSRN is sent back to the HLR. Step #5: The MSRN is sent to the GMSC by the HLR. Step #6: Using the MSRN, the GMSC routes the call to the MSCIVLR, Step #7: When the serving MSCNLR receives the call, it uses the MSRN number to retrieve the mobile's MSISDN. At this point the
MSISDN: 1-413.538-1111 IMSI: 210·20.5678 MSCNLR: VZOOI Step #3

, ile sub 3 l8 Step #l' The originating mobile su _ obile-originated call consists of the steps shown I,n Fllg, h-an' using ~ common control channel. If ure n'el ' ' b th obile for a signa 109 c . . cn 'her call starts With a request y em th bil Step #2' Using its assigned signaling chans " ali channel to e mo I e. bil possible, the system assigns a sign ng" th tem The VLR sets the status of the mo Ie to nel the MS indicates that it wants servlce, from e ~ys e~ Step #4: The mobile specifies what t}jpe of ''b~y.'' Step #3: Authenticati~n and encryption are pe 'arty to 'be called, The MSCNLRacknowl' service it wants (assume a voice call) and the n~m~r between the MSC and the BSC and a traffic edges the request with a response, Step #5: A link I\set U?r s several steps: the MSC requests theBSC to channel is seized, The acquisition of the traffic c.hanne ~eqUl idle channel available, if a channel is idle the assign a traffic channel, the BSC checks. to see If ~ere ~~elRBS sends a message back to the BSC indi, ,

M bile-Originated Call o 1, Am

:rr::
I:

BSe sends a me~sage to the RBS t? activate the ; r:~:n'ds on the assigned traffic channel, the BSC sends "eating that the channel has bee~ a~l1vated, the M n~ is read ,and finally the MSCNLR sets up the co~. a message back to the MSC to indicate .that the chan, t to the mobile to indicate that the called party IS nectio n to the PSTN., Step #6: An alerting message diS, ethn,PSTN exchange that is serving the called party s " The ri ging tone generate 10 e k ds a being sent a nnging tone, e nn I, ile When the called party answers,. the oetwor sen is transmitted through the M~C ba~k ~ thethmo~I, II has been accepted, The mobile returns a Connect Connect message to the mobile to indicate at e ca Accepted message that completes the call setup process,

CELLA

Step #6
Figure 3-17

Step #6

MobUe-tenninated call operations. Conversation Commences


Figure ;3-18

Mobile-Originated call operations,

Common Cellular System Components 86 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

87

Call Release

. rformed during the call release operation. The first that two basic network functions had ~obe pe ccond operation was a radio resource manageconnection management function and the s .

. .ffi cases that can exist. Location up anng an Callrelease initiated by the mobile consists of the steps shown in Figure 3-19. Step #1: The mobile three examples are but a few of the. pOSSible ~hese last few examples have been presented Disconnect message to the RBS, the message is passed on to the BSC where it is sent through a . cases will be looked at III Ch~pter. .' dividual operations R~ded by a IDlUlagerR.':IIL, reader's understandmg of the various m link to the MSC. Step #2: The MSC sends a Release message to the MS. Step #3: The MS sends a g ~: overall system-level functions that occur. go~ of mcreaksm Complete message back to the MSC as an acknowledgement that the operation is complete. Step #4: mobile networ an d . network initiates a channel release by sending a Clear Command message from. the MSC to the ESC. BSC sends the Channel Release message to the mobile through the RBS. Step #5: At !\Jis point, the PROBLEMS sends a Deactivate message to the RBS telling it to stop sending periodic messages to the mobile on a .. '..• 'QUESTIONS AND . . trol channel. Step #6: When the mobile gets the Channel Release message, it disconnects the traffic cnannei.j•. }<. . rf' th "air interface" function? and sends the LAPDm disconnect frame. The RBS sends an LAPDm acknowledgement frame back to the.> .. hich twO elements of a wireless cellular system)pe orm e .'.W . f . of the transcoder controller. mobile. Step #7: A Release Indication message is sent from the RBS to the BSC. Step #8: The BSC sends What IS the unction. .' t) an RF Channel Release message to the RBS that is acknowledged as shown, as soon as the RBS .••• What is the function of the visitor loca~on regis er; . . ' .' .W· at ·.sthe function of the home location register. ) h .' transmitting on the traffic ohannel. After a short period (regulated by a BSC system timer) a Clear Corn-: .•. ... . bll 'tehlng center. ) plete message is sent to the MSC from the ESC. '·5· What is the function of the mo ue SWI I ts provide security functions for the system. '.' . t wireless cellular network element or e emen 1· • :.6. Wha d 'II· global identity number correspond to. "7 What oes a ce . 8' The LAIis used for what purpose? II 1 •. "f' f radio network contro er. ~ 9'. What is the unction 0 a , t d with 3G cellular networks, . 10. Name the two core networks assocl~~ISDN number and an IMSI number? 11 What is the difference between ~n ) What is the Pcurposeof a .glo~altitle. Connection .13. What is a mobile global tltl.e, ) . Management Data Indication 14. What is global title translat~o:'the mobile country code for Mexico. Disconnect (FACCH) tJ> (Disconnect) :.~ "15 Using the Internet, determm '. in number Connection Release Explain the function 'of a mobile S~tlO~ roa~~;tication ~nd encryption performed? Data Request 17' During a mobile·originated call, w ehnIS aUb'l during a call rei.ease operation? I Step #2 Ma;;;~~~; <:Jt.==Re::;lease=====, . <:1 (Release) • th f t performed by t e rno ue : 18. What is e irst s ep . a call release operation? Release Complete ·.19. What is the last step performed dunng . olved in a mobile-originated call? Data Indication Connection 20. What wireless cellular network elements are mv . Release Complete

was a

tr:

d'

ISS

II
3>Time

··
1.~:
.1£:

<l

Management (FACCH)

Step #3

(Release Complete) Data Request (Channel Release)

B>

<J

Clear Command Step #4

;:==============i>·
Step #6

Disconnect

<2li='

Deactivate SAACII 2~==~==:J1 Step #5

Release Indication

:>=1
Clear Complete
-"

-< Rjo'
Step #8
I

Step #7 Channel Release

RF Channel Release Acknowledgement


--

"-2;>

.......

.......•,,-~
Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

MobUe Station
(MS)

Base Transmitter StatiGn (BTS)

Base Station ConlroDer (BSC)

Figure 3-19

Call release operatibns.

Wirele$.! Network Architecture .and Operation

89

mobile telephone service, offered by AT&T and the Bell Southwestern Telephone Company in St. LOuis; Missouri. consisted of several colocated transmitters on the top of Southwestern Bell's headquarters. A. 250-watt FM transmitter paged mobiles when there was an incoming call for the mobile. This system's high~powered base station transmitters and elevated antennas provided a large coverage area and enough signal power to penetrate the urban canyons of the city. At the same time, however, the frequencies used by The cellular conce t d i . p an Its potenttal for increaSing the nu b f wi the' system could not be used by any other services or similar systems for approximately a seventy-fivearea had been proposed many years bef . m er 0 wireless users in a certain <>ec)gnlpbiicl mile radius around the base station. ore It was ever put into p ti' I t» bY th e first cellular systems dictated .. rae ca use. The analog ".:chl~ol,ogy :':'The first proposed cellular system would use many low-power transmitters with antennas mounted on a certain type of cellul hi . .. technologies and the public's very rapid ar arc !lecture. As time has past newer shorter towers, to provide a much shorter frequency reuse distance. The area served by each transmitter today's cellular systems to change in a I ;~~Ptan~ of cellular telephones has caused the 3J':Chiitecturl~s vi.ouldbe considered a cell. The first cellular systems used omnidirectional antennas and therefore produced capacity. n e 0 to a ~ust to the new technologies and the added demand cells that tended to be circular in shape, As the technology used to create more efficient cellular mobile sysCapacity expansion techniques include the s littin . or s ' .: tems has evolved, so has the design and implementation of the cellular concept. These changes will be dus.ters over larger clusters as demand and technolo gch ectonng of cells and the overlay of smaller . outlined in this chapter. has Increased. cellular operators have turned t dg~ anges warrant. As demand for newer data backhaul traffic from their cell sites to a common, . e development of their Own private data networks The Cellular Advantage PSTN or the PDN. on point of presence where a connection can be made to the The deployment of a large number of low-power base stations to create an effective cellular mobile system As cellular systems have matured and become nationwide . ,. is alarge and expensive task. The acquisition of land for cell sites; the associated hardware; radio base stataken on an even more importa..~t role in the op ti f wi wueless networks, mobility management has tion transceivers and controllers; antennas and towers; the communications links between the base stations, 0 is used to keep track of the current location of :a 1~ln wl~ele~s cellular networks. Mobility management 1 base station controllers, and mobile switching centers; and finally; the cost of the radio frequency spectrum cellular handoff. Although not as glamorous as c:/ ar su scnber and to assist in the implementation of '~d to implement the system can be enormous. Mobile service providers can only recover their costs work security have become more important issue rnty hmanagement, power management and wireless net.·'and make a profit if they can support a sufficient number of mobile subscribers. The cellular concept allows operan d wi ues as t e cellular industry had' . . on an Wireless system engineers fine-tune their desi '. e s IDtOIts third decade , ':'a large enough increase in capacity- to make these operations economically feasible. even greater efficiencies of operation.' gns to budd more secure systems and achieve. ;'~" The implementation of the basic cellular architecture consists of dividing up the coverage area into a This chapter will e . all ' . xamme of the abovementioned iss :(.;_number of smaller areas or cells that will be served by their own base stations. The radio channels must be IUlar arChitectures and network operations. ues and present several examples of typical eel'. :'-jillocated to these smaller cells in such a way as to minimize interference but at the same time provide the ,,~ecessary system performance to' handle the traffic load within the cells. Cells are grouped into clusters
'1 .

Upon ~ompletion of this chapter, the student should be able to' • DISCUSS cellular concept and explain th d the . • Draw a diagram of a typical cellul I t e advanta~es of frequency reuse . • D' h ar c us er an explain the mean' ff ISCUSSow the capacity of a cellular syst b Ing 0 requency reuse number • E~plain the difference between cell splitti:;::a~e;o~~dnded. " ' • Dlscu,ssthe use of backhaul networks for cellular s t g. • Explain the concept of mobility mana ement a y~ ems. • Discuss the concepts of pow g nd diSCUSS operations it supports the er management and network security. .

~ullineQin Chapter 2, the concept of cellular telephone. service was first proposedin the 1940s. concept would provide a method by which frequency reuse. could be maximized thus in . roultip1ying the number of available channels in a particular geographic location, The concept of ('frooU.enc:yreuse itself was not new at the time for it had been the guiding principle of the licensing of AM rolollIlerc:lalbroadcasting stations for years and is still used today to determine the granting of licenses for in the broadcasting bands (AM, FM, and TV) and other radio services. However, in broadcastsimplex or single-direction transmission operation) the goal is to reach as many receivers as possible single broadcasting transmitter. This usually entails the use of a high-power transmitter to provide "·""hV'rn~:e· of some particular geographic or trading area However, there is nothing to prevent the. same fre.assignment orcochannel from being used in another area of the country where the signals from cochannel stations do not extend to it. Since most users of the radio frequency spectrum recognize it :<JIli'lallmitedresource, attempts are usually made to use it as efficiently as possible. \ duplex' or two-way radio' operation, where a system design goal is to allow as many simultaneous . " of the available radio spectrum as possible, the reuse of that spectrum is crucial to maximizing the of potential users. The cellular concept provides a means of maximizing radio spectrum usage. ·Another benefit of cellular radio systems is that the amount of mobile output power required is not as large . due to the smaller cells used and therefore the power requirements for the mobile are reduced, which allows ....longer battery life and smaller mobile station form factors.

_her

Ii:
\

Wireless Network Architecture and OPeration 91


"

I'·
I I!
I

90

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

that make use of all the available radio spectrum. Since adjacent cells cannot use the same frequency chat nels, the total frequency allocation is divided up over the cluster and then' repeated forjother clusters in ~ system. The number of cells in a cluster is known as the cluster size or the frequency reuse factor. For cellular architecture planning one must be concerned with interference from radio transmiuersf other cells using the same radio channel and from interference from other transmitters on nearby channe ' The first type of interference is known as cochannel and the latter is known as. first-adjacent channel, sed, ond-adjacent channel, and so on. Using the cellular concept and careful design techniques can increase maximum number of system users substantially. The following example will illustrate this point. .,; Microcelfs

I'·

_--- --------

th;

;~
\

Example 4-1
Consider the following case: a service provider wants to provide cellular communications to a partie geographic area. The total bandwidth the service provider is licensed for is 5 MHz. Each system subscri . requires 10 kHz of bandwidth When using the system. If the service provider was to provide coverage Croni only one transmitter site, the total theoretical number of possible simultaneous users is 500 (5 MHzlIQ) kllz/user = 500 users).lf, however, the service provider implements a cellular system with thirty-five trans~ rnitter sites, located to minimize interference and provide total coverage of the area, determine the new! system capacity.' kHz of bandwidth per cell (5000 kHzI 7 = 714 kHz), and this is repeated over the 5 clusters (35n = 5). Now, each cell has a capacity of7l simultaneous users (714 kHzllO kHVuser.= 71 users) or a total system capac-: ity of 2485 users (35 cells x 71 users/cell = 2485 users). This is a system capacity increase of approximately' 5 times.

Microcells

\ \ \

\ \ \ I I \ \ I I I I

~,
'j!
I

j'

l.

~~=~~i
I I I

Solution: Using a cluster size of.7, the total system bandwidth is divided by 7 yielding approximatclyZla

I I

Cellular Hierarchy
Before examining the technical characteristics of frequency reuse and reuse number, it is helpful to define the hierarchical structure of today's cell sizes. The wireless industry has more or less settled on some partic-: ular names to indicate the size of a cell. Going from the smallest to the largest, cells that are less than 100 meters in diameter are known as picocells, cells with a diameter between 100 meters and 1000 meters (I . Ian) are known as microcells, and cells greater than 1000 meters in diameter are known as macrocells. These definitions are also related to the various possible operating environments that one might find oneself' in. Picocells are usually found in the indoor environment (e.g .• inside of buildings), microceJls are found in the outdoor-to-indoor and pedestrian environment (urban), and macrocells are found in the vehicular and high- antenna environment (suburban). Each of these particular environments presents a different type of radio link propagation scenario that affects the required equipment and other technical aspects of the hardware used to implement the particular type of cell. Newer 'technologies have expanded our concept of cells to include the global environment served by a variety of satellite systems and smaller cells for personal area networks (PANs) usually considered being less than ten meters in diameter. Although the terms have not become universal yet, cells with global coverage have been referred to as megacells and very small ceJls have been referred to as femtoeells, Figure 4-1 i illustrates the relative coverage areas of the various cell sizes. It is entirely possible to have mixed environ- :> ments that are served by several different types of cell structures simultaneously.

--Figure 4-1 Relative coverage areas of different size cells. Shown in Fi ure 4-2 to represent a typlcal cell' s covera~ eonsideralio~ of the shape to use for a.typ1~~0;~g~~:~ .' iti I . a service provider's network. Any im a c~:~:~ed with the fact that a true circular coverlewdn, and the en,vironment ~~r~;~

bconditions,

_.;-e

4.2 CELL FUNDAMENTALS


!~ :

\:iii~

Since the ftrst cellular systems usually employed omnidirectional antennas and thus theoretically produced circular-shaped cells, the reader might be puzzled by the cellular industry's de facto choice of a hexagon as

~bu::,i!t~~r~ c~~!::~~ t~ g:a;i~:rtiO? of an antenna; I:~::;~:sa:::: :;a:~;:;;:t ~ircies or re usin circles to layout a network s covera.ge are. 4-2 one can see that the use of a hexago~. ;';=~:o~s are~s if the circles are overlapped. Refemng ~~ ~a:a wifuout any overlapping cells or ga~s ~ ')IQ-,vever .allows for the complete the~re\1cal covera~e 0 be used but the hexagon is the closest approXlma ·cQve~ge. Squares or equilateral triangles :uld stheoretical calculation of several system parameters the - f', [J" to a circle. The use of hexagons also m es ch easier.

92

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

Wireless Network Architecture and Operation

93

, 'terrnsof the required hardware and, acquisition of cell sites, increases the complexity of the net, 'increases the number of operations required to provide mobility. The following example will me relationship between cluster size and reuse.distance,

&ample4-2
_<IT

.e

.u.o,vvv.-

system cluster size of 7, determine the frequency reuse distance if the cell radius is five kiloRepeat the calculation for a cluster size of 4.

Figure 4-4 shows the typical arrangement for a cluster size of N = 7 and the reuse distance for cell is the cluster size typically used for the first-generation AMPS system used in the United States.

Figure +-2

se

fh

exagons to represent cellular Coverage.

Reuse Number
Inanatte mp tt 0 gam the maximum reuse of freq . '. ' " .f ,' To determine the minimum-size cluster that can u:cles ~r.a cellular system,cells are arran'ged in d generated by cochannel cells Since th ' aluse . 11 IS necessary to calculate the mterterence . ere are sever options to the' fI ' sever al examples), a relationship to determi th '. size 0, ce I clusters (see Figure . lid' ne e reuse distance has b d . Size, ce ra IUS,and the,reuse distance Th fr .' een etermined that relates . ,e equency reuse distance can be calculated by: where R - ce11ra d'IUS and N = reuse pattern. ,
N=3

A frequencv reuse diagram with the reuse distance, D, indicated' (cluster size N=

7).

D=R(3N)112

As mentioned earlier, using the expression ;2 + ij + p, one can show that a possible value for N is 7. As shown in Figure 4-4, the hexagons (cells) are arranged with one hexagon in the center of a cluster and six other hexagons surrounding the middle hexagon. Adjacent clusters repeat the previous pattern. The reuse' distanceis found from the following equation:

N=4

Therefore, for a cluster size of 7,


D = 5(3
X

7)112 = 5(21)112 = 5(4.5823)

= 22.913 km

,For a cluster size of 4, the reuse distance is given by:


D

= 5(3 X 4)!12 = 5(12)112 =5(3.464) = 17.32

km

As can be seen, a smaller cluster size results in a smaller reuse distance.


Figure 4-3 Various cellular reuse patterns,

Cellular Interference Issues


already covered in the previous section; the frequency reuse distance can be calculated from Equation 4- L Additionally, more complex calculations can yield the signal-to-interference ratio for a particular cluster N; The signaJ·to.interference ratio (SII or SIR) gives an indication of the quality of the received signal'much like the time-honored signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) measurement. Using a fairly simple 'mathematical model, for SlIratio calculations involving omnidirectional cells yields the results tabulated in Table-4.,.1 several common values of N: for

~ alues of N canonJy take on numbers calculated fro th ' .As are mtegers. m i e followmg expression: ,1. + ij + P where i Mcan be seen from Equation 4-1, the ~rnaller the valu 'size, '~ larger the system capacity or total number of '. e of N the closer the reuse distance and there:foiel Size of the reuse distance D may provide the abili poss~ble users. It should be pointed out that reducing ty. to andle more subscribers but it also increases

94 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks Table 4-1


Signal-to-interference ratio for various cluster sizes.

Wireless Network Architecture and Operation

95

Cluster Size, N
3 4 7 12

Slj Ratio
11.3 dB 13.8 dB 18.7 dB 23.3 dB

··,_··,·~""",'ptl each in

.::,,·,IJj) Note how each cell has a .chaI1nel spacing

of 7 x 30 kHz :; 210 kHz and that this channel allocation is cluster of 7 cells. Another way of assigning channels When the cluster size is 7 will be intro-

CAPACITY EXPANSION TECHNIQUES A~ cellular mobile telephone service grew in popularity during the 1990s, the need to expand system Jpacity also grew. Most cellular providers will initially implement their systems by providing service in ..coverage area with the least amount of initial investment (i.e., the least number of cell sites). As demand , the system is usually expanded with additional cell sites to handle the increased traffic. There are ways in which a service provider may increase capacity. The first and simplest method is to obtain aO~UUC"IW frequency spectrum. Although this sounds like a fairly straightforward approach, it has proven of the most expensive. Government auctions have sold frequency spectrum to service providers .'~-'- .... "';,,, all around the world. The fairly recent auctions of the PCS bands in the United States b~ the in the nud- 1990s yielded approximately $20 billion. The results of those high prices caused several the top bidders for that spectrum to eventually declare bankruptcy .. Another problem with this approach , is that in many instances there is no frequency spectrum available to be auctioned off, In the United States as in many countries worldwide, previous spectrum allocations and incumbent radio services or applica. tions are inhibiting and in some cases preventing the expansion of new advanced wireless mobile ·'fj;chnologies. This topic will be treated more fully in other chapters. The other approaches to capacity expansion are either architecturally or technologically enabled. Changes in cellular architecture like cell sectoring, cell splitting, and using various overlaid cell schemes can all provide increased system capacity. Another technique is to employ different channel allocation schemes that effectively increase cell capacity to meet changes in traffic patterns. Lastly, the adoption of next-generation technology implementations tends to provide an iriherent capacity expansion within the new technology itself. The next few sections will provide more detail about these different methods.
Cell Splitting
If a cellular service provider initially deploys a network with fairly large cells, the coverage area will be large but the maximum number of subscribers will be limited. If a portion or portions of the system experi- ence an increasing traffic load that is pushing the system to its limit (subscribers experience a high rate of unavailable service or blocking) then the service provider can use a technique known as cell splitting to increase capacity in the overburdened areas of the system. Consider the following example of cell splitting .shown in Figure 4-5. Assume that Cell A has become saturated and is unable to support its traffic load. Using cell splitting, six new smaller cells with approximately one-quarter the area of the larger cells are inserted into the system around A in such a' way as to be halfway between two cochannel cells. These

The reader should be re . ded th . rrun at smaller cluster size wl 'II' ~ shown m T~ble 4-1 the trade-off is a lowered SII ratio a:d YIeld a larg~r possible subscriber base' ity, As a pracbcal example of this fact consid th AMPS th~ corresponding decrease in radio link usable voice-quality radio liolcs nl SllIer.e ~obile system. The AMPs system did n t . nl'l u ess an ratio exceedmg 18 dB' 0 o y possib e for a cluster of size 7 and up Th & was available, This value of SII .. t . f . . ereLore the typical AMPS er SIze 0 N 7 as shown previously in Figure 4-4. ' system was deployed with a .

..
. SoIutwn· For thi
Show a possible distribution
'to -

Example 4-3
of channels for an AMPS

. system With a cluster size of N - 7 -. . . S SI anon, the 416 radio channels are divid d b nels per cell Site. Each cell can have thre I .e y the 7 cells per cluster to yield 59+ 'bl e controchaI1nels and 56 one POSSl e channel assignment scheme. some + traffic channels. Table 4-2 Table 4-2
A possible assignment of AMPS channel c I . . s lor a c uster slze of?
.

Celli

Cell 2

Cell 3

Cell 4

Cell 5

Control Channels 1 8 15 2 9 16 3 4 11 18 Traffic Channels 22 29 36 23 30 37 24 31 25 32 26 33 5 12 19

cei«
6 13 20

Cell 7

Hi
17

7 14 21

27 34

28 .35

... ...
404 4,11

...
402

...
...
405 412

...
403 410

...
...
406 413

...

...
401 408 415 New Cells
Figure 4-5 Increasing capacity by cell splitting,

...
407 414

409
416

Wireless Network Architecture and Operation

97

ill
'I: '1 '

!lb Introduction

10 Wireless Telecommunications

Synems aluJ Networks

_'it
'\

smaller cells will use the same channels 'as the corresponding pair of larger cochannel cells. In order the overall system frequency reuse plan be preserved, the transmit power of these cells must be reduced,' a factor of approximately 16 or' 12 dB. Cell s~litting will work quite well on paper; however, in practice many times the process is not smooth as one would desire. Very often, due to the difficulty of acquiring appropriately located cell the conversion process will be prolonged and different size cells will exist in the same area. In cases, it is necessary to form two groups of channels in the old cell; one group that corresponds to small-cell frequency reuse requirements, and another group that corresponds to the old-cell reuse reQuifl~'I~l';, ments, Usually the larger cell channels are reserved for highly mobile traffic and therefore will ""'C"_,"", fewer handoffs than the smaller cells, As the splitting process moves toward completion the number channels in the small cells will increase until eventually all the channels in the area are used by lower-power group of cells and the original Cell A has had its power reduced and also joins the smaller cluster. As traffic increases in other areas of the system this process may be repeated over agam;~.",;, Eventually the entire system will be rescaled with smaller cells in the high-traffic areas and larger \,1;111"_.' ' on the outskirts of the system or in areas oflow traffic or low population density. Cell splitting effectively increases system capacity by reducing the cell size and therefore reducing frequency reuse distance thus permitting the use of more channels.

Cell Sectoring
Another popular method to increase cellular system capacity is to use cell sectoring. Cell sectoring uses ,: directional antennas 10 effectively split a cell into three or sometimes six new cells. the vast majority of cellular providers use this technique for any of the cellular systems presently in operation. As shown in Figure 4-6, the new cell structure now uses three-directional antennas with l20-degree beamwidths to ;, "illuminate" the entire area previously serviced by a single omnidirectional antenna. Now the channels allocated to a cell are further divided and only used in one sector of the cell.
Antenna Main Lobe _ _ Cell oflnterest (AO) Cells not Effecting AO
[0

rJffil Cells Receiving Interference from AO

o Cells Causing

Interference to AO

Figure 4--7

Interference reduction due

cell sectoring,

, f a cell results in a reduction in the amount of interferenc~ that As shown in Figure 4-7, the sectonng 0, hb ' diacent clusters and conversely the amount of tnterthe sector experiences from its cochannel neig ors, IU a J Before sectoring for a cluster size, of 7, a cell b r to its cochannel neig h ors. , ' N h n by ference that the sector supp les, channel cells in other clusters, ow, as s ow receives and gives interference to SIX~ther n~arest ~~ has been reduced to two (A 1 and A2), This results Figure 4-7, for Cell AO, the number of I~terfenng ~e sectors in other clusters. Table 4-3 tabulates these . f that sector and Its comparuon s , in a higher SII ratio or h f orne common values of cluster size. new values for a three-sector sc erne or s . Signal_to_interference ratio for three sector schemes.

Old Cell

Cluster Size. N

Sil Ratio
16.08 dB 18.58 dB 23.44 dB 28.12 dB

3 4 7 12

Figure 4-6

Increasing capacity by cell sectoring.

, , if ,,,~p_sector-per-ce11 site scheme is used, one . di t that for AMPS service. a uuvv Note that these results m ca e . ystem capacityl If the sector scheme uses .d to 4 and gam more s ' 'cl can reduce the reuse cluster size ~wn. ' II ite then it is possible to employ a reuse uster 6O-degree beamwidth antennas yielding SIX sect~rs per ce sdoes not require new cell sites, only additional . f 3 "or AMPS service. Note that the sectoring process SIze 0 l' "

98 Introduction to Wirekss Tekcommunicationi

Systems and Networks Wireless Network Architecture and Operation 99

directional antennas and triangular mounting platforms or other mounting schemes to create the sectors with the appropriaie directional antennas. The term cell site has now taken on new meaning typical cellular system architecture has increased in complexity. Example 4-4 illustrates the channel butionemployed in sectored systems.

Example 4-4
Fora system with frequency reuse number N = 7, show a possible distribution of the channels over the tored system. Recall that without sectoring, as shown in Example 4-3, each cell had some 59+ available.

'" ."" '"

:!

s:;

a possible way to assign channels for a 7121 frequency


.; ""i

Solurion: When a system like this is sectored, now' each of the three sectors uses the frequencies nre:virmsllv allocated to the entire cell. Now each sector can have 416/21'= 19+ frequencies. This type of"uJuJ~;Wiluuln is typically known as a 7121 reuse plan. Figure 4-8 illustrates a possible implementation of this 7/21 plan. Also shown are the cellular architectures of several other reuse plans (4112 and 319). Table 4-4 shows
reuse plan.

'"
..., ~ Q:I

'"

'" ..., ~ ~ '"

8 '" .
N

r.

,.

3/9 Frequency, Reuse Plan

'"
t-. IC

to
7/21 Frequency Reuse Plan
IC IC IC

""
rr-

0:
N

Figure 4-S

4/12 Frequency Reuse Piau 7/21,3/9, and 4112frequency reuse plans for sectored cells (Example 4-4).

'" '" '" '" '" '"


~ o:
IC

Note that for this assignment scheme,each sector has a single control channel (channels 333-313) and then the other 395 traffic channels (channels 1-312, 667 - 716, and 991 -1023) are distributed over the twenty-one sectors before they are repeated again in other clusters. Overlaid

Cells

'" '"
s:l

'"

The use of overlaid cells was first introduced in the section on cell splitting. This method can be used to expand the capacity of.cellular systems in two ways. The first method explained here may be aPplied to what are known as split-band analog systems. However, since analog FM modulation cellular systems are at the end of their life cycle in the United States, only a brief coverage will be gi ven to this topic. The r~adermay recall from Chapter 2 the deSCription of several follow-on f!CSt-generation analog systems that used a form of narrowband FM, such as the NAMPS or NTACS systems. Using overlaid cells an operational wide band analog system could be upgraded to increase its capacity by overlaying another

g)

s:;
0

rN

~ '"
N

00 N N

e-

'"

00

'" r~ 0
r-

'" "" '" '" '" '" r'" '" s o; '" '"
00

'" '" ~

"'.

-.::>

100

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

Wireless Network Architecture and Operation

101

of overlay schemes that have subcells within larger cells has also been known as "tiering" by of the cellular industry.

Figure 4-9

Overlaid cells in a split-band system.

I·~

_~nal~g.system \'lith narrower bandwidth requirements over it. In such a split-band overlay system are divided between a larger macrocell (using AMPS or TACS) and the overlaid microc II ( . ' o~ NTACS) that is contained in its entirety within the macrocell. This type of Situ:tio~s:~g, FIgure ~9. The channels assigned to the ~acrocell are used to service users in the area between cells, and .the, channels assl.gned to the rnicrocells service the microcells. With correct system desi n

of capacity expansion presented so far have relied on changes to the cellular system's archigain additional system resources. The designs of these systems have used an equal distribution of .for each equal-size cell or sector within a system. This would be all right if the number of users cell or sector was constant, or better still if the amount of traffic offered to each cell in the system However, neither of these cases is true. In practice, the amount of traffic offered to a wireless and to individual cells of that system is dynamic, with certain times of the day and week widely different levels of usage, ' come up with many different scenarios of activities that might cause the amount of traffic to example, during events like rock concerts and sporting events, the amount of traffic offered to belcan change drastically for short periods on the scale of hours. Other events like professional golf or state fairs could change traffic intensity for a week or longer. The business district of a metromay experience changing levels of traffic over the course of a workday, with a cenain average during the workweek, but see a decline in that activity on the weekend. The first scenario is so that it is very difficult to design anything into the system to handle the extremely large increase offered to the system. In many such cases, cellular providers will bring in portable cellular sites known as "cells on wheels" or COWs) to handle the increased demand. A national cellular service

two areas Just mentioned .wdl be equ al in size. The net effect of this design is an increase in the toO~taI~~gI:I;!~~~1~;~~;~ have dozens of COWs that are deployed all over the country at any given time. COWs are also ber of system channels SInce now the entire system bandwidth is allocated to both the original VI ' during natural disasters to restore disrupted communications. On the other hand, the traffic scenario system and tIJ,e~ewer,. more efficient narrowband system. This type of system migration requi th business district can be dealt with to some degree through channel allocation techniques. ' dual-mode mobile stations, ' . ires e service providers are very sensitive to the issue of nonavailability of service or what is known The second method of using overlaid c~lls may be applied to GSM or NA-TDMA system~. As an pie of this method, consider a system With a cluster size of N _ 4 On t' f thi overlaid II' I' d . h -. op 0 IS system, a , ceo s:IS app ie wit a cluster .size of 3. If the channels for ,the overlaid cell cluster are taken the underlaid cluster, the system capacity Increases since the area needed for the overlaid cells is only of that needed for the unde~laid cell~. The more channels borrowed from the underlaid system for the lay. system, t~e,greater the Increase III system capacity. This type of expansion allows operators to their. system~.uslllg the same base station and mobile station equipment. See Figure 4-10 D of this technique. , or an
I Groupofan Overlaid 319 Plan

Undertaid 4112 Plan

Since there is a great deal of competition for subscribers within the industry, it behooves cellular providers to configure the capacity of their systems so that there is a minimal amount of th . f bl . Most cellular operators attempt to keep e probability 0 call ockage below 2%, believing that will remain satisfied with their service at this level. goal of channel allocation is to attempt to stabilize, the temporal fluctuations of call blockage over the short and long term throughout the entire mobile network. Presently, there are several methods that 'be used to achieve a more optimal channel allocation across a system. Also, it should be noted that if providers can reduce the average system call blocking probability, it allows them to accept more :,t. subscribers, which effectively expands the system capacity. There are three main methods used for achieving a more efficient system channel allocation scheme. , FIxed channel schemes examine systemwide traffic patterns over time and then "fine-tune" the system by additional channels where needed. This means that instead of equally dividing up the channels the cells, some cells will receive larger channel allocations than others. Usually, very complex a1goare needed to determine the fmal allocation of the channels, and these allocations are periodically updated as a traffic usage database grows and new patterns of use emerge. The second allocation method is .known as channel borrowing. In this scheme, high-traffic cells can borrow channels from low-traffic cells keep them as needed or until the offered traffic returns to normal. For this scheme, a borrowed channel another cell will effectively cause additional cells in other clusters to lose the use of that particular since the reuse distance of the borrowed cell has decreased relative to these cells. After the traffic borrowed channel is complete. the channel is returned to use in its original cell. The third channel technique is known as dynamic channel allocation (DCA). In any number of DCA schemes, all channels are placed in a channel pool. A channel is assigned 10 a new call by virtue of the syssignal-to-interference statistics. Each channel can be used in each cellas long as the necessary nal-to-interference ratio is met. This is an extremely complex system that uses many network resources

'Pari of Another Group of'an Overlaid 3/9 Plan

Figure 4-10

Overlaid cells in. reduced cluster sizesystem.

102

Introduction to Wireuss Teucommunications Systems and Networks Wtreuss Network Architecture and Operation 103

to accomplish its operation. Another downside th . mining every one of the system's assigned ch to I ~~h~me IS that e~ery cell si!~ must be capable The-usc of so hi' ' , . anne s, s IS an expensive proposiuon. developed and th~ w~~~::!~~:;e~e~IOCksatl'bJn techniques. will .continue to grow as better wor ecome more mtelhgent.

presently installed systems use a form-of space diversity to enhance system operation by using more receiving antennas. In these systems, the best signal from the receiving antennas is chosen for the system. This is sometimes mistakenly referred to as smart ant~nna technology.

Other Capacity Expansion Schemes


~ere are several other methods that can be used for ca' '. will offer an overview of several of these techniques. pacity expansion of a cellular system. This

toDigital Technology
expansion method consists of the migration to a newer-generation (digital modulation based) sysof the technologically advanced countries in the worldhave already gone through this process ,on>nOl'p.uto continue evolving their systems to 30 technologies that offer more digital services. Some advanced countries still use first-generation systems. 10 fact, used first-generation equipment to be resold to these countries as they expand their current systems. Second-generation systems , division multiple access (TOMA) and code division multiple access (COMA) technologies to greater capacity than analog systems. For TOMA systems, multiple timeslots are used per channel for multiple users per channel. For COMA systems, multiple users may use the same channel ~taIIleOLlsly. TDMA systems are much more immune to noise and interference and can therefore prowith much lower values of SfI than an anatog system. The NA-TDMA IS-136 system ~hly SfI ratio of 12 dB whereas a OSM system can operate with an SfI ratio of only 9 dB. This trans, frequency reuse factors of 4 and 3, respectively (refer back to Table 4-1). COMA systems with interference handling capabilities may use the same frequencies in adjacent cells and thereby frequency reuse factor to 1. In'all cases these newer systems provide increased system capacity.

Lee's Microcell Techoology


A downside to the sectoring concept is th increased load on the network's switchin

nee

df

. , ~ an lD.creased number of handoffs and the

proposed'that uses zones instead of sect~~ ~:~::ce ::hnlque known as Lee's microcell method moves from one zone to another within th . II' e number ~f handoffs required as a mobil three' .' e microce . As shown ill Figure 4-11 thi t hni antennas that provide coverage by "lookin "into th . ' s ec ique same base station by high-speed microwave or e nucrocell. All three anteqnas are connected is used for both the uplink and downlink A tl Iber~.~. The ~tenna with the best reception of the used and there is no need for hand ff . s .le mo I e travels within the microcell the same channel . 0 operatIOns As the mobile m . simply switches the channel to a different zone. . oves into another zone the base

J.

Zone Antenna Site

systems have evolved from voice-only to both voice and data services systems, the requirements 'connectivrtv to the PSTN and PON have changed. First-generation systems provided a voice connection PSTN. A subscriber could make a voice call over the PSTN or, if desired, send data through the PSTN the use of a voiceband modem (a circuit-switched data transmission). The infrastructure of first-genera, cellular systems was typically connected together using T-carrier, E-carrier, or facilities. TIIEl/J I lines were used between the mobile switching center (MSC) .and the base station later the base station controller (BSC). Recall that Tis are used in the United States, Els in Europe parts of the world, and Jls in Japan. The connection between the MSC and the BS carried PCM>i",nc,nn,.-I voiceband signals at 64 kbps. A Tl/JI can handle twenty-four voiceband calls and an E1 can second-generation cellular systems the voiceband signals are usually transooded (compressed and Jllfb,¥'~forrnat1ed) at the BSC and sent over Tl1E1/Jl facilities at either 8 kbps or 16 kbps allowing as many as channels over a single TI or Jlline. If the capacity of a single TllE1IJ1 was insufficient, addi·;''''''-~',-''n,.n.' facilities would have to be used. Between the MSC and the PSTN, traffic was typically aggregated .and, if warranted, usually sent over a larger T3 facility that could provide room for growth. The use of fiber facilities to perform this function is commonplace now. The cellular service provider has to rent these lines from the local telephone company on a :nonthly or yearly basis. Therefore, anything that can be done to reduce or minimize these costs is welcomed by the cellular operator. With newer (2.50+ and 30) systems, cellular operators are starting to install their own private wideband to backhaul both voice and data from the BSs to the BSCs and finally to the MSCs in an effort to

Antenna Patterns High·Speed Commuilication Links Figure 4-11 Lee's microcell concept for capacity expansion.

Smart Antenna Techoology


, Although not impleIl1ented as of et, th if' ' c antenna technology. Using sm~ ante::: icatlOns ~or 3G cellular systems call for the support of particular mobile station 'and tlten reuse the a oase ~tatlO~COUld direct a narrow beam of radio waves mobile in another location. Smart ante .same c anne over another narrow beam aimed at yet creation of dirxtional antenna patterns ~: :: Pbhased arra! techn?logy. This technology allows for This technique is sometimes referred to as s '.Ydi~ ~equenti~ly SWitched to other patterns at high , pace vision multiple access (SOMA).

oom.'

'

mobile data services like COPO were introduced to first-generation cellular systems, the connecthe public data network was completed through separate facilities and kept independent from the network. At the time, the amount of data traffic was light enough to be carried over leased lines. second-generation systems using TDMA and COMA technologies were introduced, several changes within the existing wireless networks. CDMA systems maintained the connection between the and the BSC for voice traffic but introduced the interworking function/packet data service node

104 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks Wireless Network Architecture and Operation 105

,."

~lacjUtleS;therefore, digital microwave radio is an attractive option to be used in the building of these netMore detail about the deployment of these types of celIuJar backhaulnetworks will be presented in 'JlJhap'ters 7, 8, and 12.

.:'

MOBILITY MANAGEMENT
most important characteristic of wireless telecommunications systems is the ability to provide mobilthe user. The general public has demonstrated its desire for "untethered" electronic communications times since the first radio signals were transmitted over 100 years ago. Whether it has been the ~ci:(~ptance f car radios, cordless telephones, or cellular phones, the early rate of adoption of each of o innovations has been exponential in nature. The number of worldwide mobile telephone subscribers Figure 4-12 CDMA cellular system data network connection. .~.'i.nreaIClt:u to pass two billion by the year 2007. M stated before, wireless mobile telephones are evolv(IWFIPDSN) . . than just voice-oriented devices. Modern mobiles or subscriber devices have the ability to h . . network el~ment that connects directly to the external packet network and the BSe A servicesandaccess to the Internet with ever increasing data transmission rates. The function::~~s:nn~~~;~ ~~ ~::~t::~ ~:::in~::~:k~or proper protocol conversion and mapping betwee~ th: subscriber devices is being enhanced by multimedia capabilities that support voice, GSM 11 I •. lIIi!1HlllilIlI)' audio, and video messaging. Cell phones with built-in video cameras are in fact here and no ce u ar systems introduced packet-switched data services throu hI' .. just a futuristic invention made popular by the Dick Tracy comic strips of so many years ago. (OPRS). In this system, in addition to the traditional OSM n t . k g genera packet radio ~ervlce mobile network (PLMN) has been added that interf t k edwor ·components, a OPRS public land the' likelihood of the cellular subscriber base exceeding more than two billion within this decade, Figure 4-13. Through this OPRS PLMN the Os~ces b 0 ribe et ata networks (X.25, IP, etc.) as shown in pause for',a moment to consider the complexity of the systems needed to manage aIJ these users. servers or corporate intranets through private enterp~s:~:rv:rsIS Vabl~ access Web sites. through public. to there is a need for a.physicalinfrastructure to support the operations mentioned earlier but there II d' ti I OSM' . oice services are supplied through the a need for a radio network that manages the countless operations needed to make the entire system a Ilona PLMN as indicated by Figure 4-13 For both COMA . interconnections between the two networks to provid~ location i~ormat~:: ~~~ ~~I~~~i~~:~~~;~re are corr:~~~less system with a traditional wireline system where the physical infrastructure is con·_.oY&,;p,J to the fixed subscriber device and therefore the signals are guided by the transmission media to the (~ S~llJe<;t destination. Indeed, although the PSTN needs a switching "fabric" at the core of the network to •. GSM.ndGPRS call to the correct telephone, once the connection is made, there is an end-to-end physical path Coverage Are. to propagate over. A wireless system does not have the luxury of knowing where the mobile ,.·.·....,,In<C!rih''r is at all times and therefore must incorporate a means to determine this information and subseinfuse this data into the system. At the same time, a mobile station should have the ability to be ToPDN continuously access or use the services of the system that it is connected to. Wireless network func't10'nalltlf:Snecessary for efficient system operation are achieved through the use of programmable ., •.jnfoflmalionprocessing systems and information data-bases built into the major system components (e.g., BSC) and the radio signal measurement capabilities built into the air interface components (i.e., 'mobile stations). The next several sections will discuss the concept of mobility management for '''(i~1I1J1"r systems. The goal of these sections is to explain how the network knows where the subscriber is ,;a:•. ,,"",-- .. --- management) and how it' keeps track of and in contact with the mobile station as the subscriber .''ilflinv,,. around from cell to cell (handoff management). ' ToPSTN management for wireless LANs and other wireless data networks covered by the IEEE 802.XX will be covered in the chapters devoted to those topics. Figure 4-13 GSM cellular system data network connection.
,- ;.. LnUllJlIllLV

As 30 networks with high-speed data services are dId .th th . network (40 cellular)' service provide I kir . ep oy~ , WI e ultimate goal of an all-If' wireless (' networks to provide c'onnectivity betw:~ 00. nf mcreasmgly toward the building of their own packetj accom lish this' . e wife ess network and the core voice and data networks. To" P Ofte goal, wlfel~ss ce_lIularequipment manufacturers are providing network solutions to 'd .. provi ers. n these solutions involve advanced di . I . -'. mode (AlM) and SONET/SDH . igita transport technologies like asynchronous mit data over fiber or digital ne.~~rk/Synchronous. digital hierarchy) used to aCIities. Many cell srtes do not have access to .,

mi~:;~';~::~:a1f:

management is the process of keeping track of the present or last known location of a mobile stadelivery of both voice and data to it as it moves around. Since there are IiteralJy hundreds of of worldwide cell sites, there needs to be functionality built into. every cellular system that. will system with the ability to locate one particular mobile station out of the billion plus in existence. process is best explained, in the case of a voice call, as follows: When a call is made that passes the PSTN, a dedicated traffic channel must, be set up from the BS to the MS fora call.to be comThe PSTN sets up the circuit over the fixed part of the network and the wireless network will

Ij("

Wireless Network Architecture and Operation 106 Introduction


If)

107

\'

Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks . ..•.... . th d t rrnination of the'mobile's location. A forthcoming example will illustrate a typical ..long delays m e e e. nfli tin oals. .. that provides a comprorruse betw~en these two co IC !!less networks--static and dynamic. For

"

"

,"

. . are usually two types of ~pdating sc~e~leso::~e::rrnines when the location updating needs ~o.~ versation, a process must be in place 10 provide for a continuous radio. link even though the mobile the cellular network s geograp . ~ ay d th II I tem layout both contribute to the InItImove into another cell. For the case of a data transfer, packets are typically addressed to an end For dynamic schemes, the user's mobility an e ce u ar sys destination device. The packets are directed through the data network by routers to a particular the location updating algorithm. . th d f location updating (see FIgure 4-14). In this a fixed device this corresponds to a fixed location, For the mobile device it is necessary to know the l ..... ·J" .. w,. most cellular systems use the st~tJc me id ~fi tion value (LAI) (refer back to Figure 3-9). tion of the device before the data packet can be delivered to it. Furthermore, the system must know a group of cells is assigned a locatIon ar;a I e~ ~ her in a periodic fashion over a control availability of the called party. In a fixed system, busy signals are used to denote a telephone already in Illiill/,,'·.;aw' FIgure 4-14, each BS in the LA broa ~asts It~thin ::LA are required to listen to the control For a mobile system, the mobile may be in use or may not even be turned on. In both of these •.•.,hanne r. The MSs that are attached to the base ~tat~~s vill have to send a location update message to the . network must be able to determine the status of the mobile and take the necessary action to deal for the LA ID. If the LA ID changes, ~. ~w ation to the VLR database located in the fixed .incoming call or data transfer. This action might be the playing of a recorded message indicating base statio~. The BS will forwar~ the updat i~~= message for an MS, a paging message wi~ be mobile is busy and then implementing an answering machine function or the storage of the data of the WIreless network. Now, if there ~s ~ be~ t The MS unless it has moved mto -" .... ''''''TI~VU LA h re the MS IS listed as JUg presen ., I • information on some type of network storage device for later delivery. all the cells in the we. blem faced by a static location area ID scheme IS In general, there are three basic functions performed by location management: location updating, LA, will respond to the pa~g message. One P~f tho mobile is moving in a path that takes it back ing paging messages, and the transmission of location information to other network elements. The ,. "effect This effect can occur I e Pr . al lu known as the, 'pmg-pong . A Thi blem can also affect the handoff process. acne so several sections will examine these generic network operations in more detail. Later chapters wil! f rth between the borders of two L s. s pro .. d system-specific details. an d 0 • thi effect will be presented when handoff IS discusse . lions used to prevent s

allocate a pair of radio channels for the air interface connection, Naturally, for this process to be the location of the MS must be known. Additionally, if the mobile moves during the time span of the

i-'·

Location Updating
The location updating function is performed by the mobile station. Recall that when the MS is first lUlllUJOa. it performs an initial system registration or "attach" with the base station of the cell that it is and thereafter this information is. periodically checked to verify its accuracy and prevent an accidental of the mobile from the system. If the mobile does not change location, the access point to' the fixed remains unchanged and the fixed portion of the wireless network delivers information to the' mobile this particular access point. The system is designed so that the mobile station will send an update message every time it changes point of access to the fixed network. As stated earlier, after the initial power-up registration the mobile tion and base station will periodically exchange their respective identification information. If the recei ves the ID of a BS or a location area (LA) that is different from the value stored in its memory could happen through a handoff during a call or simply be due to the mobile's change of location), the will send a location updating request message to the fixed network through this new access point and provide information about the mobile's previous access point. This information. will be entered into a database maintained by the fixed portion of the wireless network and be used by the network to locate MS. The motion of the MS can therefore be tracked by this process to a specific LA or base station. process has its drawbacks because updates are periodic and therefore introduce some uncertainty into exact location of the mobile. In an extreme case, a mobile may be turned off and transported across country by the subscriber. In this instance, an incoming call to the mobile while it is out of service result in a page being sent to the last known access point, which would produce a no response or page. After that failed attempt, the system might possibly page a group or groups of surrounding which will also fail. The system would then enter its voice message mode indicating the unavailability the mobile. When the mobile is turned on again, this problem will be resolved by the system when new istration information is received and the mobile's location is updated within the fixed portion of the Now any calls will be directed to the mobile's new location. A balance needs to be achieved by the wireless network involving the number of update messages the number of cells that must be paged by the system to locate the mobile. If updating is performed . frequently, the location of the mobile will be known with a greater degree of certainty; however, the resources (both radio and network) used to accomplish this task will be excessive. On the other updating is performed infrequently, the number of access points that need to be paged to find the increases and may have the adverse effect of causing too many calls to be dropped or data packets lost
, ,/---C:l~Al

_------_
inLAI ------15

i ','\. i
Figure 4-14

--... and Updating

Procedures

-----------

.,/
~

....

....

»>

Update Info toVLR

...

Cellular location updating. I

Dynamic location updating plans ically based on the status or sta~e obile's status and hence detenrune tance traveled, caIl patterns, number

are not as P?fu Sc WI f the typical measures used to determine ~e of the mobi e. ome : u dating algorithm are elapsed time, total disth the need to perform p of different LAs entered, and so on.

ithin the wireless industry. These schemes are typ-

Paging Messages

'.. will initiate the paging of the mobile. Paging consists of An incoming call or message to a mobile station f lis that is meant to bring a response from a ce the broadcasting of a message either to a cell or to a groupo b hich communications between the ,PSTN . . Thi·· will start the process Y w .' . II single particular mobile. s response . .. f obile is more efficient If the exact ce or the PDN will be established with the mobile. The p~gtndg 0 tathi~S information is not always available. . red l . kn n However as pointe ou, . . . . the mobile is regrste . m IS o~. . im exist Sometimes a scheme known as blanket paging IS Therefore, several different strategies for pag g . 11. articular location area. H successful, the
employed. This type.of a page will broadc:~~ d~ac: :ePkept to a minimum. Otherwise, a. scheme mobile will respond after the fITSt ~agtn~ cycl th1 cell where the mobile was last registered IS paged of sequential paging is used. In this paging strategy, .

"c:

::I~

··.i

-.-.
/ I I

........................................

, '' ,

LA!~ 16

,--r
/

'-. __________

: CeIlB!
\
\ \

"

"

BTS In ------/,..:...,/~L '"

l~
.

--.. --~..._

, ',

._

....... ............... -v,

--

LA! ~ 15
~..._~..._ ..-

, '' , ,'

"':!

,~~"--'-7-"-'~-'J

r---~-.,

.. ..

·;·ItadditiDn to the Iocation management'functions already described, a cellular system needs to be able to 'tkck the location ofa subscriber as that subscriber moves within a coverage area and to be able to maintain , the subscriber's connection to the system, If the subscriber moves from one cell to another, the cellular sysrem must have the ability to reconfigure the connection to the mobile from the current base station to the · -new BS in the new cell. This connection handover process is known as handoff. ',. 'FQr first-generation cellular systems, the handoff process for voice calls could cause a noticeable interruptiQn of the conversation (a hard handoff) and in some severe cases dropped calls. Second-generation cellular systems using digital technology have mitigated some of these problems with seamless handoffs, and CDMA systems have incorporated soft handoffs into their systems thus all but eliminating interrupted , dills. FQr data transmissions, handoff can result in dropped packets, out this is not as severe a problem for bursty Dr packet data traffic since this type of traffic only needs intermittent connectivity and retransmissiQn can be employed to counteract lost packets. As shown in Figure 4-16, handoff basically consists of a two-step process. First, a handoff management algorithm determines that handoff is required and initiates the process. The second step consists of actually physically restructuring the connection and then updating the network databases about the new connection and location Qf the MS. For the handoff process to be successful the network elements involved in the .delivery of either voice or data services to the mobile must be aware of all changes to the mobile's point of access, On the air interface side of the system, the former serving point has to be informed about the change Qr dissociation of the mobile. while the mobile is reassociated with the system through the new serving point. On the network side, the various databases must be updated to reflect the CQrrect location of the MS. This is all necessary for the correct routing of data packets or voice. calls. The next sections will provide more detail about these operations,

---A typical cellular system,.

__ /

Handoff

Control

Figure 4--15

At this time, let us examine several possible scenarios tha . . network, The first possibility has alread be .. .t could occur during the operation of a wireless area. The mQbile registers with the VLl. ~ e~ m:nUQned; the user turns on a mobue wiihin his or her home . Dr. e orne area. ~ COllocated or system HLR confirms that the

, The algorithm used to determine when to make a handoff can be located in a network element or in a mobile · terminal. FQr cellular systems the network controls the handoff for voice calls and this is known as network· controlled handoff or NCHO. If the mobile terminal controls the handoff, this is known as mobile-con'. trolled handoff or MCHO, and if information supplied by the mobile helps determine when handoff should occur, this is known as mobile-assisted handoff or MAlia. InaIi. cases, thehandoff-controlling entity uses some particular algorithm that employs various measures of system performance tQ make a decision about . the need for handoff

110 Inaoduaionto

Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

Wireless Network Architecture and operation


Al A2 A3 A4 ~ ~ ~ ~ Handoff-RSSI<RSS2 Handoff-RSSI<RsS2 and Threshold RSS A Handoff-RSSI<R8S2 and Hysteresis Handoff - RSS I<Hysteresis and Threshold RSS B

111

/~//-

--

~ .. "))j (ri~:""",\;~

I(

I !
/

CoDA

...
1

I \
\

BTSA
/

I I
I

RYI

RSa

~/SII'I;,.iB,~,>;<,':~:,::::=-><:;\q\~\\'1-t_:C-,-i~_:_5_;O_J:-li~"it.~l~~~H~:
~ i~~t

Signal Power (RSS) RSS Thresbold A

(~. ~'Ij~
\ \ ~~

Update Info

,!
/ ,,'
/ /

MSPosition

Distance

Typic~ handoff algorithms using RSS measurements.


\, , -, BTS B

.....

,-,
..............

Handover Messages

__ _

"..· •• ~;.A~I'<'

_,../

Figure 4-16

Typical cellular handoff operations.

••.u..,."""'"U~'Uprocess. As depicted in Figure 4-16, signal power levels being received by the current and candidate radio base stations and the mobile station are first relayed to the radio base station and the base station controller (BSC). When these levels meet the criteria for ~ handoff, the process is

management requires the transmission of messages between various network elements to facilitate

.", IUU"'Q~'U. A handoff message is sent to the mobile from the current radio base station that requests the The most common measurement used in this process is the received signal strength (RSS) from the ' station register with a new radio base station that is also identified in the message. When the mobile mobile's point of attachment and the RSS of the nearest other possible points of attachment (i.e., radio base this task, the MSCNLR is updated to reflect the new mobile. point of attachment (i.e., the new stations in adjacent cells). Other associated measurements that might be included in the process are system .... and any other changed system parameters. If the MSCNLR most recently registered with is not the path loss, carrier- and signal-to-interference ratios and measures of bit error rate (BER), symbol or block sam6as the last, then the new VLR must send an interrogation message to the home HLR to obtain the suberror rate, and so on. A problem with using signal-strength measurements is that received signal strength scriber profile and authentication information. Th'e HLR responds over the SS7 network with the can undergo extreme fluctuations due to signal fading effects that are completely random in nature. Error information. If the mobile is authenticated, then the new radio base station sends a message rates are also similarly affected by the randomness of propagation conditions. Traditional handoff algorithms would initiate handoffs when the power received from the current RBS mobile assigning ane~ pair of traffic channels to the MS and the RBS for the continuation of a voice dropped below that received by another nearby RBS. Additional fine-tuning of the algorithm has incorpoThe HLR database is updated so that it knows where the mobile is and the new VLR database rated threshold levels and hysteresis to prevent erroneous handoff requests and to mitigate the ping-pong the new mobile to its list of subscriber terminals that are being serviced ~y the particular MSCNLR. effect mentioned earlier. As an example, with both threshold and hysteresis, handoff will only occur if the 'a last act, the HLR sends a message to the old MSCNLR to purge the mobile from its list of actively received power from a nearby RBS is above that received from the current RBS by a certain hysteresis attached subscriber terminals. More detail about handover operations will be given in Chapter 5. Additionvalue and the power from the current RBS is also below a certain threshold power level. Figure 4-17 ally,any data packets that were intended fo~ delivery to the MS from the old MSCNLR that may have been shows some examples of the possible different algorithms used for handoff decision making in conjuncin a temporary network storage area should be either deleted or redirected to the new MS access

tion with the signal power being received by the current RBS and the signal power from a RBS that the MS is approaching. Cellular service provider engineers are continually fine-tuning .system handoff algorithms to improve system performance. Measures of system performance might include such things as call blocking and calli dropping probability, required time to complete a handoff, and.system handoff rate. Although these performance measures are typically used to improve the delivery of voice calls and the efficiency of the network" they might not necessarily result in higher data throughput rates or provide for required QoS continuity during a hand off, all important issues in the delivery of data services.

one can see, there are many necessary message transfers .occurring between wireless network eleand subsequent operations to be performed by these same elements for a successful mobile station There are also other types of possible handoffs that have not been addressed here such as the vari4"_","L. __ of intracell or intra-BSC handoffs. Since the exact details of mobility management procedures for cellular systems are specific to those systems, more details will be provided about these topics in chapters when individual systems (GSM, TDMA, and COMA) are covered.

,I

112 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

Wireless Network Architecture and Operati1n 113

4.6 RADIO RESOURCES AND POWER MANAGEMENT


The efficient use of radio resources ·;dd the need for power ", management has air ea. d y b een rnentioned. I' .' th '. era times m 0 er sec~ons of this text. At this time, some details pertaining to this topic will be the reader, Recall that In,a cellular system the use of many closely spaced low-power RBSs allows quency reus_eand hence increased system capacity, At the same time, the closer the spacing of the greater ,the interference produced by both the subscriber MSs and the RBSs with other MSs and both adjacent cells and cells using the same channels. The use of power control algorithms for the adjustment of both the MS output power and RBS power allow for n~arly constant received signal strength at both the MS and RBS receivers, This po~er control provides several system advantages: the amount of cochannel interference is reduced of signal coupler s~~ation is ~educ,edat,the RBS, and the power consumption of the MS is reduced, ' ~dvantage has addi~onal ~cauons in the reduction' of battery requirements, which translates to time between charging and lighter and smaller mobile terminals. Additionally, ?ther pD.wersaving schemes are also being employed by the MS to conserve battery new energy-e.fficI:nt designs for-both hardware and software are being implemented, and radio management IS bem? use? to en~ble an MS or wireless network to optimize the use of the available resources. These topics Willbe discussed further in the next sections.

to the power saving schemes outlined in the previous section, there are several other ways in MS battery power may be conserved. It is well known that the mobile consumes thegreatestamourit during the transmission of a signal to the RBS. Less power is consumed during the reception 'of a from the RBS. Another mode ofMS operation can exist and that-is known as "standby." In a standby much less power is consumed by the mobile than in either the transmission or reception mode. There techniques used with mobile stations to achieve standby status.
~OI1.tinlWllIS Transmission

'

detection methods, 'a mobile may be programmed to only transmit when there is speech activuser. The radio base station sets a discontinuous transmission (DTX) bit to either permit or this mode of operation and includes it in r..,. overhead message to the mobile during initial registrathe mobile. Just using straight speech detection methods can cause problems due to the unnatural sound of the system as perceived by the users. To compensate for this, a low-power background noise"~ignal is generated by the mobile receiver during gaps of silence or no speech activity, is also repeated at the base station controller or TRC for the benefit of the calling party.
!

Power Control

common technique used to save MS battery power is to put the MS into a sleep mode when there of no activity. For this scheme, the RF portion of the mobile's circuitry is powered off while between messages. The mobile will periodically awaken and read control channel messages from so ,as to not miss a paging message but with much less overall power consumption.

Resource Management
Radio resource management is used to provide several functional improvements and necessary operations to permit the correct operation of a wireless network. The first and most important aspect of radio resource .manegement is to implement system power control that reduces interference and therefore allows for syste,!Jl capacity to be maximized. As pointed out before, a side benefit of this control function is the increase . inMS battery life. Another improvement afforded to the system is that the MS is directed toward the best channel connection available to it within the cell. This is made possible by the constant transmission measurement infonnation from the MS to the BS and then to the BSe. finally, the use of a wireless netradio resource management scheme enables the handoff operation. Without this network management bandoff could not operate as seamlessly and efficiently as it does in today's systems. More details radio resource management functions 'and organization used by particular radio systems wi11be prein the chapters devoted to the individual systems. .

114

inlTodudion to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

Wireless Network Architecture and Operation

115

4.7

WIRELESS NETWORK SECURITY

Unlike wireline telecommunications systems that usually provide some modest amount of security infrastructure design and physical installation, wireless technologies pose special security concerns. unguided nature of wireless signals exposes them to the possibility of undesired interference and tion. This section will present some of the security requirements for both the air interface and the infrastructure of the wireless network itself and conclude with a brief overview of present wireless techniques.
Wireless Network Security Requirements
Just as the wireline telecommunications networks require increasingly more effective security in this 9/11 world, the, security requirements of wireless networks are very similar to their wired counterparts need for privacy in the transmission of a voice conversation is necessary regai:dless of the means deliver the signal. The ability for anyone to attain the unauthorized interception of a private corlv""r<~llion'.: i not a desired feature of any telecommunications system. The newer digital cellular systems make ception of voice conversations extremely difficult due to the conversion of the voice signals from digital form and the ciphering of the transmitted digital information by the system. However, increasing use of wireless data services and e-commerce activities, the need for more secure wireless works is becoming more important as more wireless cellular users avail themselves of these new services and more sensitive economic information is transmitted over wireless networks. In addition to the transmission of voice or data traffic over the air interface, a certain amount of scnsru ve-s•. c control and identification information is transmitted over control channels to the fixed wireless There is certainly a potential for the misuse of this type of information and the possibility of ~o[necmeiit'·:,J·', obtaining telecommunication services (teleservices) fraudulently as happened with the flrst-gcneration log cellular system. Presently the GSM Association maintains a global central equipment identity register (CEIR) in Dublin, Ireland, of all handsets that have been approved for use on GSM networks. The rizes these approved handsets as being on a White List. There is also a CEIR Black List of should.be denied access to the network due to being reported as either lost or stolen or otherwise umruilabl'e,:;1 for use. GSM cellular operators that employ an EIR in their network use it to keep track of handsets blocked. If they are also registered users of the CEIR, they call in daily to share their database with CEIR, and each day the CEIR creates a master Black List that the operator can download the following day, In this way any stolen or lost handset is blocked by the next day after it has been reported missing.

key to perform the encryption. Various encryption techniques have been u~ed sin:e the need for first aros~)Most encryption techniques are known as secret-key ~g~nthms since the key to . is kept secret from everyone but the two end users ~f the commu~ll~atiOnS chann~1. ' one can make the encryption process It seems that It IS always possible to break : as comp Iex as ... ~ t . h rational power and time The field of telecommurucalt. ons intrastruc ure secugrven enoug compu . II a ve hot research topic right now with the reality of a ~rohf~ration of attacks ~n the Int~rnet as we. high~hreat of global terrorism. As with ~any of th~ tOPICS discussed to thIS point, security details of . wireless systems will be presented with the particular technology. . . . g wireless LANs will be presented in the. chapters issues concernm u~ technology. . addressing
,

IEEE 802.XX

QUESTIONS AND PROBLEMS


'Wh~t factors determine frequency reuse distance? What advantage does the use of a cellular'archltecture
'I

provider

What factors limit cell size? . . h t ty (. ) f A cell tower located near an 'interstate highway would most likely provide service to w a pe size 0 cell? . h ncy reuse distance for a cell radius of twenty kilometers and a cluster size of 7. Determine the frenue reuse distance for a cell radius of two kilometers and a cluster size of 4. Determine e requency . f Id h tw ty eight Construct a chart that shows how a cellular system with a. cI~ster size 0 4 c?u ave en . d to the system in such a'm. anner as to rnaxrrmze channel spacing. c hanne Is assigne . . d" ddf For a particular radio transmission technology, a .minimum 5/1 ratio of 15, . B IS nee e or proper oo ration. What is the minimum required cluster size? , .'. . I ':at will be the resulting (ideal) increase in cellular ~ystem capacity for \typlcal cell splitting scheme. For a cell splitting scenario, why must thecell transmit power be reduced. How is cell splitting different from cell sectoring? . ., .I What possible limitations can you conceive that would impose a practical limit on cell sectonng: What is the driving force for the adoption of microwave cellular ,b~ckhaul networks? k .d What has been the traditional method used to provide connectivity between the cellular networ an :~::~:~:n the all-IP core network becomes a reality, how will voice traffic be carried to the cellular

'--t'

~!:

Network Security Requirements


In addition to the privacy and fraud concerns for the air interface portion of the network, there are also: security issues involving the fixed portion of the network. The fixed wireless network infrastructure includes numerous network elements that are involved in identification, authentication, billing functions, . and so on, However, most of these network elements and the transmission facilities between them enjoy the same level of physical security (or lack thereof) as the traditional PSTN or PDN telecommunications systems. As the wireless cellular system transitions to an all-IP network there will be a need to employ increased security measures to prevent hacking of the system and the possible infection of system components by software viruses. After the events oi9/11, the threat of terrorism is all too real and one can no' longer discoUnt any type of infrastructure target as being unrealistic.

network? .. . h hI Mobility management consists of several baSICfunctions. W at are t ey. When does the location updating function occur? What two basic operations occur 'during the handoff p~ocess? 1 Why is power management so important for cellular Wireless systems, Describe the process of power control used by cellular systems.. " I Wh t is meant by the term discontinu6us transmission in the context of Wireless cellular systems. 22. Wh:t is meant by the term sleep mode in the context of wirel:ss cel!ular systems? 23. Describe how the G5M Association provides a for~ ~f se~ur:ty to I~ me~bers. 24. What is the basic form of security employed by ce u ar wireress sys ems. 25. Describe secret-key encryption.

I.

r':

Network Security
There are several methods by which the security of air interlace messages can be enhanced. The most viable method is to employ encryption techniques. These techniques rely onthe scrambling of the messageusinga

GSM and IDMA Technology 117 Several examples of possible TDMA frame .timing schemes are presented to. give the reader a feel complexity of the system and the number of operations needed to.make the system functional, Part II of the chapter reviews GSM system identifiers before a detailed coverage of GSM traffic cases is The three basic operations needed to SUPPDrt subscriber's mobility within a wireless cellular sysa tE'11'I--I;all setup, location updating, and call handover=-are nDWtreated from the, viewpoint of the ''II}):'!irlter:actiDns between subsystem components through command and message transmissions over the inter" ,faces specified in the GSM standards. The last portion of this section takes the reader a step closer to. the ". netwDrking aspect of GSM system operation by examining typical system management functions in the
of the O'Sl model.

In Part III, the last section of this chapter introduces NA-TDMA, a cellular technology very similar to. but not compatible with it. Because of the amount of detail already provided about GSM, this topic is , :with in a fairly superficial manner by simply indicating the system similarities and difference~. This does not cover the operations needed for high-speed packet data transmission over a GSM or NAnetwork, Discussion of that topic is delayed Until Chapter 1. i

,~-

Upon completion of this chapter, the student should be able to: • D!scuss the basic services offered by GSM cellular and the frequency bands of operation, • Dls~uss the network components of a GSM system and the basic functions of the mobile station base station system, and network switching system. ' ' • • • • • • • • Expla!n Explam Discuss Explain Explain DIscuss Explain DIscuss the the the the the the the the concept of GSM network interfaces and protocols, and their relationship GSM channel concept, functions of the GSM. logical channels. TDMA concept and hDW it is implemented in GSM. mapping of logical channels on to. the GSM physical channels. various GSM identities. ' GSM operations of call setup, location updating, and handover. GSM operations that occur over the Um interface. to. the 051' model.

INTROQUCTION TO GSM AND TDMA


As discussed in prior chapters, the GSM system evolved due to. a desire by the European countriesto develop a pan-European system that would allow roaming on an international basis. At the time, digital tecbnology and microelectronics had advanced sufficiently to. allow for the development of an entirelydigifill second-generation cellular system. Other TDMA digital cellular standards such as North American lS-136 are very similar to.GSM. The GSM standards, as published by the ETSI, includes specifications for the air interface portion of the system as well as the fixed network infrastructure used to.SUpPDrthe services t offered overthe wireless network, The GSM standards may be downloaded from www.etsi.org. In 1982, the frequency bands of 890-915 MHz and 935-960 MHz were allocated for a pan-European second-generation digital cellular system (GSM 900) that would replace the incompatible first-generation systems that were already in existence in different countries. The allocation of the frequency bands was only the first step in this process. An international task force was also assembled during 1982 and, by 1987 GSM was formally adopted by the European Commission. The ETSI took over developmentin 1989 and published the standards for the first phase of GSM in 1990. The development process continued, resulting in the deploymentofa functional system in 1992, A new frequency band inthe 18oo-MHz range was added worldwide for what was originally named digital cellular system (DCS 1800). This upbanded version DfGSM 900 was renamed GSM 1800 in 1997. GSM service in the 1900-M,Hzrange (GSM 1900) using the PeS bands in the United States has been deployed recently. Also, the implementation of additional GSM services offered under Phase 2 and Phase 2+ of GSM has been an ongoing process and continues today under the direction of the ETSI. Today, the GSM system is by far the most popular cellular wireless system in the world.

'

~i.s .chapter ~rovides a detailed description of the GSM wireless cellular telephone system and the time division mullI~le access (TDMA) technology used to. implement the air interface portion of the system. GSM cellular IS by far the most popular wireless system in the world with Dver one billion subscribers Because of this popularity, this chapter presents an in-depth explanation of the architecture of this system and the access technology .used.to.implement it. Because of the amount of detail included in this chapter, the chapter has been organized into three parts: an overview ot GSM, GSM network operations, and other TDMA systems. Part I coverage starts with a short prologue to.the evolution of GSM and the rationale behind its introduction, The GSM frequency bands are introduced and the channel numbering system is explained. Next, the ~etwDrk components that compose a GSM system are introduced and their functions are described in detaIl. HDWthese subsystem components are interconnected and the messages that are sent between them are ~DDked from several different viewpoints, The GSM 'standards specify various system interfaces that at are introduced to. the reader along with the protocols used by the subsystems to. deliver the 'messages and commands ~eeded for overall system operation, The OSI model is used extensively to.frame the theoryof GSM operation. .' ' N:xt, the GSM channel COilceptis .in.tr?duced ~ith descriptions of the VariDUS logical channels and their function, HDWthe system uses time dIVISIOn multIplexing to.provide a means by which system commands messages, and traffic can be transmitted over the air interface during selected timeslots is examined in

GSM Services
The first-generation analog cellular systems were designed for basic voice service. Data services for fax DrCircuit-switched data transmission using a voiceband modem were classified as "overlay" services that run on tDP Df the voice service. The second-generation GSM cellular system Wasdesigned to be an integrated wireless voice-data service networkthat offered several other services beyond just voice telephone service. The types of services to.be offered over the GSM network were classified into. two categories: teleservicesand bearer services (see Figure 5.,.1).In addition, there are supplementary services that can be added to the teleservices.

I.

GSM arul roMA Technolo!5j 119 118 Introduction to Wireu..s Telecommunications


SysleTllf and Networks
GSM Teleservices

GSM Bearer Services

Optional implementation . triction of displaying PresentatIOn or res the caner: s ID .. non of displaying presentauon or restnC the called ID . current conversation Incoming call dunng ~r another all hold to answer Put current c?n alls can be included Up to five Ongo~g c in one conversation. from Restriction of certain features ator individual subscribers by opec

Calling line identification Connected line identification Figu",S-l Relationship of teleservices and bearer services to the GSM system (Courtesy of ETSI). Call waiting Call hold Multiparty communications Closed user group Advice of charge Operator determined call barring

Teleservices provide standard voice communications between two end users and additional communications between two end user applications according to some standard protocol. Bearer services user with. the ability to transmit data between user network interfaces. Supplementary services are that enhance or support a teleservice provided by the network, The planning of GSM system development and deployment called for the implementation of services to be carried out in two phases. In the first phase, the GSM services offered were as shown TableS-I. In the second phase of GSM implementation, the service offerings would be expanded include those shown in Table 5-2. Presently, the development of GSM system services has evolved Phase 2+. Phase 2+ is primarily focused on the addition of high-speed packet data services to GSM. initiative is embodied in general packet radio service (GPRS) and enhanced data rates for global (EDGE). These topics will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 7.
Table 5-1 Phase 1 GSM services (Courtesy ofETSl). Service Telephony Emergency calls Short Message Service Videotext access Teletex, FAX,etc. Asynchronous data Synchronous data Synchronous packet data Others Call forwarding Call barring Additional Details Full rate at 13 kbps voice "112"is GSMcwide emergency number Point-to-point (between two users ) and cell broadcast types 300--9600 bps (transparent/nontransparent) 2400-9600 bps transparent

314'x 8 = 2992 channels for GSM 1800 .... .•• .. ;. ". ......••• frequency 299 X 8 = 2392 channels for GSM 1900fPCS 1900 . tationsare the five resent GSM system Implemen . . bands :If:~~a~~(; frequen~y channel numbers (~CNS) ~~:~ . Table 5-3. shown In d with them and are (p-GSM 900), GSM

.... .

Service Category

306-340, 512-885, and 512-81~ for P~~~ote d GSM 1900IPCS 190Q,respecuvely. so .. 480, GSM 18 , an 900 (R-GSM 900) have added channels SM 900) and RaIlways G channels

as -

t~;~
'.

a2;_~93,

00

that Extended GSM 900 (E975-1023 and 955-1023,

GSM frequency bands and channel numbers (Courtesy of 3GPP). 935 _960MHz Vplink frequency +45 MHz MHz 925 _935MHz Uplink frequency +45 MHz 921-935 MHz Uplink frequency + 45 MHz 1805 - 1880 MHz Vplink frequency+95

GSM Teleservices

890-915 MHz (ARFCN-1)XO.2MHz+890.2

GSM Bearer Services

880- 890 MHz (ARFCN=0=S90 MHz) (ARFCN-975) x 0,2 MHz + 890 MHz 876 - 890 MHz . (ARFCN-I023) x 0.2 MHz + 890 MHz 1710-1785 MHz (ARFCN-512) x 0.2 MHz + 1710.2 MHz 1850 - 1910 MHz (ARFCN-512) x 0.2 MHz + 1850.2 MHz 450.4 - 457.6 MHz (ARFCN-259) x 0.2 MHz+450.6MHz 478.8- 486 MHz (ARFCN-306) x 0.2 MHz + 478.8 MHz

Supplementary Services

All calls, When the subscriber is not available Outgoing calls with specifications

MHz

GSM Radio Frequency Carriers


For GSM ceilular systems the air interface consists of channels that have a frequency separation of 200 kHz. For the three most widely used frequency bands devoted to GSM system operation this channel spacing yields-a different total number. of carrier frequencies per band. TheGSM 900 band. has 124 carrier frequencies, the GSM 1800 band has 374 carrier frequencies, and the GSM 1900 band has 299 carrier frequencies .. Since each carrier can be shared by up to eight users, the total number of channels for each system is: 124 x 8

1930 - 1990 MHz U link frequency +90 MHz


.p

460.4 - 467.6 MHz Uplink frequency + 10 MHz 4888 - 496 MHz VpllnK frequency + 10 MHz

= 992

channels for GSM 900

120

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


Uplink Frequencies Downlink Frequencies

GSM

and TDMA Technolol)

121

, .~".

,..
_.

t.

"

':!It\:i.il!lanne:lsused for the transmission of various forms of subscriber traffic. In addition, the MS is constantly per4,-',f!o!'ll1ung power and bit error rate (BER) 'measurements on signals being received from the BTS that it is to and the neighboring BTSs in the MS's general vicinity. These measurements, in conjunction with !landover (hand over is the term used by the GSM standard) algorithms performed by the BSS, support the 15 MHz t MS'~ mobility as the subscriber moves about the GSM network. 5 MHz I 1850 MHz 1,910MHZ L930MHZ IIClYOMHZ n,), ·The GSM system also makes use of a subscriber identity module or SIM card that when inserted into the .,NlS makes it functional (the MS can only make emergen,cy calls withou~ the ~IM car~), The SIM is a smart .A and B Bands' are for MTAs icard that is issued to the subscriber when the subscnber signs up for service with the wifeless network operaC. D. E. and F Bands are for BTAs . Besides containing information about the types of service available to the subscriber, the card contains Figure 5-2 GSM frequency allocations in the 19QO..MHzPCS bands. subscriber's IMSI number, themobile MSISDN number, a SIM personal identification number (PIN), ,~el;uritY/:lutllen.tic'ltio'nparameters, and address book contact information (i.e., names and numbers) stored TDMAFrame .bythe subscriber. The SIM card also stores SMS messages that the subscriber receives and saves. The SIM .:~ardallows for some unique possibilities for GSM subscribers. A single GSM phone can be shared by several I~ with different SIM cams or a subscriber could visit other countries and purchase a country-specific SIM ','e'iirct for use with a single GSM mobile that was carried by the subscriber. I I . In the GSM standard, the MS consists of two elements: tile mobile equipment(ME), which is tile physiI \~'3Iphone itseit; and the SIM card. The mobile is constantly being redesigned to incorporate new features ...•~ysi¢'!1,~el.: '~d different form factors (mobile size, screen size, etc.j that the public is perceived to desire. Today, the "(OneTiille,!ot) . !~e~est mobile phones contain several-video cameras with which the subscribers can use to send pictures or Figure 5-3 GSM timeslot in a TDMA frame. .: 'short video clipsto each other or use as a videophone. Traditionally, tile service providers have subsidized the cost of the rather expensive electronics incorporated into the mobiles to encourage more users to subrespectively. Figure 5-2 shows some additional details about the bands within the PCS spectrum ~,,~u.'Vu scribe to the wireless services that they offer. that are used by the GSM 1900 system in the United States. As shown by Figure 5-2, thevarious bands allocated for use in either major or basic 'trading areas (MTA and BTA). The A, B, and C bands are 15-MHzwide and the D, E. and F bands are each 5-MHz wide. The reader should notethatlillere is also: :__"," limited usage of other bands for GSM at 450 and 850 MHz. . ..The base station system (BSS) is the link between the MS and the GSM mobile-services switching center . '·'XMSC).The BSS consists of two elements: a base transceiver system (BTS) and the base station controller For a particular carrier frequency, a channel consists of a single timeslot that occurs during a ·(BSC). The BTS communicates with the MS over the air interface using various protocols designed for the frame of eight times lots (see Figure 5-3). Each of these timeslots represents a physical channel. Therefore, . each GSM TDMA frame represents eight physical channels. Furthermore, besides voice and data traffic wireless channel. The BSC communicates with the MSC through the use of standard wireline protocols. The there are a host of different system messages and other overhead information constantly being transmitted SSC and BTS communicate with each other using LAPD protocol, which is a data link- protocol used in between the base transceiver station (BTS) and the MS. ISDN. In essence, the BSS provides a translation mechanism between the wireline protocols used in the fixed portion of the wireless network and the radio link protocols used fOFthe wireless portion of the network . . Today, the two elements of the BSS may be physically implemented by either two or three hardware 5.2 GSM NETWORK AND SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE systems depending upon the GSM hardware vendor. The BTS (often called a radio base station or RBS) is :'i!ie BSS air interface device that corresponds to the subscriber's MS. It provides the radio link to the MS Figure 5-4 shows the basic system architecture for a GSM wireless cellular network. As can be seen from ·'over the air interface. The usual basic components of the BTS are radio transceiver units, a switching and the figure. the major GSM subsystems are the network switching system (NSS), the base station system 'distribution unit, RF power combining and distribution units, an environmentaIcontrol unit, a power sys(BSS), and the mobile station (MS). Most of these wireless network subsystems and their components have tem.end a processing and database storage unit. The BTS is physically located near the antenna for the cell been discussed previously in Chapter 3 as the common components of cellular systems. Contained within · site. Radio base station' is the term usually used to describe the cellular radio transmitting and receiving the description of these components was a brief overview of their function and relationship to the other 'equipment located at the cell site. Typically. an RBS may consist of three BISs that service a standard seccomponents in the wireless system. This section will provide a brief review of the description of the comtorized cell site. . mon components and their system functions. Components that are specific to GSM systems or not ',",'The functional elements needed by a base station controller to implement its operations may be all previously introduced to the reader will receive more complete coverage. 'located in a single physical unit or split out into several separate units. The basic BSC components are input interface multiplexers, a timeslot interchange group switch, _a subrateswitch, speech Mobile Station . . transcoders and rate adaptors, SS7 signaling points, environment control units, power supThe mobile station (MS) is the device that provides the radio link between the GSM subscriber and tile wire. power distribution units, and various signal and control processors. As mentioned, the transcoder less mobile network. In tile GSM system.the MS provides subscribers the means to control their access to the rate adaptation unit is sometimes. split out from theBSC to be a stand-alone unit that is known as a PSTN and PDN and also to facilitate their mobility once connected to the network. The MS is a multifunc- ;.;~liItr~s.codler .controller I'l'Rt'). Some system economies for suburban and rural areas can be gained through tional system with a fairly large amount of signal and data processing power, It is constantly monitoring . . use of separate BSCs and a shared transcoder controller. Urban and heavy-traffi.c areas are best served messages being broadcast from the base transceiver system (BTS) to support tile setup and clearing of radio

--1

I--

-11--'

122

hltroduclion to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


Network Switching System (NSS)

GSM and TIlMA Technology


Administrative and Control System

123

by a combined BSClTRC. Chapter 8 will provide more details about these BSS hardware elements their operation.

r~------------l-~--------------------

Network Switching System


The wireless cellular network switching system (NSS) provides the necessary interface for the corme'ctioli~li of the wireless network to other networks (i.e., the PSTN, PON, and other wireless PLMNs). Additi.on:lllYiS' it provides support for the mobility of the GSM subscriber within the GSM network. The switching ."o.~..:,_" maintains databases that are used to store information about the system's subscribers and facilitate the nection of a mobile to the system as long as it has connection privileges. The GSM switching system designed to communicate with the PSTN through .ISDN protocols. The basic components of the networlc1'.: switching system include at least one mobile-services switching center (MSC), a gateway MSC, the and home location registers, the equipment identity register, and the authenticatio~ center. In addition these basic components, the switching system may also have a flexible numbering register and an working location register to provide more system functionality. To handle short message service (SMS) the wireless switching system will need to have an SMS _gateW;!Vi.lI'· MSC (SMS-GMSC) and an SMS-interworking MSC (SMS-IWMSC). The implementation of radio service (GPRS) for high-speed data transmission and reception requires the use of two adtiition!r(jfJ::.'·' switching system elements: a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) and a gateway GPRS (GGSN). These last two units connect to IP networks and will be discussed along with the SMS elements , ' more detail in Chapter 7. The MSC, in conjunction with several of the databases listed previously, performs the.necessary ony switching functions required to routeincoming mobile-terminated telephone calls to the c,orrect site and connect mobile-originated calls to the correct network (i.e., PSTN or PLMN). The MSC c', mmullrll' ) cates with the PSTN and other MSCs using the SS7 protocol. The MSC that is connected to the PSTN commonly referred to as the gateway MSC (GMSC). Additionally, the MSC is instrumental in the •..-~-.: .: • . sion and administration of mobility and connection management and authentication and encryption. The GSM network switching system databases provide the wireless network with the necessary mrorma-a ..

,,

1""----------,

ToSMS service.

,, ,
,,

To PSTN

ToPDN
I

-----~ :

.... :

!•
: I -

u
I I : I
L

r-------------------------------.....

Base Station System (BSS)

:
:
J

'- - - - - _!, Mobile: Station :

Antenna System

Radio Base Station (RBS)

Base Station Controller (BSC) and Transcoder

Operation and Support System (OSS)


, 1

,, ,, ,, ,,
,
I 1

GSM network architecture.

Operation and Support System and Other N

od

es

tion to facilitate subscriber mobility. The visitor location register (VLR) is a temporary database used'Asshown by Figure 5--4, the entire GSM wireless network is monitored and controlled by an operation hold information about mobile subscribers within the coverage area of a particular MSC. Theli!Jd support system (OSS) (the GSM standard refers to this functional entity as a operation and maintesubscriber information contained in the VLR allows the MSC to provide service to the visiting mobileilice center). This centralized system can be used to provide surveillance of the complete network and scriber. Commonly, the MSC will be integrated with the VLR to create a combined MSCNLR and hence: . provide the operator a means to support operation and maintenance of the entire network. Usually, reduce system signaling operations. For security reasons the VLR will assign a temporary mobile' . several sublevels to the management functions that cover the circuit, packet, and radio network scriber number (TMSI) to the visiting MS so as to avoid using the IMSI over the air interface. The Portions of the GSM network. The OSS software usually provides the system operator with the ability to location register (HLR) database contains information about the subscriber's account. Commonly stored perform configuration, performance evaluation, and security management of each portion of the wireless information will include such items as the MSISON and IMSI numbers and types of services that have been network along with the traditional display of alarms or fault indicators for specific system elements. subscribed to. Also included in the HLR database will be dynamic data such as the subscriber's current The other nodes shown in Figure 5--4 are used to interface the wireless network switching system with location (i.e., VLR address) and presently activated services. The HLR together with the VLR and the MSC the operator's administrative computer systems and software. The titles of billing gateway and service provide support for the connection and mobility management of mobile stations either in their home order gateway are descriptive of the functions performed by these elements. The reader may refer back to tion area or roaming within the GSM system. The authentication center (AUC) and the equipment Chapter 3 to review additional detail about these nodes. register (EIR) in conjunction with the MSCNLR and HLR provide additional GSM network securu.v.anu •• help facilitate international roaming within the GSM network. The flexible numbering register (FNR) 'Olll.lJ,LiM Network Interfaces and Protocols used by the GSM system to provide number portability to a subscriber. With this feature a subscriber change GSM operators and still maintain.the same MSISON number. The network switching system n,;111''':XllC seven-layer OS! model. was introduced in Chapter LAt that time, the basics of electronic. telecomrnuuse the FNR to redirect messages sent by a GMSC toward a particular HLR to the correct fUR The protocols were also introduced in the context of the OS! model. Recall that a network protocol is azreement on how to communicate between network elements or nodes. At this time; it will be instrucworking location register (ILR) is used to allow intersystem roaming. In the United States. this ooc~raltio[I''t ..... supports roaming between the legacy AMPS system and GSM 1900 system. . to take a brief l~k at the interfaces ayd protocols specified for use in the GSM system '.

124

Introduction 10 Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


B G MS

GSM and TDMA Technolol5J 125

BTS

BSC

MSC

MTP

UmRadio .... Interface . Figure 5-5 GSM network interfaces. GSM signaling model.

:
I

Interface

v.ersi()nof the ISDN protocol LAPD. The major differences between LAPD and LAPDm protocol are the The GS M standard specifies the various interfaces between the GSM elements. Figure 5-5 shows GSM interfaces. As shown in the figure, the air interface between the MS and the BTS is the Urn following: for LAPDm no error detection is employed since it has been built into Layer 1 signaling and The physical interface between the BTS and the BSC is mown as the Abis interface and the LAPDm messages are segmented into shorter messages than LAPD to be compatible with the TDMA . ' ,,,,,,,u"'I'-cJFr;'n ... length used in GSM. . . between th e BSC and the MSC, is known as the A interface. The MSC has various intc~rhlce:s'bet\lree)~~I~?'",· and the other network switching system elements or other MSCs. Note that the interfaces for SMS . Interface The Abis interface exists between the BSC and the BTS. The Layer 2 protocol used on the GPRS nodes will be discussed in Chapter 7 .. Abis interface is LAPD. At the Layer 3 level, most messages just past through the BTS transparently. How-

GSM

Interfaces

Layered Structure/OSl Model Also, recall from Chapter 1 the layered structure of the OSI model back to Figure 1-10). The OSI model viewsthe communications between user application being partitioned into self-contained layers that .contain tasks that can be implemented tasks in other layers. A message sent between two network nodes travels downward in the protocol the sending node. As the message propagates through the layers, information is added to the original

~yer, there are some radio resource management messages that are closely linked to the system radio hardware that must be handled by the BTS. The BTS management (BTSM) entities manage these mes'sages. An example of this type of radio resource message involves encryption. The ciphering message .sends the cipher key, K." to the BTS and then the BTS sends the ciphering mode command to the MS. Abis Layer I signaling details will also be discussed further in Chapter 8. .

sage at each layer. After transmission to the receiving network node, the message propagates . through the receiving node protocol stack. At each layer the information added by the sending A)pterface The A interface exists between the BSC and the MSC. Signaling over the A interface is done stripped off the message and analyzed by the corresponding peer layer (refer back to Figure 1-12) in~ording to base station signaling application part (BSSAP) using the network service part of SS7. In the. receiving node. The receiving layer is then able to offer various services to the higher layers within. ~, in the direction of the MS, Layer 3 is subdivided into three parts: radio resource management (RR), receiving node. This model will be used to illustrate the operation and structure of the GSM system. mobility management (MM), and connection management (CM). More will be said about these sublayers in Section 5.6 of this chapter. As mentioned, the protocol used to transfer the CM and MM messages is BBSAP. GSM Protocols

and Signaling

Model

The BBSAP protocol has two subparts: direct ~sfer

application part (DTAP) and base station system man-

Figure 5-6 shows a signaling model for the GSM system. As shown by the figure, the MS with the MSC to provide system connection, mobility, and radio resource management by sages back and forth over the air interface from the MS to the BTS, between the BTS and the between the BSC and the MSC. The figure indicates the various. protocols that are used between the ent GSM interfaces and at the different OS} layer levels. Additionally, the MSCcomrnunicates with various networks that it is connected to (pSTN, PLMN, etc.) by using the various protocols shown in fi~e ..These. operations will be briefly summarized in the next several sections and then explained in .' detail 10 Section 5.6 of this chapter. . V

agement application part (BSSAMP). DT AP is used to send CM and MM messages between the MSC and the MS transparently through the BSS. BSSAMP is used to send messages between the MSC and the BSC. This operation is detailed in Figure 5-7. . Interface The Ater interface only exists in GSM systems that have separate units for the transcoder and BSC (this is typical of some vendors' GSM equipmenuSignaling between the BSC and the is performed by the use of BSClI'RC application part(BT AP) protocol (BT AP is a vendor- [Ericsson] protocol) over the Ater interface. Figure 5-8 shows this type of operation. The figure indicates how

I-•...i Th La 1 U· sign.aling is sent transparently through the m ' ....nace eyer, m, air interface specifications will be detailed more extensively in Se(:~I:s~iisc'uss<ed 5.6 of this chapter and in Chapter 8. The Layer 2 protocol used.on the Urn interface is LAPDm, a further in Chapter 8.

IRe node.

Ater Layer 1 signaling details will also be

126 Introduction to WirelessTelecommunicationsSystems and Networks


Network

GSMand TDMA Technology 127


voice conversation or data and the subsequent system support for the subscriber's mobility. The cellular system is based on the use of time division multiple access (TDMA) to provide additional over a limited amount of radio frequency spectrum. This is accomplished by dividing the air connection period into timeslots that can be used by different subscribers for voice or data traffic also for the transmission of the required system signaling and control information. In essence, this 1I,)..pjl)C,essrovides additional channels to the system over the same physical radio link. p by Figure 5-9, the GSM system divides the radio link connection time into eight equal and . known as. frames for both uplink and downlink transmissions. The timeslots can be :'(jClijsl,len:u logical channels. That is, from a system point of view, each timeslot may carry either subtraffic or signaling and control information required for the management of the radio link and resources. The system can use several different types of repeating frame structures known as depending upon the type of information being transmitted. The next several sections will detail about. the timeslots and the frame structure and the operations and the various funcilf:~ijnS.'peritornaeo by the signaling and control channels.
TDMAFrame

Figure 5-7

Signaling between the MSC, BSS, arid MS in a GSM system.


Network

\ \

ToBTS

\ \

--

As previously mentioned, the logical channels may carry either SUbscriber traffic or signaling and control iIiformation to facilitate subscriber mobility. Presently, there are three types of traffic channels (TCHs). The full-rate traffic channel (TCHIF or Bm) carries one conversation by using one timeslot. The transmitted voice signal is encoded at a I3-kbps rate, but it is sent with additional overhead bits. Thisinformation plus MSC Interfaces The GSM signaling model (Figure 5-6) shows two protocol stacks within the MSC .additional channel overhead bits yields a final channel data rate of 22.8 kbps, The full-rate traffic channel The protocol stack on the left-hand side is associated with the A interface and has been discussed earlier. may also carry data at rates of 14.4, 9.6, 4.8, and 2.4 kbps. The half-rate traffic channel (TCHIH or Lm) right-hand protocol stack corresponds to the MSC network interfaces to the VLR, HLR, GMSC, and . -'.' voice encoded at 6.5 kbps or data at rates of 4.8 or 2.4 kbps. With additional overhead bits, the total PSTN or other PLMNs.- Within the network interface stack are the following protocols: MTP, SCCP, '1'1"" • n_ -.' rate for TCHIH becomes 11.4 kbps. Therefore, two conversations or a conversation and a data transfer .... '.MAP, and ISUPITUP. Message transfer part (MTP) is used to transport messages and for touting and or two data transfers may be transmitted over one channel at the same time. Enhanced full-rate (EFR) trafing. MTP corresponds to OSI Layers I, 2, and parts of 3. Signaling connection control part . tic encodes voice at a 12.2-kbps rate and like TCHIF adds overhead bits to yield a22.8 kbps channel data functions to SS? signaling to provide for more extensive addressing and routing. Together, MTP rate. The EFR channel may also transmit data at the TCHIF rates. More will be said about these channels form the network service part (NSP) and correspond to Layers 1-3 in the OSI model. Transferlliier. I
Figure 5-8

BTAP,= BScrrRC Application Part BSSAI' = BSS Application Part

Signaling over the OSM Ater interface.

application part (TCAP) and mobile application part (MAP) are Layer 7 protocols. TCAP provides services The signaling and control channels consist of three channel sub-categories: broadcast channels, common based on connectionless network services. MAP is a protocol specifically designed for mobile commuruca".cOntrol channels, and dedicated control channels. The function of thesechannels will be explained in more tions. It is used for the signaling between databases (HLR, VLR, EIR, AVC, etc.) and is further designated detail next. Later, the timing scheme used to transmit the signaling and control channels within the TDMA MAP-n where n is given as shown by Figure ~-5. ISDN-user part (ISDN-UP) and temporary user part . fi:\me structure will be examined. are used from Layer 3 up to Layer? and are used between the MSC and the ISDNIPSTN for call setup supervision. More detail about these protocols and operations will be given later in this chapter.

5.3

GSM CHANNEL CONCEPT

As discussed in previous chapters, cellular telephone networks use various control and tr~c channels carry out the operations necessary to allow for the setup of a subscriber radio link for the transmission

cellular system uses broadcast chaIinels (BCHs) to provide information to the mobile station about system parameters and also information about the location area identity (LAI). The three ty'pes of broadcast control channel, frequency correction channel, and synchronization channel. Using the transmitted over these three BCHs, the MS can tune to a particular base transceiver system

128 Introduaiont» WirelessTelecommunicationsSystemsand Networks

GSM and 1DMA Tecknow/5j 129

(BTS) and synchronize its timing with the frame structure and timing in that cell. Each time the MS Grant Channel The access grant channel (AGeH) is used by the network to assign a signaling to a new BTS it must listen to these three BCHs. ,_.,,,;u<wow. to the MS. After the mobile requests a signali~g channel over the RACH the network will assign a At present. the timing of-different GSM cells is not synchronized. However, there are several ~m~roiM' '''H;U<un.v, to the mobile by transmitting this Information over the AGCH. The AGCH is only transmitted in technologies that may be adopted in the near future that may alter this fact. The use of single-antenna downlink direction. ference cancellation (SAlC) algorithms to increase GSM system capacity is being investigated by the U:>Mjjl','c';' industry. This noise cancellation' technique is enhanced for synchronous networks. Therefore, ev'mtlJallyt~r{i!;'fjedicate,d Control Channels GSM cells may all be aligned to some master clock like the Global Positioning System (GPS). last group of broadcast channels is known as the dedicated control channels (DCCHs). These dedicated Broadcast Control Channel The broadcast control channel (BCCH) contains information that is needed are used for specific call setup, handover, measurement. and short message delivery functions. the MS concerning the cell that it is attached to in order for the MS to be able to start making or DCCHs are the stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH), the SIDWassociated control calls, or to start roaming. The type of information broadcast on the BCCH includes the LAI. the (SACCH), the fast associated control channel (FACCH), and the cell broadcast channel (CBCH). output power allowed in the cell, and the BCCH carrier frequencies for the neighboring cells. information is used by the MS to allow it to monitor the neighboring cells in anticipation of a possible Dedicated Control Channel Both the mobile station and the BTS switch over to the networkdover operation that might be needed as the MS moves about. The BCCH is only transmitted on stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) that is assigned over the access grant channel in downlink from BTS to MS. to the mobile's request that has been transmitted over the random access channel. The call setup (i.e., the initial steps required to set up a radio link) is performed on the SDCCH. The SDcCH is '1I":","tiansmitted b~th the uplink and downlink directions, When the call setup procedure is complete, both the in Frequency Correction Channel The frequency correction channel (FCCH) transmits bursts of zeros (this and -the 6TS switch to a preassigned available traffic channel. . an unmodulated carrier signal) to the MS. This signaling is done for tWDreasons: the !viS can use this ~iOll"lJ!&i;·'V~Vto synchronize itself to the correct frequency. and the MS can verify that this is the BCeH carrier. Associated qmlrol Channel The SIDW associated control channel (SACCH) is used to transmit inforthe FCCH is only broadcast-on the downlink, about measurements made by the MS or instructions from the BTS about the mobile's parameters operation. In the uplink direction the mobile sends measurements orthe received signal strength from its Synchronization Channel The synchronization channel (SCH) is used to transmit the required information. HTS and those of neighboring BTSs. In the downlink direction, the MS receives information from the for the MS to synchronize itself with the timing within a particular cell. By listening to the SCH. the ' about the mobile's output power level and the timing advance that the mobile needs to use. The can learn about the frame number in this cell and about the BSIC of the BTS it is attached to. The BSIC is transmitted in both the uplink and downlink directions over the same physical channels as the only be decoded if the BTS belongs to the GSM network. Again, SCHis only transmitted in the' or the TCH. direction. ~ •. ,.ra"Associated Control Channel The fast associated control channel (FACCH) is used to facilitate the hanCommon Control Channels operation in a GSM system. If handover is required, the necessary handover signaling information is The common control channels (CCCHs) provide paging messages to the MS and a means by which transmitted instead of a 20-ms segment of speech over the TCH. This operation is known as "stealing mobile can request a signaling channel that it can use to contact the network. The three CCCHs are the pag- ' since the time allotted for the voice conversation is stolen from the system for a short period. The ing channel, random access channel, and the access grant channel. 1',",~llbs(:riber is usually not aware of this loss of speech since the speech coder in the mobile simply repeats received voice block during this process. Paging Channel The paging channel (PCH) is used by the system to send paging messages to the attached to the cell. The MS listens' to the PCH at certain time intervals to learn if the network wants to. Broadcast Channel The cell broadcast channel (CBCH) is used to deliver short message service in the make contact with it. The mobile will be paged whenever the network has an incoming call ready for the' direction. It uses the same physical channel as the SDCCH. mobile Drsome type .ofmessage (e.g., short message or multimedia message) to deliver to the mobile, The' information transmitted on the PCH will consist of a paging message and the mobile's identity number (e.g., ISMI or TMSI). The PCH is transmitted in the downlink direction only, examining the structure of a timeslot, it will be instructive to take a brief look at how speech is processed in a GSM system. Figure 5-10 depicts this process. In the mobile, speech is digitized and broken Random Access Channel The random access channel (RACH) is used by the mobile to respond to a paging' Into 20-ms segments. It is then coded to reduce the bit rate and to control errors. This process produces message, If the mobile receives a page on the PCH, it wili reply on the RACH with a request for a signaling samples of 13 bits per sample per second or 160 samples of 13 bits per sample per 20 ms. The speech channel. The RACH can also be used by the mobile if it wants to set up a mobile-originated call. The yields 260 bits per 20 ms or 13 kbps whereas channel coding yields 456 bits per 20 ms or a 22.8-kbps RACH is only transmitted in the uplink direction. For this last operation, the RACH also plays an mnnrt"nt.. ' rate. Interleaving, ciphering, and burst formatting yields 156.25 bits per timeslot. This yields an overall role in the determination of the required timing advance needed by the MS and the subsequent ""15"J11"'" transfer rate 0(270.8 kbps over a GSM channel. . ' of this parameter to the mobile by the network. receiver works in .the following manner: signal bursts are received and used to create a channel The format of the signal sent on the RACH provides enough information to the wireless network The channel model is created in the equalizer where an estimated bit sequence is calculated for a the BSC) to allow it to calculate the distance of the mobile from the BTS. This measured time delay is signal. After all of the bursts containing information about a 20-ms segment of speech have been translated into a timing advance (TA) that is sent to the MS. The use of a TA aIIDWS any mobile wiihin and deciphered. they are reassembled into the 456-bit message. This sequence is then decoded to ,cell to transmit information that will arrive at the BTS in correct synchronization with the start of and correct any errors that occurred during transnrission. More details about the signal bursts will be IDMA frame. In the GSM system, the structure DC the RACH signal allows for a maximum cell radius . , shortly and more information about the interleaving and ciphering operations will be presented 35 km except when extended range cells are defined by the system.
8. .

130

IntroduCtion

to Wireless

Telecotnmunications Systems and Networks

GSM ant! TDMA Technology: 131


I Hyperframe = 2048 Superfrarnes« 2715648. TDMA Frames (3 hour, 28 minutes,53 seconds a~d 760 mlcroseconds)

--~------------------------------------------------------------------

r6tlI2;1~{1
I I I I I__ ~ ----------------~-----------------------------. ~--

"4J5J~f~1_~_~_~ I~Q4QliQ411?9~?12tj131~o4~12(ij.sf#ai6,1~~?,1 ~~~~~~~


I
:
I

1 superframe-~13Zti_1:Q.¥A Frames (=6.1~second~) Either Fifty-One 26-Frame l\1iIl:!iY<Il!l!: or Twenty-Slx St-Frame Multiframes --_

Figure 5-10

GSM speech processing.


TDMAFrames

, ,, , , , ,
,{(26 frame) Multiframe'~ " 26 TDMA Frames (120 ms) -,

Multiframes
I'

TDMAMultifram~nly Figure 5-11

the Function of Timeslot "0" Changes for this Multiplexing Scheme

Relationship between tirneslotsand

TDMA multiframes.

A GSM hyperframe (Courtesy of ETSI).

.. orgamzauon 0 f th e transmitted digital bits within the air timeslot itself can take on several different d . . . . I' In a GSM system, both traffic and signaling and control information are transmitted over the same physlca!:;I.,..: depending upon the type of information being transmitted (i.e.; voice tr~c, data, or signa ing an frequency channel. To accomplish this, time division multiplexing is used. The physical channels ofth~. . messages. ) A's s,hown in Figure 5-13 the air inte.rface timeslot has a duration of 3/5200 seconds or . . I 546 system used for the transmission of traffic are distinguished by virtue of their particular timeslot within . a roximately 577 us (or 156.25 bit periods) whereas the typical transmitted burst ~s approximate y. . us TDMA frame and the system Signaling and control information is organized in terms of both the sP"CIJ.,c',1 (or 148 bit periods). A bit time is 48/13lls or approximately 3.69Ils. The overall bit rate over the air mtertimeslot within the TDMA frame and the particular frame within a-larger organization of TDMA ··face is approximately 270.8 kbps. ink fra (multiframes). The relationship between timeslots and·TDMA multiframes is depicted in Figure 5-11. The . .' The start of a TDMA frame on the uplink is delayed by three timeslot ~riods from the downli me next several sections will examine the concepts of timeslots and TDMA frames in more detail. as shown in Figure 5-14. The purpose of this delay is so that the same timeslot may be used on. both ~e downlink and uplink radio paths without the need for the MS to receive and tr~smit at the same time. !htS IDMAFrames extends mobile battery life and makes it easier for the mobile's hardware to Implement the RF operations In the GSM system, eight timeslots constitute a TDMA frame. The system assigns numbers to the frames needed for proper system functioning. I sequentially from 0 to 2,715,648 and then the process repeats itself. Our description of GSM timing will Timeslor Bursts The transmission of a normal (traffic and control channels) burst and the other ty~es of start with the largest system time period. This grouping of successive TDMA frames is known as a hyperburst signals are shown in Figure 5-15. In the case of a normal burst, two groups of ~7 encrypted b~ts are frame. The hyperframe (as shown in Figure 5-12) consists of 2,048 superframes (2,715,648 frames) and transmitted on either side of a training sequence of bits. This training sequence consists of alternating Os .takes 3 hours 28 minutes 53 seconds and 760 milliseconds to complete, Each superframe consists of 1,326 TDMA frames that take approximately 6.12 seconds to complete. These superframes may take On one of . Air Interface Timeslot possible formats, An explanation of why this is the case will be forthcoming shortly. One fonnof a super- . frame consists of 51 (26 frame) multiframes (i.e., each multiframe consists of 26 TDMA frames that take 120. .;'+"·~i,:::;i:~I¥~~Bii)~Jfi~%i~}:.\t41(~"f~eri,~'~'5'it:;;~;f1;};':}(!i!J,'("<H ms to complete). The other superframe format consists of 26 (51 frame) multiframes (i.e., each multiframe consists of 51 TDMA frames that take about 235 ms to complete). Finally, as previously mentioned, within a 0.577 msec or 156.25 Bit Periods TDMAframe there. are eight timeslots that take apprOximately 4.615 ms to complete. .

Timeslots and TDMA Frames

II': .. .

The GSM air interface timeslot.

GSM and IDMA Technology 133 132 Introduction 10 Wirekss Telecommunications SystemJ and Networks
TDMAFrame#

Downlink (BTS to MS)


I

Transmission
I I I

--:
I

Timing Offset ~
I

!
Figure 5-14

~~~~~':TS:)=:====~========================:===========

TDMAFrame#

TDMA timing offset between uplink and downlink.


1 TDMA Frame ~ 8 Timeslots (120/26 = 4.615 ms)

-,

"'.'i
"

r,:,,~,:;~J11I!,~~~!~:~_~~:_;p:~iji~\lll
I Timeslot

= 156.25 Bit Times (15/26 =

S7"jl~)."
'---

Illit Time = 48/13 = 3.69 IJ.S

f.T~~r-------;--Fl-"a!l" -l-ra~'in-i-ng-' s-cq-\-,e""n-ce-r:F::-I~-g'-5-7-fu-' -cnm"-t-ed-Bi-ts--'::T::::lB -3 57 Encrypted Bits Bit 26 Bits BIt -v r3 8.25 Bits: L...L ...L::.::...L.__:~:_,_~__L-=:-:-::--_L..J --" Normal Burst (NB) (Flag is Relevant for TCH Only)

-~~-"i

and Is and is used to train the adaptive equalizer incorporated into the GSM mobile receiver. Three (3) tail precede the rust group of traffic bits and 3 tail bits trail the last group of traffic bits. These tail bits conof three zeros (unmodulated carrier) that provide time for the digital radio circuitry to initialize itself. single flag bits separate the training bit sequence from the encrypted bit groups. The flag bits are used to indicate whether the encrypted bits contain traffic or control information. The normal burst has an 8.25bit long guard period at the end of the burst where no transmission activity takes place. When used as a traffic channel, a total of 114 encrypted bits are delivered per timeslot. Details of the encryption process wili be presented later. The frequency correction burst is used by the mobile to obtain frequency synchronization. It consists of .: '142 fixed bits (binary Os or an unmodulated carrier) proceeded by 3 tail bits and followed by 3 tail bits. It '. also has the same 8.2S-bit long guard period after it. The repetition of the frequency correction burst by the . within the GSM frame structure becomes the frequency correction channel (FCCH). synchronization burst is used bythe mobile to obtain timing synchronization. It consists of 3 tail, bits, ."'Z""lU'"V¥''''' by 39. encrypted bits.·a 64-bit synchronization sequence, 39 more encrypted bits, 3 tail bits, ~ the .BI'."!'r: .• iU'"" S.25-bit long guard period. The encrypted bits contain information about the frame number (FN) and base station identity cooe (BSIC). The repetition of the synchronizing sequence burst by the BIS within ........ GSM frame-structure becomes the synchronizing channel (SCH). the The access burst is used by the mobile to facilitate random access requests by the mobile and handover operations. It co'nsists of 8 tail bits followed by a 41-bit synchronization sequence, then 36 encrypted bits, and 3 tail bits. In-this case, the length of the guard bit time period is equal to 252 I1Sor 68.25 bits. The rea"'5pn for the long guard time is so a mobile that has just become active or has just been handed off and does not know the system timing advance can be accommodated. The value chosen al!ows for a cell radius of 35 ': ..'.,Ion. The access burst is used on both the random access channel (RACH) and on the fast associated control .... channel (FA.CCH) during handover. The dummy burst is transmitted on the radio frequency designated as Co when no other type. of burst sigis being transmitted. It consists of 3 tail bits, 58 mixed bits, a 26-bit training sequence, 58 more mixed bits, 3 tail bits, and the same 8.2S-bit long guard period. The purpose of the dummy burst is to ensure that the base station is always transmitting on the frequency carrying the system information. This affords the mobile the ability to make power measurements on the strongest BTS in its location and thus determine which BIS to attach to when first turned on, Purthermore, the mobile can also make measurements of other .. BTSs and therefore provide information to the system if handover is needed.

>,

II

T3B L.L_

142 Fixed Bits Frequency Correction Burst (FB) Synchronization Sequence


l__~~ __

B' ' -'-,-J.38~~_s __ ~~Sj

ITBI---GP-':

Mapping

of Logical Channels to Physical Channels

TB64-Bit 3 39 Encrypted Bits L...L

39 Encrypted Bits _=-----... ---GP 68.25 Bits

GP 8.25 Bits:

Synchronization TB 8 41·8it Synchronization Sequence


_":":':~_;__ _

Burst (5B)
....

~~------,------,---.--------------:16 Encrypted Bits T3B


~_ L.:__J_ _ __[_

--.-- .. :

-- - -- ---. -. -- -- - .•• -- -- -- •. -- - --."

Access Burst (AB) Til L3:L 26-BitTraining _::.5e:.:q~u.:.:en:....c:....e __ _'_ "Dummy Burst ([)B)· 1'B ~_'3 8.25 Bits:

58 Mixed Bits

j_ _

58 Mixed Bits

--:GP--j

that the reader has some sense of the structure of a timeslot and the overall TDMA frame and frame hierarchy. it is time 10 take a look at the transmission of information within the multiframe structure of .GSM. The system needs to be able to transmit both traffic (voice or data) and signaling and control information to the subscriber. The subscriber needs to be able to access the system and request radio resources to set up a can or to send data. The operations involving data transmission will be discussed more fully in Chapter 7. Only certain combinations of logical channels are permitted within the GSM standard. This section will not attempt to treat all the various possibilities and mapping combinations but will attempt to provide a overview with several specific examples to give the reader an appreciation for the basic concept of traffic and signaling and control information is passed over the radio link within the GSM multiframe first example to consider. for proper system operation, there is a standard combination of logical that must be transmitted during Timeslot 0 of the designated downlink radio frequency channel Co) within a cell. It is: FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH.· Also permitted within Timeslot 0 of Co another similar coinbination of channels: FCCH + SCH + BCCH + CCCH + SDCCH + SACCH. In both

::
Figure 5-15 GSM traffic and control signal bursts (Courtesy ofETS!).

134 Intiorluction to Wir<lessTelecommunications Syslims and Networl:s GSM and TDMA Technology 135

39
~~_L-L~~~_L~J_~~~-L~~~~-L-L~~LJ~~J-~~~

~--~ ,
__ ~ _

~~~6

The multiplexing of GSM I 'caI It . . ogI . c annels.

cases, the transmission Qf the three .' provides both the informati broadcast channels (BCHs) and the c '. .., the frame structure of th onnneeded by the mobile to determine T" l°mIn on control channels O Co and t .. e ce and the me b' imes ot on hro . combmalion ismultiplexect w;thin th ans y which the mobile can a th 0 sync nize , As shown in Fi I e GSM multiframe structure . ~ces~ e network. How the TDMA fram ( gur~ 5-16, the sequence of FCCH SCH B~s shown in Figure 5-16. information. ~ea:n:l:a;;:)~~e last frame of the s~uenc~ (Fr~~

;;g)

~CC~repeats

every

it. ;i
)

;'
._:

..

?ne group of four frames that c our frames ~arrying CCCH information ar~sca~ Idle frame and carries mformation transmitted b the B~ BCCH mformation is needed due to th a ed pagtng blOcks and by the mobile for access t~ the GSM over the BCCH. In the uplink direction T~ larfe a"_lount of The second combination of cb system {o.ver the random access channel 0 I~ at 0 IS reserved for BCHs and CCCHs (known as a ann~ls that !Deludes the SDCCH and S r C~). . I'. . ture as shown in Figure 5,..17 InC:blned control channel) is implemente:~C~ channels alOJig with SDCCR and two SACCH h . s case, one can see that only th . in e GSM multi frame g is effective in a rural cell :h ann;ls are aVailable. This type of Chann~; pa :g 'blocks are present but . . ere ittle traffic is expected to b com matlon (known as SDCCH/4) e generated. In this configuration, the' physical Paging Groups

High,traffic GSM multiframe, .channels that would normally be assigned exclusively to SDCCH and SACCH (to be explained next) can used as traffic channels and call setup and other system operations may all be carried out over one physi. cal channel (Timeslot 0). For high-traffic cells, another combination of channels, SDCCH and SACCH, can be transmitted on any timeslot and any carrier frequency except for Timeslot 0 on Co, The repeating sequence of SDCCH arid SACCH channels takes place over 102 TDMA frames. Figure 5-18 shows the multiplexing of tbeSDCCH and SACCH combination on both the downlink and uplink. As can be seen from the figure, this combination of SDCCH and SACCH channels can support up to eight mobile stations simultaneously and is known as channel combination SDCCHJ8. The figure also shows how the timing between the channels on uplink and downlink are shifted by sixteen tiIpeslots to accommodate the delay needed by the mobile for the processing of information received from the BTS. A cell may support up to four SDCCHf8 channels in addition to a broadcast channel on Timeslot 0 or up to three SDCCHJ8 channels with a combined control channel on Timeslot 0,

Figure 5-17

Possib1e sACeH Subchannels AnotberGSM mul:"L n"_', w<ame cO.u<;;uranon.

Transmission

of Short Messages

A 'cell broadcast channel (CBCH) is required for the transmission of short message service in the downlink direction. One of the SDCeH subchannels will be assigned for this purpose. Only one CBCH can be supported within a cell. .

136 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks GSM and TDMA TechrwlofJj 137
rCHIF + FACCHIF + SACCHffF

~:~~~lfi~i~~i,~!~~~I~~~~~i~~~,6;
GSM IDENTITIES
(Multi frame)

r, ~..'~

,.... ',"

,,/ . ' .

26 TDMAFrame

Figure5-19

GSM traffic channel frames.

3 introduced the reader to the idea of wireless network element identities. The GSM standards use numbering systems as described previously. These numbering plans will be briefly described here for continuity.

Station Associated Numbers


MS has a mobile station ISDN number (MSISDN) that uniquely identities a mobile telephone subin the PSTN numbering plan. It is therefore a dialable number and is linked to one HLR. The Ienlatiion:i11mobile subscriber identity (!MSI) is a unique identity allocated to each subscriber by the service operator and stored in the subscriber's SIM. All network-related subscriber information is to the IMSI. Besides being stored in the subscriber's SIM,. the IMSI number is also stored in the and VLR databases. The temporary mobile subserfber identity (TMSI) number is used by the GSM :;;a' ...,,";; .... ,Mlc to protect the subscriber's privacy over the air interface. The wireless network assigns a TMSI to · and the TM~i number only has local significance within the particular MSCNLR coverage area . MS attachment. The international mobile equipment identity (lMEI) number and the international "•.:mol1ileequipment identity and software version (IMEISV) number are used by the GSM network for equipment identification and to uniquely identify an MS as a piece of equipment.
I

Figure 5-20

=iI' 1,1'1,1'1, /' 1JiRJI],NJ'I, I'1,1'1,1'1, 1


GSM full-rate and half-rate traffic frame structures.

2ti_Frames = 120

IDS

i
'.
',i.,.

II
..

.' 1
I

Traffic Channels
~h~~el combinations already mentioned, typically, Timeslot 0 and another timeslot (Ti.neslot 2 Ig~re 5-18) are used by broadcast and control channels and the dedicated control channels s eaves SIX ti~eslots (TS 1 an~ TS3- TS7) free for use by traffic channels (TCH), Traffic channels' ~ mappedonto physical channels (timeslots) along with a SACCH channel. The repetition of the TCH~ :~~~

'I

:t ,
.\

Thi 1m.

!
GSM system uses both location area identity (LAI) numbers and cell global identity (COI) numbers. LAI is used for MS paging and location Updating. The om is used for cell identification within a locaarea (LA). Within the wireless network itself, the network elements will have identity numbers or . addresses that are necessary to facilitate the correct operation of the system. Examples of this identification scheme are base station identity codes (BSICs) and mobilegllobal titles (MGTs) that uniquely identify network switching system elements within a particular operator's network. The MGT concept was already covered in greater detail in Section 3.4,

,I

II
I:
1.'1:

,I

~lg~~H

oc~urs over a sequen~e twenty-six TDMA frames. Figure 5-19 shows this situation . .;:: anne may also be used in this sequence by stealing times lots from bursts of speech as shown. .

0:

Half-Rate Traffic Channels - T~e GSM system can use half-rate channels to double system ca acit since
tw~ users share the same phY~lcal channel. Figure 5-20 shows both full-rate and half-rate fram~ st~tures

'I

Using half-rate channels, the Idle frame used in full rate will be used for the SACCH' I' £ th ' ond MS S' bil signa mg ror e secframe f mceha mo .1 e uses only every other timeslot for a call, the muItiframe will contain thirteen idle s or eac mobile. Therefore, the mobile could be allocated two traffi h I datachannel. IC c anne s or a speech and a

~
;ll ill
1\:
'.'i:. '~

Mobile Station Roaming Number


The mobile station roaming nwnber (MSRN) was introduced in Chapter 3 during a discussion of the basic , functions of the various network switching system databases during a mobile-tenninated call. The MSRN is used by the GSM system during the call 'setup operation. This operation is shown in Figure 5-21 and is known as the interrogation phase. ' As shown in the figure, several operations must be performed before the call setup operation can be completed. In Step #1, the GMSC receives a 'signaling message, "initial address message," from the PSTN about the incoming call for a particular MSISDN number. In Step #2, the GMSC sends a signaling message, "send routing information," to the HLR where the subscriber data for the particular MSISDN is stored. In Step #3, the HLR uses MSISDN to find the subscriber data in the database. The VLR address that corresponds to the subscriber location and the iMSI for the subscriber is retrieved from the HLR database . in this step. In Step #4, the HLR sends a "provide roaming number" message to the MSCIVLR using the 'VLR address as the destination and the IMSI to identify the mobile subscriber. In Step #5, the VLR asks MSC to seize an idle MSRN (this corresponds to a signaling path) from its available pool of numbers 'and to also associate it with the IMSI number received from the HLR. In Step #6. the MSCf\lLR sends the ..'¥SRN back to the HLR. In step #7, the HLR se~ds the MSRN back to the GMSC. In Step #8, the GMSC

Paging Groups The mobile will be assigned by the network to art' I . GSM TS 05.02) that uses the mobile's IMSI num:e~ an~~:e:::S~~
From system' f .

~~~:::u
~ough a Ion.

an algorithm (refer to

of combined ma;;i~;:a;II:~i~~s~~~:e:eth~~~:t~~~:~;~~e!:~e~yCeiVe ;nfoitifration about the type . betweentransmissio f . . pe 0 mu ame structure used IMSI number the n~.ol paillgmgalmessageso the same paging group. Using this information and its own t , mo lew c culate which CCCH and which pa i th .' calculations the MS will I Ii .f g ng group at It belongs to. From its . berof .' . on y sten .or pages and make random accesses on a specific CCCH. The num.chamieJ:gJ.ng groups using noncombmed mapping is greater than with combined mapping of the logical

1311 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


Step #3 HLR recovers VLR address

GSM and

mMA Technololfj

139

Step #6 MSRN sent to HLR

will include calls and the operations that support a subscriber's mobility: location updating operahandover cases. For a description of all of the possible GSM traffic cases, the reader will have to the GSM standards. For the sake of continuity, the reader mcy want to review Section 3.5 for an of call establishment. Again, the details of data calls and short message service will be covered in 7.

IMSI

MSRN Step #5 VLR asks MSC to MSRNnumber

•i.~ttratlon.Call Setup, and Location Updating


describing the call setup operations, one needs to consider the various states that the MS can be in. can be powered off, or the SIM card can be. removed from the mobile, or the mobile can be on but an area without service. In all these cases, the MS is considered to be iJJ. the detached condition. the MS can be powered on within the GSM system and will subsequently enter into an attached with the system. The mobile can be in either of two states when attached: (I) the idle state in MS has no dedicated channel allocated to it and it just listens to the broadcast control chanhels and the paging channels (PCH) or (2) the active or dedicated state in which the MS has a dediconnection to the GSM network. While in the attached mode, the MS may change from the idle to the mode as the result of call setup, short message service transfers, location updating, or supplementary procedures, Also, if the MS is in the active mode and changes cells, this operation is referred to as hand over.

IMSI~MSRN

Figure 5-21

GSM call setup using the MSRN (Courtesy of Ericsson).

----l . I
CC . Figure 5-22 Formulation of the GSM MSRN.

NDC

SN

Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN)

setup within a GSM system consists of quite a few necessary operations. For either a mobile-originat. or a mobile-terminating call the following ten operations .need to be performed. Fora uJe-teIlllInatmg call it is necessary to perform an initial additional operation as shown: Interrogation (only for a mobile-terminating call) Radio resource connection establishment

uses the MSRN to route the call to the COITt:ctMSC. Now the serving MSC receives a signaling "initial address message," for the incoming call identified by the MSRN value. The MSC u.uu""~O'U incoming digits and associates them with the IMSI that corresponds to' the subscriber. The MSRN is released and made available for other calls. The IMSI is used by the MSC for final establishment call. The MSRN follows the E.I64 numbering plan. It consists of three parts as shown in Figure 5-22. MSRN=CC Where CC = Country Code +NDC+SN

Nbc
I.,' Ii .

= National Destination

Code

"':1frj!f!te'rroR~ati(m Phase
the heading
WIlli

SN = Subscriber

Number (This is the number of the serving MSC)

The interrogation phase has been described previously-in this chapter in Section 4 Mobile Station Roaming Number. Figure 5-23 graphically illustrates the interrogation

I';
\,

This last example pulls together some of the concepts presented earlier. The next several sections provide additional examples of overall system operation.

aJlll,liU!!!~ in a timeline/flowchart

II
j'i

5.5 GSM SYSTEM OPERATIONS (TRAFFIC CASES)


The reader has already.been introduced to the typical wireless network operations of call setup, updating, and handoff in Chapters 2-4 as the common tasks and operations performed by the ments of a wireless network system. The purpose of this section is to show the reader further detail how the various typical traffic cases are handled within the GSM system. These examples will indicate .. different types of system signaling that OCCUI,the nodes of the GSMsystenrinvolved in the assorted. . tions, and the functions that the nodes perform during these operations. The traffic cases considered in

form. This will be the format used in this section to illustrate the various operand signaling occurring between t&e differentnodes of the GSM network. For the interrogation one notes that the initial address message (lAM) comes from outside the GSM network using protocols. In some vendors' systems, the GMSC can send. a request to the flexihle .numbering (FNR) system node before being sent to the HLR. Also, for security reasons, the subscriber data simultaneously stored and updated in two HLRs. This built-in system redundancy assures successful in all but the most catastrophic disasters. In one final note about this operation, one observes that last operation performed, the two GSM system nodes (the MSCNLR and the GMSC) use a non.protocol to communicate with each other (i.e., the lAM message): Connection Establishment Figure 5-24 shows a graphic of the radio resource connection process -.Figure 5..:25 shows the detailed steps required for radio resource connection estab-

140

Introduction to Wireless Telecomnumiauions


MSCNLR HLR

System: and Networks


GMSC , PSTNIIDSN

Provide

Roa.ming

~="'="=I
Time

Send Routing Information

"4

(Initial Address Message)

"~,, .." "

<€"~,

Number


~i

GSM and TDMA Technologj

141

[I
,

[I)
.
.

. Paging Command
.. .:., .. ".," .. ", " .. ,

. ,.,,,0,,,

Provide Roaming N..mber


••.
'W •. ~

~,,,,.,~, Send Routing

Paging Request

..... , ...

Infozination
lAM (Initial Address Message) Figure .5-23 GSM interrogation

.,",,;'>J"<',".-1P.:..i§~

Channel Request

"." .., ,,§!'@w"i>


TIlDe

'1

phase of call setup.

Channel Activation Acknowledge

..""""".",.-.""~

...,., 1'Jjl> ,

..I

Immediate Assignment

.,~-.g",,.. ..
Figure 5-24 GSM radio resource connection establishment. MobU. Station

~wl~~,"
......

Command
.... ,""""

Immediate Assignment
,,"c' ,

Mobile Switcbing lishment. The MSClVLR initiates the call setup process by sending a Layer 3 paging message to the appro(MS) Station (BTS) Centroller (BSC) Center (MSC) priate BSC. The paging message will contain the subscriber's IMSI number so that the BSC can calculate .FlgUl'e 5-25 Detailed messaging during GSM radio resource connection establishment. the correct paging group to use. Recall that the MS can be paged in all the celis of a particular location area or even globally in all the cells of a MSClVLR serving area. In most cases, the LAI is provided by the MSe to the BSC. The BSC receives the paging message and typically translates the LAI to a cell global,tlenhtv'iI!::,'", ,'.request (i.e., answer to page, originating call, location updating, emergency call, or other operations) to set (COI) number if this information was not provided in the paging message. priority if the system is experiencing heavy call volume and the radio resources are low. When the BTS The BSC sends the paging command message to the appropriate BTSs. This message will contain detects an access burst, it sends a channel required message to the BSe. The BSC examines the information following information: the IMSI or TMSI, the paging group, and the channel number. The channel within the channel required message (access delay of the access burst, type of request, and will contain enough information to indicate the channel type and the timeslot number. For this case, .'·TDMA frame number when the access burst was detected, etc.) and determines whether the MS is within channel type is a downlink common control channel (CCCH) (i.e., a paging channel [PCHl). For the GSM the allowed range of the cell. The BSC determines what channel to use and sends a channel activation messystem, the paging group is determined by the subscriber's IMSI and other information defmed in the BSe. sage to the BTS that contains the following: MS and BS power, timing advance (TA), DTX status, the When the MS has received the system information and knows its paging group, it will calculate when .' .reason for the allocation, and a complete description of the channel as shown in Figure 5-26. Figure 5-26 paging group will be broadcast and thereafter will only listen for pages during the time they are expected . that there ace two possible modes of system operation: single carrier or multiple carrier (known as be sent, hopping). In Figure 5-26, the value of the mobile allocation index' offset (MAIO) is a number Finally, the BTS sends a paging request message to the MS. This message is sent on the PCH. There used to identify the hopping sequence of the mobile and the hopping sequence number (HSN) several different types of paging requests possible depending upon the use of IMSI or TMSI numbers. the pseudo-random. generator employed by the MS and the network to generate the frequency TMSI numbers are used instead of IMSI numbers, up to four MSs may be paged in one paging sequence to be used. . .
>

Base Transmitter

Base Station

'The MS responds to the paging request message by sending a channel request message to the BTS. . message is transmitted on the random access channel (RACH) and contains information about the type

BTS activates. this channel and then sends a channel activation acknowledge message back to the BSC then sends an immediate assignment command message back to the BTS that includes an assign message for the MS. This immediate assign message is sent by the BTS to the MS over

I,

142 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and NetWorks


GSM and TDMA Tethnologj
Single Carrier Frequency Operation

143

(No Hopping)
'BifBii 7';

'6L
Channel Description Information Element Identifier Timeslot Number

Bit

Time Byte l Byte 2 Byte) Byte 4

Bit ,Hit'
"7" '6"

,-t-~L__L~L:_L::_L.:.:c.L!iJ

these operations, At this time, a Layer 2 message known as set asynchronous balanced mode is sent from: the MS to the BTS. This Layer 2 message contains a Layer 3 message (i.e., the inforfield of the Layer 2 message contains the paging response message).' Shortly thereafter, the BTS "I'''f:'"e.n(ISback to the MS a Layer 2 message in an unnumbered acknowledgement (UA) frame that contains the paging response message. This operation prevents the chance occurrence of two MS accessing the

Training Sequence Code

ARFCN (MSBs)

Figure 5-26

~--------------~

ARFCN (LSBs)

"_,.y,,;,,w.v channel simultaneously. The paging response message from the MScontains information about the MS identity, the ciphering sequence number, and the MS class mark. When the paging response arrives at the BTS it is forwarded BSC in an establish indication message. This message causes the BSC to activate radio connection 'J.'.'/,3uality supervision and initiates power control algorithms for the dynamic control of the MS output power I~MA;::-IO::-T-..l_-l_------_j The paging response message from the MS is to be eventually delivered to the MSC and therefore the

I-~:-----:-=-----'::=-------J

(LSBs)

GSM channel description messages (Courtesy of ETSI).

The next step in the call setup procedure is authentication. The authentication process in onglnallnformatlOn from ~e access, burst, and in the case of frequency hopping a list of fre u~n~i:sef~r .' shown in Figure 5:-28. Depending upon, the exchange properties stored in the MSCNLR, as set up by the MS to hop between. If the information sent back to the MS fro th '. I q .• I db' m e ongma access burst agrees with the qSM operator, authentication is either activated or not activated, If authentication is activated, an authentiva ues store y th.e M~, the mobile enters a new phase to be described next. ' , cation request message is sent transparently to the MS. The message containing a l28-bit random number The ,GSM. specI~catJons. allow for a modification of the just described procedure, If need be the BSC (RAND)'illld the ciphering key sequence number (CKSN) is sent to the MS over the stand-alone dedicated may send an. unmediate assignment on TCH command to the MS. This all th II ,,' . .control channel (SDCCH) from the BTS. The MS stores the CKSN and then calculates the value of a performed directly over the TCH. When the call setup pr ed . lOWS e ca setup signaling to be d . .. . ' oc ure IS comp ete, a channel mode modify com' " signed response (SRES) by using the RAND, the value of k[ (the subscriber authentication key that is stored man message can used to Imitate a procedure that will return the TCH to the traffi d Th."· -: inthe S1M card); and Kc in several authentication algorithms (known as A3 and A8), The value of SRES is might be employed if there is congestion on the available system SDCCHs. c mo e. IS'strategy returned to the MSCNLR as a transparent authentication response message. Between the BSC and the BTS Ser~ice Reqw:st The service request phase occurs as soon as the MS has tuned to the ' . a data request frame and a data indication frame are used to pass-the Layer 3 message as shown. A timer is to II by the Immediate assignment message sent during the radio resource connectio~e;h:~~~~!::I;~~~ set in the MSCNLR when the first authentication request message is sent. If the timer expires, the request is sent again. If the timer expires a second time, the radio resources (the channel) are released.

th~ access grant channel (AGCH) and instructs the MS to switch to the allocated si nalin ' ta~~ the. channe~ description information element shown in Figure 5-26, the TA ~or th; ~;~el

sends it on to the MSC as a connection request message after it adds the CGI number to the Layer 3 ,j!l1'orrnatiioncontained in the original paging response message. Finally, the MSC sends a connection conmessage back to the BSC This means that the circuit-switched connection is established on the A interface.
\,

and ;on~. '.

Authentication

R
, ,

Iii

Authorization Request Time Establish Indication (Paging Response) Connection Request


"---'~"'--:;-'-":;-~-.~

Co<J;::;:::'2::-::>=== =:::~
(paging Response)

VA

Mobility Management (SDCCH)

<}, ,,', ,,'.. "'

Authorization Request
I

<3'=, (Authorization Request) =,=~=::::::JI


,

Data Request

Time

Authorization Response Mobility Management (SDCCH)

(paging Response) Connection Confirm


~tr!:P\""'~""_<~A·_"'_'i."._.o'_'I_

e>

j
Data l~d~tion " •• ;~ Authorization Response ''''''''''~'''''~'"''~
',',

(Authorization Response)
,

Mobile Station (MS) Figure 5-27 GSM'service

Base Transmitter Station (DTS) request operations.

Bose Station Controller (DSC)

Mobile Switching Center (MSC) ,

Mobile Station (MS) Figure 5-28 GSM 'authentication

Base Transmitter Station (DTS) operations.

Base Station Controller (DSC)

Mobile Switcbing , Center (MSC)

144

Introduction to Wireless TelecommunicatioTIS Sysums and Networks

GSM and TDMA Technology

145

i
. Cipher Mode Command Radio Resource (SDCCH) Radio Resource (SDCCH)
~''''~''''H''''',''''''''

I
~
Cipher Mode Command
~'~Y""""""""""'" ,"

I
,

Encryption Command <~~.,<.,Y..u ",' '


I

~"-.",-,-".,,,

Time

Ic::::,::::',c,::;,

, Cipher Mode Complete ':::i"'3E*"":;;,.,,si,"l!§i\'il;. §!l!i¥@~, ~ Data

fuf~a~~2~
'
"

j
Cipher Mode Command
..". "~"d+I#% ~

Mobility Management (SDCCH) Mobility Management' (SDCCH)

~P:"'''========'
c:::::::=:::::r:~~',~
Identity Response

Identity Request

Data Request .. (Identity Request)


,

4p=,,,=====
Time

Identity Request

(Cipher Mode Complete), Mobile Station, (MS) Figure 5-29 Base Transmitter Station (BTS)

Identity Response Base Transmitter Station (BTS) Base Station Controller (BSC)

, .",~".'''-'''h_M.
Mobile SwitchIng Center (MSC)

Base Station Controller (Bsq

Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

Mobile Station (MS)'

GSM ciphering mode setting operations.

." '.,.""'--'-~5-30

aSM IMEIcheck.

If authentication is unsuccessful, the GSM system may initiate a procedure to identify the MS. Depending upon the results of this procedure the MS may be barred from the system or sent a message indicating that the "IMSI is unknown in VLR" or "PLMN not allowed."

Ciphering Mode Setting If the authentication process is successful, the next step in the call setup: process initiated. The process of ciphering mode setting is shown in Figure 5_29. The MSClVLR sends the cipher' ing mode command to the BSC. This is a BSSMAP message that contains the value of Kc.This value is ., The next step in the call setup process is the transmission of the setup message forwarded to the BTS within an encryption command message. The BTS stores the value of Kc and sends Ii ,.,",'Call Initiation Procedure " . transparently from the MSC to the MS. As shown in Figure 5-32, this connection management message is nonciphered ciphering mode command message to the MS. The MS inserts Kc and the TDMA frame numsent over the downlink SDCCH from BTS to MS. This message contains a request for GSM bearer services ber into another authentication algorithm (A5). This creates a ciphering sequence that is added to the (speech, data, fax, etc.). The MS will send a call confirmed message on the uplink SDCCH if it can handle ' message that is to be sent. This ciphering mode complete message is sent to the BTS. The BTS upon receipt, and correct deciphering of this message sends it transparently to the MSC via a data indication frame from BTS to BSC. . The ciphering key sequence number (CKSN) is used by the GSM system to reduce the number of steps . required for call setup. Recall that the vaIue of CKSN has been stored in the SIM card. If the MS makes another call without first detaching and reattaching to the network, the service request message from the <1:\lI.,.",.., ~,,' MS to the MSC will include theCKSN. The system checks to see if the CKSN value is stored with the TMSI Reallocation Data Request MS's IMSI in the VLR. If so, the MS may start ciphering immediately without first performing authenticaCommand TMSI Reallocation tion. Obviously, this will ease the network signaling load. This process of selective authentication can be Command ' (TMSI Reallocation Mobility Time Management controlled by exchange properties set in the MSCiVLR by the system operator. Command)
" '

Reallocation The value of the TMSI number to be used for a particular traffic case or if one will be used at all is determined by the MSCNLR software program. If a TMSI number is to be used, it is sent ,'icimsparently to the MS from the MSCNLR via the TMSI reallocation command as shown in Figure 5-31. , Thill mobility management message is transmitted over the SDCCH from the BTS to the MS. The value of : iIle TMSI number is stored in the SIM card and a TMSI reallocation complete message is sent transparently from the MS to the MSCNLR over an uplink SDCCH.

I
,

II
-.

(SDCCH)

<:========,
TMSI Reallocation Command

:<is...., ,. ",".

Again, the exchange properties set in the MSCNLR determine whether an IMEI check is, ' performed. If the IMEI number is to be checked, the MSCNLR sends an identity request message to the", MS as shown by Figure 5_30. As shown by the figure, this mobility management message and the MS identity response niessage are sent transparently between BTS and BSC. The vaIue of IMEI sent by the , mobile is checked against the equipment identity register (EIR) database. The EIR can return three status modes for the MS back to the network. The MS can be "white listed" and allowed to use the network, the MS can be "black listed" and not allowed to use the network, or the MS can be "grey listed." It is then up to the network operator to decide if the MS can use the network or not.

lMEl Check

Mobility Management (SDCCH)

Ic:===~="<;;t<:;;;-'. '
1c:===D=ata=m=di~ca~ti=on6Z~"~ (TMSI Reallocation Command)
I"

TMSI Reallocation Command


"'''.''''''¥#',,",''$"~

Mobile Station (MS)

Base Transmitter Station (BTS)

Base Station Controller (Bsq

Mobile Swltdllag Center (MSC)

5-31

GSM TMSI reallocation operations.

146

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks

.'' ' ..

I,
,'I"

i
Data Request
~> ••• "~. "

Ii
.
.

"
Connection Management (SDCCH) Connection Management (SDCCH)

(Setup)

Time


Radio Resource Assignment Command
~&:!f"""'"~'~'".y,,,.,. :,.,.

I
'.

'
Data Request
... "c' .•. '," •.. ""·.

GSM and IDMA Tedmologf

147

[I
.

.. ;~~el.~ctivation Channel Activation Acknowledgement

<Z;\,. "".c·

Assignment Request
. "."" .

j
Call Confirmed Base Transmitter Station (BTS) Base Station ControUer (BSC) Mobile Switeh[qg Center (MSC) (SDCCH)

==~~.i:>
~'~'

(Assignment Command) Time

'~

Mobile Station (MS)

~:.:'~.=.=~=-CG:z.S;:ZQ1~D -:.
E.tablishment lndica.t~~n Radio Resource (FACCR) Assignment Complete
...

"

SABM

Figure 5-32

GSM call initializationoperations.

the requested service. Today one can imagine many instances of incompatible mobiles unable to handle the newest multimedia data formats, This message is also sent transparently from MS to MSC.' A timer is started in the MSClVLR once the setup message is sent. If the timer expires before the call confirm message is received, the connections to the calling subscriber and the mobile subscriber are released. '
:,~

-8>Assignment Complete

~
I

Data Indication
.

c.,,"w.>",¥ ...~_.~

'"

Assignment of a Traffic Channel The traffic channel assignment is initiated by the MSC. As ;ho~n in Figure 5-33, the MSC sends an assignment request message to the BSC. This message contains information about the call priority, the status of DTX on the downlink, a circuit identity code (CIC) to indicate the transmission path for the speech or data traffic between the MSC and the BSC, and possibly a particular radio channel to facilitate some type of operations and maintenance function. The BSC could at this time assign the MS to the serving cell, another cell in the BSC serving area, or an external cell depending upon the status of the system and the available radio resources at the time. If the assignment is to the serving cell, the BSC must obtain the timing advance information, calculate the MS output power level, select an idle traffic channel, and send a channelactivation message to the BTS. This is the same message described in the section on Radio Resource Connection Establishment. However, . instead of assigning SDCCH + SACCH as done in the RR connection establishment, this time the channel type is set to Bm + ACCH, which means a full-rate TCH + SACCH + FACCR. The BTS sends an acknowledgement back via a channel activation acknowledgement message to the BSC. The BSC sets up a path through its group switch for the traffic. The BSC sends an assignment command message to the MS that contains the information about the new channel assignment (i.e., TCR + SACCR + FACCH). This radio resource message is sent over the SDCCH. It consists of a complete channel description as was shown in Figure 5-26. . At this point, the MS tunes to the new channel and sends a SABM message over the FACCH to indicate successful seizure of the channel. As the BTSreceives this message it sends a VA message to the MS and . an establish indication message to the BSC. The VA message is sent back to the MS for the same reason as explained previously. The MS theu sends an assignment complete message to the MSC to indicate that the trafftc channel is working. Finally, the BSCsepds a message to the BTS that the signaling channel is no longer needed in Ihe form of a RF channel release message. The BTS sends an RF channel release acknowledgement message back to the BSC.

(Assignment Command) ~ •. RF"ChanJleIRelease RF Channel Release Acknowledgement

"."c .. ,'c"".~.

=====D.~
Mobile Station (MS) Base Transmitter Station (BTS) Base Station Controller (BSC) Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

Figure 5-33

GSM traffic channel assignment.

Call Confirmation, Call Accepted, and Call Release

The operations performed for call confirmation and call accepted are shown in Figure 5-34. The call confirmation procedure starts when the MS sends a transparent alerting message to the MSC. This message indicates that a ringing tone has been generated in the mobile and that it can be used for user-to-user signaling. When the alerting message is received the MSClVLR sends the TUP address complete message'to the calling subscriber who can now hear the ringing tone generated in the MSC. When the MS user answers, the connect message is sent to the MSC. This message, when received by the MSC, prompts a connect acknowledgement message to be sent back transparently to the MS. These are all connection management messages. The system messages that occur at the end of a call have been already introduced in detail in Section 3.5. The reader may refer back to this section to review the details of the call release operation (refer to 3-19) if so desired.

early GSM systems, international calls to a GSM mobile were routed through each country's international exchanges. A call from one country to another required extensive signaling over each country's

148 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

G&\1 and 11JMA Technology 149 }i~;Normal Location Updating (Idle Mode) The basic steps involved with location updating look very similar to .iiltihose used for call setup. The steps are radio-resource connection establishment, service request, authentica"'stiofl (except for the case of periodic registration), cipher mode setting (depending upon the circumstances),

'i
Connection Management (FACCR)

~
Alerting

==~.&>
1c::=D=a=ta=In=d=ic=ati='o=n~f> (Alerting)

====J>

Alerting

===="[9>Time Address Complete


Message Toward PSTN

:Jf'io~ation updating, and then radio resource connection release. :~;:. Recall that a location area is defined as a group of cells that is controlled by one or more BSCs but only : one MSC. When an MS is in the idle mode, it listens to system information sent over the BCCH. This ;>.irtformation includes the location area identity (LAI) of the serving cell. If the MS detects an LAl different . from that stored in the SIM card (the value stored at the most recent attachment time). the MS must perform a normal location update. As shown in Figure 5-35, the first step of the process is to perform a radio ": resource connection establishment operation. Since this radio resource management operation is initiated the MS, it will be shown here (see Figure 5-36). As shown by Figure 5-36, the MS sends a channel
(I) System information (2) Radio resource (RR) connection establishment - channel request (3) Service indication (4) Authentication (5) Location updating (6) Acceptance (7) Channel release

Connection

Management (FACCR)

==C=0'inn=ec=t=q.~ Data Indication (Connect)

··-···:G>

========>
I ..

Connect

Connect

Connection
Management.

(FACCR)

<::2;::::======

Acknowledge

«1;:::===== (Connect
Acknowledge)

Data Request

~"

""

COIlllect .

Acknowledge

Answering Message Sent Back to Originating Exchange

".;»
. M_S ~(3~)
(4) (4)

(5)

Mobile Station (MS) Figure 5-34

Base Transmitter Station (BTS)

Base Station .Contreller (BSC)

Mobile Switching Center (MSC)


(7)

GSM call conformation

and call accepted.

PSTN and the country's international facilities in order retrieve information about the location of the mobile from its HLR. cine can conceive of various scenarios where a GSM mobile has registered in a MSaYLR in a foreign country and a call is made to that mobile from the same country that it is now registered in. In the old system, information from the home HLR about the present whereabouts of the mobile would direct the call back to the serving MSaYLR. Therefore, it was possible for a call to a GSM mobile to be sent back and forth through the international exchanges of different countries when the mobile was' actually within the same country as the originating call. Now, the local exchange where the call is being placed through has the ability to detect a GSM number and directly interrogate the proper HLR for the information needed to locate the mobile subscriber. This process saves a great deal of signaling and unnecessary routing.

GSM location updating (Courtesy of Ericsson).

--(7) Channel Required

(6)

== ~..-I'
Radio Resource (RAeH)

====:z::jl>

Channel Request

- ·19 I

Time

<;::::C:::hann:=e=1

A:::c::tiv;::::at::io::n=::J

Location Updating
The operation used to support the subscriber's mobility within the GSM network is known as location . updating. At any given time, the subscriber may receive or initiate a call since the cellular system knows where the MS is located within the network. There are three different types of location updating used in the , GSM system. The type of location updating used depends upon the status of the MS. These three location updating operations will be explained here. The three schemes are normal or forced registration, periodic, and ISMI attach. In addition to the location updating function, the MS will also inform the network when it is about.to switch to a detached mode.
Figure 5-36

======iZ>
Immediate Assignment Radio Resource (AGCH) Immediate Assignment ..__ "... . '.

Channel Activation Acknowledgement

<l"'~"<:"~
Base Station
Controller (DSC)

~,.y.,

MobO. Station
(MS)

"Base Tr.ns:mitter Station (DrS)

Mobile Switching Center (MsC)

GSM location updating.

150

Introduction to Wlrelesr Telecommunications Systems and Networks

. .j

I
. .

·
• " .. "

I
. . N···,..',

II
.

..

c=

== =:: = = (Location Update Request)

SAME

=·=Z='E'2Z0E~-~


Mobility' Management (SDCCH) Mobility Management (SDCCH) Mobile Station ,(MS)\

GSM and 1VMA Technology 151

I

.
Location Updating Accepted TMSI Reallocation ... Complete '
N ..... ,""',',"_~

[I
. .

UA ..-eC2·~SS-2I_::-~;:!-=:": =::. (Location Update Request)

==

Time Establish Indication (Location Update Request)

"B>
.
I

Connection Request .' :''''*'''~'~8''~ (Location Update Request)

-<&."~""F:":."~"'_"'.

~~"===:::JI Location Updating Accepted <3p~====:::J:::J1 (Location Updating


Data Request Accepted)

II
. .

Time

j
TMSI Reallocation Complete .·."~.·,,",,,a-·• Mobile Switching Center (MSC) Base Station Controller (BSC)

Data Indication ""1,v4j"""f~ (TMSI Reallocation .Complete) Base Transmitter Statioa (BTS)

Mobile Station (MS)

Base Transmitter Station (BTS)

Base Station Controller (BSC)

Mobile Switching Center (MSC)

Figure 5-37

GSM location updating service request.

5-38

GSM location updating accepted.


\

request message over the RACH. The BTS, in tum, sends a channel required message to the BSe. If a free SDCCH is available, the BSC sends a channel activation message to the BSe. Once a channel has been activated, the SSC send an immediate assignment message to the MS and starts a system timer. The reader may want to compare this process to that describer earlier under call setup. When the MS receives the immediate assignment message, it switches to the ordered channel and sends a service request via an SABM message that contains a location updating request message to the 'B'rS (see Figure 5-37). The message is looped back to the MS via a UA message for reasons mentioned previously and also forwarded to the BSC within an establish indication message. When this message arrives at the BSC the timer is disabled and themessage is forwarded to the MSC within a connection request message. The location updating request message will include the old MS location and the new cell location (via the, CGI number). The MSC acknowledges this Layer 3 information by sending a connection confirmed message back to the BSC. Authentication and ciphering mode settings operations are similar to those performed during call setup described previously. Authentication is normally performed for new visitors to a MSCNLR. Since selective authentication is normally employed by the system, the MSCNLR will perform a check of the exchange properties to determine if authentication must take place. If the MSCNLR needs to contact the HLR, this process may be delayed. Ciphering mode setting mayor may not be activated depending upon the status of the MS. If a periodic updating is being performed, ciphering mode setting need not be activated since it has already been performed by the system. The next step in the location update process is shown in Figure 5-38. If the MSCNLR accepts the location updating, the MScrVLR sends the location updating accepted message transparently through the BSC and BTS to the MS over a SDCCH. The message sent by the MSCNLR may contain a new TMSI number. If this is the case, the MS responds by sending a TMSI reallocation complete message transparently back to the MSCNLR. When a newTMSI is sent to the MS, a timer is enabled in the MSC. When the MS sends its acknowledgement of the new TMSI back to the MSC, the timer is disabled when the MSC receives the message. If the location updating request is rejected for whatever reason (IMSI unknown in HLR, "black listed" MS, etc.), the MSC sends a location updating reject message to the MS. The radio resource connection is released and the MS may be put into an idle state with only emergency call functionality.

The last step the location updating process occurs when the radio resource connection is released. process is identical to the call release operation already discussed. Figure 5-39, which shows this ;, operation, is included here for purposes of continuity.

in

I
II Data Request


lW
<!%;;;::,.,

====\
Clear Command

II
.
.

<{\j~.

~===
Channel Release UA

~"

(Channel Release)

<$=.

'~=======::::JI

Deactivate

SACCH

TlI1le

~GG",z.J2,Z'::.2'-2-'=.z-

zc t : :':

Release ~dica~_~

<):s"

====
RF Channel Release

RF Channel Release

Acknowledgement
.~.

~.~
B... Statlu.

Clear

Comptete

MobUe Statio. (MS)

Base TraDsmitter
Statio. (BTS)

Co.tfoUer (liSe)

Mobile Swltchfng Center (MSe)

GSM connection release.

152

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications

~I---'-_"
{( '\11
(Ia) BTS _
_:(_lb_)

Systems and Networks


(1)

GSM and 11JMA Ttchnolof!j


til<lIIC'l..uLI""L'"

153

i~;~~! ::::::: ::::~ :::::~~


(3)

Radio resource (RR) connection establishment - channel request

Updating Periodic location updating is used to prevent unnecessary use of network such as the paging of a detached MS. If the system uses periodic registration, the mobile is

'~;owoften it must register. Timers in both the MS and MSC control this operation. When the MS
expires, the MS performs a location updating that does not require all of the steps involving autbentiand ciphering mode setting operations. If the timer in the MSC expires before the MS performs a updating, the MSC denotes the MS as detached. If the updating operation is performed on time, the sends an acknowledgement to the MS. Any time the MS is activated within the system the periodic

--lIBSC,·,'r-I.I--_"'~IMSC/VLR

't!§."""uod,atJIlg timers 'are reset. operation known as VLR purge, a subscriber that was registered in an MSCNLR may lie ',I,;;;;"iealctn'au:a by the MSCIVLR due to lack of activity. For example, a particular subscriber has been Figure 5-40 GSM IMSI detach (Courtesy of Ericsson). ,;1!?Jl.etalchl:afor more than twenty-four hours, in order to avoid unnecessary signaling within the network; the the HLR that the subscriber is no longer -available. The HLR denotes the subscriber as and returns an acknowledgement (purge MS) message to the VLR. At this point the vLR If the mobile is in an active mode as it changes location area, the process just described must be delayed , the subscriber from its database. until after the call is released and it returns to the idle state. In this case, the mobile will have received the new LA! number over a SACCH.
MS (2)

Depending upon the GSM system, the MS may use thelMSI detach procedure when powering off. This process is shown by Figure ~O. When the MS power is being turned off, the mobile requests an SDCCH. Over the SDCCH, the MS sends a message to the network that it is about to enter the detached state. The MSC denotes the MS status (IMSI detached) in the VLR. The VLR will reject incoming calls for the MS sending a voice message back to the caller that the subscriber is currently unavailable. Alternately or additionally, the VLR can send a message to the HLR indicating the detached condition of the subscriber. If the subscriber has voice mail, the caller will be directed to leave a message for the subscriber. I The IMSI attach procedure is the complementary, operation to IMSI detach. 'If the MS is powered 'on in the same location area where it performed an IMSI detach, then the following operations take place as shown in Figure 5-41. The MS requests a SDCCH, the system receives the IMSI attach message from the MS, the MSC passes the attach message on to the VLR. The VLR returns the MS to active status and resumes normal caIl handling for the MS, The MSCIVLR returns an IMSI attach acknowledgement message to the MS. If the IMSI detach process caused the HLR to be updated with the MS's detached status, the normal location updating will have to be performed by the mobile. If the mobile has changed location area while in the detached mode, it will also have to perform a normal location updating when it is switched on again. The signaling used to perform an IMSI attach is basicaIly identical to that of a normal location updating.
(I)

IMSI Detach/Attach Location Updating

ability or'the GSM cellular wireless system to support a subscriber's roaming mobility is made possible the operations of location updating and .handover. Together, these operations allow the wireless the capability to locate the mobile outside of its home location and to maintain a connection to the even if the subscriber is rapidly moving about the system. Previous parts of this section have already described'the location updating operations of a GSM cellular system. Handover occurs when an active mobile station changes cells. The BSC for the location area where the ",,.,,,,,,, ,,.,u~ .. is attached makes the decision to have the mobile change cells based on a locating algorithm. This takes into account the signal strength of the serving cell and the strongest nearby cells. When the results indicate a need to change cells, the BSC initiates a handover. There are several different of handover scenarios that are possible. The most common handover operations will be described ~xt. For these descriptions, a graphical illustration will be used,
,JiliF,~IIrOI~gn

Radio resource (RR) connection establishment - channel request g

,~~lB~ Ts'@,(2)IMSldetaChmessa etowardMSC (3) IMSI detach message toward VLR


~~Ia) (Ib) , .'~:'. MS
(2)

(Ia) ---..... (Ib)

(4)

Acknowledgement message from VLR (5) Acknowledgement message from MSC ~SC

./

MSCNLR

(3)

intra-BSC handover is shown graphically in Figure 5-42. In this case the handover is going to occur between two cells that are both controlled by the same BSC. During an ongoing call, the MS makes measurements of the received signal strength (RSS) of its own traffic channel (TCH) and the RSS of the aeighboring cells. In Step #1, the MS sends a measurement report about the RSS levels to the BTS at a rate of about two times per second. The BTS also makes measurements of the TCH uplink signal strength and adds these to the measurement report from the MS. In Step #2, the combined report is forwarded to the BSC. The BSC uses a locating function to determine the necessity of handing over the ~I to another cell because of either poor quality or low signal strength in the cell that the MS is attached to. In Step #3, if handover is deemed necessary, the BSC sends a command to the BTS in the new cell to activate a TCH. In Step #4, when the new BTS acknowledges the activation of the new TCH, the BSC sends a message to the MS via the old BTS with information about the new TCH (i.e., frequency, timeslot, and mobile output power), In Step #5, the mobile tunes to the new TCH and sends short handover access bursts on the appro~ FACCH. At this time, the MS does not use any timing advance. In Step #6, when the BTS detects the access bursts, it sends timing advance informatiori to the MS over the FACCH. The BTS also a handover detection message to the BSC. The BSC reconfigures the group switch to 'deliver the tr3f-

(5) Figure 5-41 GSM IMSI atta~h (Courtesy of Ericsson). '

(4)

the new BTS. In Step #7, the MS sends a handover complete message to the BSC. In Step #8, the
sends a message to the old BTS to deactivate the old TCH and its associated signaling channel In the intra-BSC handover the MSC is not involved with the operations. The BSe would send a record of the handover to the MSC for the generation of system statistics.

154

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


CeliA --_ CeliA)

GSM and TDMA Technology

155

--- --

"""
\ \

@~'i"'i:,j~1 Step #2. .:::.,---~~

"\ (I) fvrS and BTS A perform RSS measurements. (21 Measurement report is sent to BSe. .A~) TCH activation message is sent to BSC B. . ~/ // (4) New TCHinformation is sent to MS over old BTS (A). (5) Handover access burst is sent to new BTS (B). (6) Timing advance information is sent to MS. (7) Handover complete message is sent to BSe Cbannel deactivation order is sent to old IiTS.

BTSA ~

.. =:=:
r r _ -

=C=e=II=B=::-------_-,~. ,-,~,~.'A +~
'" ~

~<>

/
/ /

,(8)

,
\

\
\

,,
,

I I I

I I \ \ f I I I I \
\

,
Step #5 Step #6 Step #7

\ \ I I \

,
I I I I· \
\

,
\

, , "

BTSB

f f

,
'-

---_..:
Step #7

/
/

\
\ \

---

__ ~~

, , "

-, <.,

Figure 5-42

GSM Inlla·BSC handover (Courtesy of Ericsson).

---

Inter-BSC Handover
In the inter-BSC handover the mobile has moved to a cell that is in a different location area and """"'.V"'·.: has a different BSC. Figure 5~3 shows this situation. Again, the serving BSC decides that the hauded over to a new cell that belongs to a new BSC. In Step #1, the serving BSC sends a nannnvet-ss.. required message to the MSCwith the identity of the new cell. In Step #2, the MSC determines the BSC for the new cell and sends a handover request to the new BSC. In Step #3, the new BSC sends an to the uew BTS to activate a TCH. In Step #4, when the new BTS activates Ute TCH, the BSC sends ~.."- .... ~,/. nel information (i.e., frequency, tirneslot, MS output power) and a handover reference to the MSC. In #5, the MSC passes the channel information to the old BSC. In Step #6, the MS is instructed to change '. the new TCH and it also gets the handover reference information contained in a handover command message. In Step #7, the MS tunes to the new TCH and serids handoveraccess bursts containing the handover reference on the new FACCH. In Step #8, the new BTS detects the handover access bursts and sends ". advance information to the MS 00. the FACCH. In Step #9, the new BTS sends a handover sage to the new BSC. The new BSC sends a message to the MSC informing it of the handover. changes the traffic path through the group switch in order to send it to Ute new BSC. In Step #1 D, MS receives the timing advance information it sends a bandover complete message to the BSC. In the new BSC sends a ~andover complete message to the old BSC via the MSC. In Step #12, the old and SACCH are deactivated by the oldB'I'S. The MS gets iuformation about the new cell on the associated with the new TCH. If the cell is in a new location the MS performs a normal location ing after the call has been released.

Handover request is sent by serving Bse to MSC. (2) Handover request is sent by MSe to new BSe (B). (3) BSC B sends activation order to BTS IB. (4) BSe B sends handover information to MSe. (5) MSC sends handover information to BSC A. (6) BSe A sends MS new TeH information. (7) MS sends handover access burst to new BTS (IB). (8) Timing advance information is sent to the MS. (9) BTS IB sends handover detection message to BSe B. (10) MS sends handover complete message to BSe B.
(1)

(II) Bse B sends hapdover complete message to the old BSe (A). (12) Old BSe (A) sends channel deactivation message to old BTS(IA).· .

GSM Inter.BSC handover (Courtesy of Ericsson).

area,

possible handover that can occur is when the BSC decides that a handover should occur and new cell belongs to another MSC. This type of bandover is known as an inter-MSC and is sbown by 5-44. For this handover to be performed, Step #1, bas the BSC sending a handover required rnesto the serving MSC as was the case for the inter-BSC handover. In Step #2, the serving MSC asks the MSC for help. In Step #3, the new MSC allocates a "bandover number" in order to reroute the call to

156

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

GSM and TDMA Technology 157 on the FACCH. In Step #11, the old MSC is informed about the handover access bursts (this info from the new BSC and MSC). In Step #12, a handover complete message is sent from the MS. The BSC and MSC inform the old MSC. The old MSC informs the old BSC and the old BSC sends a mesto the old BTS to release the old TCH. In this procedure the old MSC maintains control of the call it is cleared. In this process, the old MSC is called the anchor MSC. ", ' Since the call entered a new location area, the MS is required to perform a location updating as soon as the ,call is released. During this operation, the HLR is updated as to the whereabouts of the MS. Also, the HLR will send a cancel location message to the old VLR telling it to delete all stored information about the MS (again, this operation is known as a VLR purge).

_-------- --_
CeUIAI

--

.........

Other Handover Operations


,

<.

,
\

\
\ \

• There is the possibility of an intercell handover. This can occur when the channel quality is worse than that . from-the RSS measured values. This would entail a change to a new TCH from an oldi TCH the same cell. The handover of SMS occurs on the SDCCH. The procedure is identical to that used the TCH. Also, there is the possible need to hand over the SDCCH during the call setup operation.
\ \

I I I I I I I I \ \ \
\ \ \ \ \

\ I I, I

(iSM INFRASTRUCTURE

COMMUNICATIONS

(UM INTERFACE)

~~
ars
IBI-- - - -#4--<o-I S te p Step #11
I I I

\""'~

-'-_0-- __ Step #12

~~

_ ........ ,~~

Step #5 Step #11 Step #12 (8) Handover message is sent to MS. (9) MS sends handover access burst to new BrS. (10) New BrS sends timing advance information toMS. (II) Old MSC is sent bandover detected message. (12) MS sends handover complete message to new BSC. BSC sends handover complete message to the old BSC. Old BSC sends channel deactivation message to old BrS (IAI).

.the previous sections of this chapter have presented a considerable amount of detail pertaining to the net, work components and infrastructure, system timing, air interface signal formats, and the operations necessary to provide mobility to the subscribers of GSM wireless cellular networks, Earlier in Section 5 2 a brief overview of tile GSM signaling model was presented. This OSI-based signaling model indicated the interfaces between the GSM network elements and the protocol stacks that serviced these nodes as by the technical specifications of GSM. This section will supply some additional details about the of communications and messages that are sent across the radio link or Urn interface and the role of the various protocols in the processing of these messages. In particular, the signaling between peer network lay,ers will be examined starting with Layer 3 of the protocol stack and working downward.

(1)

(2) (3) (4)


(5) (6) (7)

Handover request is sent by serving BSC (AI) to MSCA. MSC'A requests assistance from MSC B. MSC B provides MSC A with handover number and sends new BSC (B I) a handover request. New BSC (B I) sends handover activation order to new BrS (IBI). BSC sends handover information to new MSC. Handover information is send to old MSC. A signaling/traffic link is set up between the two MSCs, GSM Inter·MSC

Figure 5-44

handover (Courtesy of Ericsson).

Inforrnation flow between two nodes in a network.

:i
\.)

the new MSC. Also, a handover request is sent to the new BSC. In Step #4, the new BSC sends a command to the new BTS to activate an idle TCH. In Step #5, the new MSC receives the information about the new' TCH and handoverreference. In Step #6, the TCH description and the handover reference is passed on to the old MSC with the handover number. In Step #7, a signaling/traffic link is set up from the serving MSC to the new MSC. In Step #8, a handover command message is sent to the MS with the necessary informa-", tion about channel and timeslot to be used in the new cell and the handover reference to use in the ""IIU')Y<'" access burst. In Step #9, the MS tunes to the new TCH and sends handover access bursts on the FACCH. , Step #10, the new BTS detects the handover access bursts and then sends timing advance information to the']

s:

•• - __

, Additional detail will be provided about the physical layer (Layer 1) signaling •• _ •• in Chapter 8 under the general topic of GSM hardware.
0

across all of the GSM

,e,'"'''V'P''' of GSM Protocol Architecture


considering specific examples of GSM peer-to-peer signaling, the reader is referred to Figure 5-45 Figure 5-46 that illustrate the flow of information between two nodes in a network (e.g., the MS and BTS across the Urn interface). As previously described in Chapter 1, the information from the particular

I,

158 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


Mobile Station

GSM and WMA Technology 159


Network MS

,
I

BTS

BSC

MSC

IUm
I I I I I I I I I I I I

I_."'":'MM-

eM

-(RR_r

Service Primitives

f,---.,.......,..:

_t

t'___.-Jt._____---Jt l

Figure 5--46

Information flow between two nodes in aGSM network (Courtesy ofETSI).

,, The GSM specifications categorize the call control signaling procedures into four subsections: ,'"callestablishment and clearing procedures, active state procedures, and miscellaneous procedures.

-,

user application is sent down through the protocol stack across the physical interface and up through the protocol stack of the receiving node. In each layer, there exist protocol entities that are responsible for the specific signaling operations and procedures required to complete the transfer of information .between nodes. Within the same layers in different nodes, there are peer entities that communicate with each other through the use of a specific protocol. Between adjacent layers, so-called service primitives are used for communication between the different protocol entities. These service primitives provide a means by which the information is carried over the boundary common to the adjacent layers. This information': transfer occurs at a service access point (SAP); a logical concept defined by the OSI model. The SAP is identified by its service access point identifier (SAPI) value. A familiarity with these concepts will be useful to the reader while learning about the various peer -to-peer operations that will be described next.

Layer 3: Networking Layer Operations


Within the GSM network, Layer 3 provides the mobile network signaling (MNS) service for the mobile subscriber's application. The MNS operations include the following: connection management functions to establish, maintain, and terminate circuit-switched connections from the PSTN to a GSM .rnobile subscriber; functions to support short message service to the subscriber; functions to support supplementary services; and functions to support radio resource and mobility management operations. The discussion of wireless data service operations will be deferred until Chapter 7, Within Layer 3, three sublayers with the appropriate protocol control entities must exist to provide these functions. These sublayers are connection management (CM), mobility management (MM), and radio, resource management (RR). Figure 5-47 shows the allocation of the signaling functions at Layer 3 for the Um interface, As the figure indicates, the MS contains all three sublayers and their respective protocol control entities, On the network side of the air interface, the CM and MM protocol entities only reside within the MSC, The RR entity resides primarily within the BSC; however, some RR functions may reside in the BTS and the MSC (hence the parenthesis in the figure). In most cases, RR messages are handled transparently by the BTS and MSC.

Call control (cq procedures are used during call establishment. For a mobile-originated call, ',the mobile subscri('er starts the call establishment procedure by dialing the digits and pressing the send but"t,on on the MS keypad. This process is known as a man-machine interface (MMI) procedure, These pfocedures are mapped onto call control procedures through an exchange of service primitives over the mobile network CC service access point (MNCC-SAP) as shown in Figure 5-48. When a request is made to establish a call, a free or idle CC entity is used to establish a CC connection between the MS and the GSM ".network. The CC entity initiates the call establishment by requesting the MM sub layer to establish a MM :..connection, When the MM sub layer confirms the establishment of a MM connection, the CC entity sends a "setup message to its peer entity in the MSC. Other CC messages are then exchanged as needed, After conand connect acknowledgement messages have been exchanged, the two peer sublayers enter an active state and the call establishment signaling phase is complete. When a mobile-terminating call occurs, the CC entity used to establish a connection between the network and the MS is located in the MSC. Call clearing procedures are initiated through the sending of a disconnect message by the CC entity. After the exchange 'of releasefrelease complete messages, the MM connection is released and the CC entities return to an idle or , null state. Detailed descriptions of the messages exchanged during these call establishment and call clearing ,procedures have been given in the previous section and in Chapter 3. During the active state, a CC entity "" send a message to inform its peer entity of some type of call-related event or call rearrangement via a , -uotify or modify message. Miscellaneous other CC procedures such as congestion control, call status, and DTMF are also possible. It is possible to have paralIel CC transactions taking place through the existence of more than one CC "entity. This is shown in Figure 5-49. The CC entities are independent of one another and communicate with their peer entities through separate MM connections. The figure shows four CC entities: two call control entities, one SMS entity, and one supplementary service entity. The different CC entities use different transaction 'identifiers.

'Call Control

f' 'CC entity messages can be grouped into call establishment, call information, calI clearing, messages for
service control, and miscellaneous messages.

Connection Management
The CM sublayer contains functions for calI control, call-related supplementary services management, noncall related supplementary service, and short message service. All MSs must support the call control

Message Service Suppon Short message service entities known as short message control (SMC) use message control protocol (SM-CP). These entities are used to transfer short messages between the MS the MSC. As shown in Figure 5-48, the SMC entities provide service to the SMS application through mobile network SMS service access point (MNSMS-SAP).

160

Introduction to Wlreles.! Telecommunications


Mobile Network Service

Systetns and Networks


User Application Connection Management (CM) Signaling Layer 3

GSM and TDMA TechnoZOf5j 161

MMREG-SAP

Layer 3 Signalling

5-49

Parallel callcontroi

operations (Courtesy of Ericsson).

Layer 2

SAPIO

SAPI3

chapter. The MM procedures used to provide subscriber confidentiality include authentication, reallocation, and MS identification through lMSI or IME!. The MM connection management procealso provide service to the different entities in the CM sublayer. These services allow the CM entity .. ,ability to use an MM connection for communication with its peer entity either in the MS or the MSC. when the MM sublayer receives a request for a MM connection from a CM entity, the MM sublayer sends a request message for the establishment of a RR connection to the RR sublayer. After the RR connection is established, the network may start the MM procedure of authentication and TMSI reallocation and the network may also ask the RR sub layer 10 perform ciphering mode setting. After the successful completion of these MM and RR procedures, the MM connection establishment is finished and the CM entity that requested the MM connection is informed that it exists. . . Some of the types of messages used by MM are registration messages, security messages, connection management messages, and miscellaneous messages.

The radio resource sublayer receives service from Layer 2 and providesservice to the MM sublayer. Additionally, the RR sublayer communicates directly with Layer I for the exchange of information related to Supplementary Services Support Supplementary Services (SS) handle services that are not related to a spemeasurement control and channel management. The primary function of the RR procedures is to establish, cific call. Examples are call forwarding and call waiting. This information is transferred to the HLR through maintain, and, when no longer needed, release a dedicated connection between the MS and the BTS (i.e., messages related to tile appropriate service. The SS entities provide service through the mobile network SS. the wireless network). To achieve this end, the RR procedures include cell selection at power on, handover, service access point (MNSS-SAP). . reselection during idle mode, and recovery from lack of service during idle mode. The cell selection ~';·dll~J<.)·CU"H::S are performed in conjunction with Layer I in fulfillment of GSM Phase 2 recommendations for Mobility Management selection. The MS RR functions include the procedures for the reception of BCCH and CCCH when The mobility management sublayer performs three types of procedures that are related to mobility .n.,,,,.,,dl'!Ef.r:-:'mode and the network RR functions include the broadcasting of system information and the continsubscriber confidentiality, and service of the CM entity. The mobility support procedures are transmission of paging information on all paging subchannels to MSs in the idle mode. MM specific procedures. They include the different location updating types discussed in the prior The establishment of an RR connection may be initiated by the MS or the network, On the MS side, the sublayer requests the establishment of an RR connection or on the network side a RR entity transmits a

Figure 5-48

Call control procedures

(Courtesy of Ericsson).

162 Introduaion to Wireless Telecommunications Symms and Networks


GSM and TDMA Technology 163 paging message to the MS. In either case, the MS's RR entity transmits a channel request message that

for a signaling channel. Thenetwork responds by allocating a dedicated channel to the MS by

sending

2: Data Link Layer Operations


previously, link access procedures on the Dm channel (LAPDm) is the Layer 2 protocol used signaling information between Layer 3 entities over the air interface. The designation of the Dm

immediate assignment message. There is an exchange of Layer 2, SABM and VA frames, and the RR . nection is established. The MM sublayers in both the MS and in the network side are informed that an

connection exists. refers to any of the control channels discussed in Section 5.3. Each logical channel is allocated a While in the RR connected mode, many operations can take place. Some of these operations are as protocol entity as shown in Figure 5-51. Only the RACH control channel does not use LAPDm. lows: entities in upper layers can send messages to their peer entities, the RR sublayer on the network sidi.;:1Il',t;;~t'··~R~-A:-CH, LAPDm serves as an interface between Layer 3 entities and the physical layer (Layer 1). sends system information on the downlink radio channel, the RR sublayer in the MS sends RSS . is a protocol that is used at the data link layer of the OSI model. The purpose of this layer is to ment reports on the uplink ramo channel, the network may use the RR ciphering mode setting procedure a reliable signaling link. Layer 2 receives services from the physical layer and provides services to setting the ciphering mode. the network side RR sublayer may request an intercell change of'1foII1n;i~ion:;(I'1~'11~Y"1 3. change in channel mode (i.e .• coding, decoding, and transcoding modes), and MS c1assmark u may be exchanged. . Only one RR connection can be established for one MS at a time. To release the RR connection; a mal release procedure may be initiated or a radio link time-out procedure may take place. Some of the tvDl!<·,lIw·tg:c·" of RR connection messages are change establishment messages. ciphering messages, handover UlC""I!.S;i''Ii~i::: channel release messages, paging messages, system information messages, and miscellaneous messages. Message

Fonnat

for Layer 3

The format of a GSM Layer 3 message is shown in Figure 5-50. The message consists of a sequence of a ' number of S-hit bytes of information. As shown in the figure, the first field or header, consisting of 4 bits of the first byte, is a protocol discriminator (PD) code that indicates the type of protocol the message belongs to (i.e., CC or call-related SS, MM, RR, SMS, or non-call related SS). The next field of 4 bits is .' transaction identifier (TI) or skip indicator. For every CM message, the TI identifies the p~icular . transaction that is taking place within the CM sublayer. For both MM and RR connection messages field is set to all zeros (0000). The next byte of the message indicates the function of the message the specified protocol and for a given direction (i.e., the message meaning changes depending upon ...•. direction; MS to network or network to MS). As shown in Figure 5-50, additional bytes of information are provided as necessary.

r~~i~
t~
R;!Iidom·'

·.~ocess; .
~! ..;.~::::.' ;. ,-

'(MF'and UA) .'j;',:':

DataLfuk .Pi'<\tOc&l

·o.i{~iuit1;
J>tot9cq]
(MF)

Data Link Layer Physical Layer RACH Byte 1 UA MF

BCCH

PCHand AGCH

SDCCH

FACCH

SACCHand SDCCH

Byte 2

= Unacknowledged = Multiple Frame


GSM protocol entities (Courtesy of Ericsson).

. Figure 5-51 Byte 3

,,
Figure 5-50

r ,

Format of a GSM Layer 3 message.

In the RR and MM connection sublayers, functions related to the transport of messages are defined. task of RR and MM sublayers is to examine the message header to determine the correct routing of message either to or from the correct protocol entity by virtue of its PD and TI codes. Refer to Figure again.

LAPDin used over the Urn interface i~ a modified version of LAPD, the ISDN protocol. LAPD is used' on the GSM Abis interface between the BSC and the BTS. LAPD messages can have up to a maximum of 260 bytes per frame. The LAPD message consists of a header and a Layer 3 message. For. a. transparent message from the network to. the MS, the BTS removes the header information and the remanung bytes of data (251' maximum) are sent to the MS. However, the message is often too long for a single frame on thair interface. Therefore, LAPDm segments the message into a number of smaller messages and these messages are sent over either four bursts or eight half-bursts after undergoing convolutional coding to provide error correction capabilities. More detail will be provided about this process in Chapter 8.

.... LAPDm Operations


LAPDm supports two types of operation on thedatali~: unacknowledged and acknowled~~. M ssages that do not need to be acknowledged are sent via unnumbered information(UI) frames. This Implies that

I:

164 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systnns and Networks


there is no error recovery or flow control operation in place during information transmission. A.ClillIJWI,..,"j edged operation occurs when information is sent within multiple frames. Layer 3 messages are sent numbered I (information) frames. Each I frame must be acknowledged before the next frame may be The multiple frame mode is initiated with the set asynchronous balanced mode (SABM) command, LAPDm adds overhead information depending upon the type of frame to be sent. The different channels use different frame formats. Some of the types of information contained within the frame are as follows: address, information format type, and length indicator. The details of the various fields will not be, discussed here. There are numerous references about LAPD protocol available if reader desires more information about this topic.

GSM and 1DMA Technology '165 with the data link layer (Layer 2) through the various control channels. Additionally, the physical interfaces with other physical units such as speech .coders and terminal adaptors for the support of channels (refer back to Figure 5-49). Furthermore, the physical layer provides services to the radio management sublayerthrough the assignment of channels (i.e., mapping of logical channels on to channels) and monitoring and the measurement reports that are sent to the RR sublayer about quality and RSS; GSM physical layer operations include various channel coding techniques, bit and frame interleavof both, traffic and control channels, ciphering, and burst formatting and modulation for the ssion of information and the complementary functions for the reception of the transmitted informa, The details of these operations will be covered in Chapter B under the topic of GSM hardware. Other Layer 1 operations include the setting of the timing advance as ordered by the network, power ,1;t',,;;;,~onUOl functions, synchronization of the mobile receiver, cell selection strategy, and handover functions.

-.

Service Access Points

The service access points (SAPs) of a layer are defmed as the gateways through which services are Vll"",-U ,jl!?;~:;,l'-"~'~ topics also will be given further coverage in Chapter B. to adjacent higher layers. The SAP identifier (SAPI) between Layer 3 and Layer 2 has a specific value each of the functions on the Om channel. As shown in Figure 5-51, SAPI = 0 for CC, SS, MM and RR sig-: , naling and SAP! = 3 for SMS. Between Layer 2 and Layer 1 there are SAPs defined for each control channel. In the GSM specification, the RR sublayer of Layer 3 controls the establishment and release of the SAPs between Layer 1 and Layer 2. This procedure differs from the OSI reference model where this function is NORTH AMERICAN IDMA ' performed at the data link layer.

Data Link Procedures


Figure 5-51 shows a functional block diagram of the data link layer in the MS. As shown by the diagram only the data link connections for SDCCH and SACCH can terminate at SAPI = 3; all other control chan- " nels terminate at SAPI = O. The diagram also shows the three types of procedures that can be supported for', the control channels. They are as follows: data link procedure, data link distribution procedure, 'and random: access procedure. The data link procedure is performed .once on each type of physical channel that is supported by the SAP!. The procedure examines the frame for the control field arid the length indicator field, The procedure performs segmentation and reassembly of the Layer 3 message. The data link distribution procedure is invoked whenever there is more than one SAPI on a physical channel. The procedure examines the address field of the frame and the type of physical channel to determine the correct data link block to deliver the information to. The procedure also provides contention resolution for various data link procedure blocks on the same physical channel. The random access procedure is used for data links on the RACH. The procedure in the MS formats the random access frames and initiates the transmission of these frames, The BTS receives the frames and provides the appropriate indication to Layer 3.

~I,'"

I.:.

Physical Services Required by the Data Link Layer


The data link layer requires the following services from the physical layer: frame synchronization, error protection and correction to ensure a low BER in the data link layer, transmission and reception by the MS and BTS, respectively, of random access bursts, and a physical layer connection that provides for the arrival of bits and frames in the same order as they were transmitted to the peer entity on the receiving side.'

this time, North American TDMA (NA- TDMA) is deployed mainly in the Americas (North and South America). An interactive map of TDMA coverage is available at the following Web site: www.Jflarneri, cas.org. Presently, there are over 110 million NA-TDMA subscribers, which represent slightly fewer than '9% of the total worldwide cellular users. A large portion of the recent growth in NA- TDMA has occurred 'in the Latiri American countries. There are predictions that NA-TDMA will experience contiriued growth ,'during this decade and despite the continued evolution of the cellular industry toward 3G networks, NA: TnMA is thought to be a technology that will be viable for another decade-however, just not as a 3G ",technology. In the United States, AT&T has announced that it will maintain its TDMA service indefmitely; ,however, AT&T is building a new GSMlGPRS network at Boof1900 MHz. Cingular is also converting to GSMlGPRS and EDGE technology. As discussed earlier, NA-TDMA was developed as a true second-generation cellular s),s(em (recall D'AMPS discussed in .Chapter 2) for use on the BOO-MHz band and then on the 19OO-MHz PCS band. The first implementation of NA-TDMA (i.e .• 2G) does not support packet data transfer. NA-TDMA technology is very similar to GSM but it is not compatible with it since it uses a different timeslot and frame structure 'over the air interface. The specifications for the 3G version of NA-TDMA were published in August of 2001 and are described by the standard known as TIAlEIA-136440-1. The 3G version of NA-TDMA has added an additional air interface standard that is GSM compatible to achieve the packet data transfer rates called for by the 3G standard. Therefore, the NA- TDMA mobile stations will have to be able to handle both air interface standards (i.e., dual band and dual mode) to be able to receive high-speed packet data, The use of GPRS,for high-speed data over this second air interface is a step toward the eventual adoption of one universal 3G standard.

Data Link Timers


There are several system timers and counters used to keep track of the waiting time for the acknowledgement of a previously transmitted message and the number of times that retransmission may take place. The functions and names of these elements can be found in the LAPDspecifications.

TIAIEIA-136

Basics

As already mentioned, the NA-TDMA system is very similar in.its operation to GSM. Therefore, the treat'ment of this wireless technology will be brief and only highlight the major differences between it and GSM. Like GSM, the information transmitted over the air interface undergoes convolutional coding, inter" 'leaving, and so on. However. the air interface for TIAlEIA-I36 consists of six timeslots per frame instead .of the eight timeslots used by GSM. TIAlEIA-136 uses the same identification numbers as AMPS, the ESN, SID, and MIN, but also uses the GSM identifiers introduced earlier in this chapter. The frequency

Layer 1: Physical Layer Operations


The physical layer or signaling Layer 1 is the actual physical hardware, modulation schemes. channel coding, and so forth used to send the bits over the physical channels on the air interface. The physical layer

L 166, Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks GSM and IDMA Technology 167

Table 5-4

NA-TDMAchannel allocationsin the PeS bands. Boundary Number 1 499 501 665 500 668 1165 666 667 1168 1332 1166 1167 1335 1499 1333 l334 1501 1999 1500
Digital Traffic Channels (DTC) Forward DTC Fast ACCH Slow ACCH TRAFFIC Uplink (Reverse DCCH) RACH SPACH

Band
A

Ban4width
(MHz) 15
5

Number oj
Channels 499 165

Digital Control Channels (DCCH)

Channel

Frequency
MS(MHz)

Downlink (Forward DCCH)

Not used
B

1864.980 1850.040 1865.040 1869.960 1865.010 1870.050 1884.960 1869.990 1870.020 1885.050 1889.970 1884.990 1885.020 1890.060 1894.980 1890.000 ,1890.030 1895.040 1909.980 1895.0lO

BCCH Fast BCCH Extended BCCH

SCF

Reserved

PCH

Not used Not used


E

15

41)8
1 1

ARCH

SMS
Channel ACCH-Associated Control Channel , ARCH-Access Response Channel , BCCH-Broadcast Control Channel PCH-Paging Channel RACH-Random Access Channel SCF-Shared Channel Feedback - SPACH-SMS Point-to-Point, Shared, ACKed Channel

SMS
BCCH

Not used Not used F Not used Not used

165
1

165
1 1

-'

" f~
.'),

5-;52 NA-TDMA channel organization.

~::

"

Not used

15

499

, . id d . thr ups· the broadcast control channels, the .digital control channels are further. divi e .mto .ee gro d ACKed channels. Table 5-5 shows a hi f dback and the SMS point-to-point, paging, an , . A th c anne ee ,. 'f the channel function and direction of transmission, s e ~~th:::,C!::~~:~~o:;~::::::~::Ular to the GSM system channel organization with similar names and functionality. . th MS t scan the DCCHs within a cell and, . . the TIAlEIA-136 system requires eo. . powenng up, measurements and a h as hing 'algorithm, select a suitable D.CCH. This hashing the use of RSS kn th paging It itabl candidate DCCHs for the MS through a specific identifier own as e se ec s sui e d . g time the NA-TDMA sysID (PAID) and other cell characteristics. In an effort to re uee: scanmn '1900 MHz b ds . ded DCCH channel allocations for both the 800-and an. the G~~v;~~~:':=:e MS locks on to a suita~le,DCCH it will use broadcast information transby the BTS to .become timeslot and frame synchroruzed.

;.:

i~

allocations for TlAIEIA-136 in the SOO-MHzband are the same as the original AMPS channels shown in Chapter 2 with the same 300kHz channel bandwidths. For TIAlEVI.-136 systems that operate in the 1900MHz PCS band, the channel allocations are as shown in Table 5-4. The channel spacing is. 30 kHz with approximately 80-MHz spacing between base and mobile transmitting frequency. The relationship between channel number and the transmitter center frequency is given by the following equations: TIAlEIA-136 Mobile Transmit Frequency ='O.030N + 1850.010 MHz

TlAIEIA-136 Base Transmit Frequency = 0.030N + 1929.990MHz

TIAIEIA·136 Channel Concept


As discussed in Chapter 2, the D-AMPS system afforded the wireless cellular service providers an option to use already allocated AMPS traffic channels as conventional AMPS channels or as TDMA channels. However, the control channels retained their analog nature. The NA- TDMA system replaces the analog control channels with digital TDMA control channels that are, not surprisingly, known as digital control channels (DCCHs). Figure 5-52 shows the TIAlEIA-136 channel organization. The digital traffic channels (DTCs) are divided into two groups: the forward (downlink) DTCs and the reverse (uplink) DTCs. The digital control channels are also divided into two groups: the forward and reverse' digital control channels. The

136 Timeslot and Frame Details


. Ii· f NA TDMA channels i~ similar conceptually to that used in GSM, but the implementaorganrza on 0 .11b d· d bri fly here two schemes is fairly different and therefore WI e Is.cusslet ned frame~ Like GSM before a 3' 5 56 h th hierarchy of the NA-TDMA times 0 s an. , 5-5 to - s owe. d DCCH (FDCCH)" it is first encapsulated Layer 3 network control message IS sent over ~:=e~ coding and interleaving operations before it a Layer 2 LAPDm frame. The frame under~oes. th timeslot format for information sent as dataduring a timeslot burst As s~own in F~ 5-:53, (S~C) field used for timeslot synchroBTS to the MS on a DCCH co~tam~ a s~nc. onizanon rx. feedback (SCF) fields that carry equalizer training, and timeslot Identification, two shared-channel rfr .nh (CSFP) field used about the status (If RACH and RDCCH channels; a coded supe ame p ase

1, f' !

............. U",u(,ltW" ~I""

rrtretess 1 etecommunications Systems and Networks


Superframe ~ 32 Blocks (0.64 Seconds)

GSM and IDMA Technolcgy 169

(,1

SACCH
."

User information and signaling User information and signaling Burst signaling Continuous signaling

---.-.

Digital Control Channel (DCCR) Reverse Digital Control Channel (RDCCH) Forward Digital Control Channel (FDCCR) SMS, Point-to-point, 'Paging, ACKed Channel (SPACR) PCR ARCR SMSCR Page MS moves to ARCR after RACH operation Short message channel Initialization, exchange IDs, etc, Less time-critical information SMS broadcasts Controls RACH access BS-to-MS BS-to-MS BS-to-MS RACR Used to gain access to system MS-to-BS

FDCCH Timeslot

D~~ or Si~ling~eSSages Being Transmitted. Hierarchy

Undergo Channel Coding and Interleaving Before

ofNA-TDMA timeslots.

Broadcast Control Channel (BCCR)

F-BCCH E-BCCH S-BCCH

BS-to-MS BS-to,M;S BS-to'MS BS-to-MS

Shared Channel Feedback (SCF)

by the MS to find the start of the superframe; two data fields (data) that compose the message; and a RSVD, that is reserved for future system use. As in GSM, there are other timeslot formats' depending the usage (type of channel, direction, etc.), Several additional examples are shown in Figure 5-54. One timeslot has a duration of 6.67 ms. There are three timeslots to a IDMA block and two TniMA,' .• :,'·;,:·· blocks or six timeslots to aTDMA frame. Each TDMA frame has a duration of 40 ms or a transfer rate twenty-five frames per second. A superframe consists of thirty-two TDMA blocks (sixteen . frames) and is therefore 640 ms long. A hyperfrarne consists of two superframes. The first superframe known as the primary superframe and the second is known as the secondary superframe. The information contained in the primary superframe can be repeated in the secondary superframe or the SP ACH and BBCCH Information may be different in each superframe (See Figure 5-55). The number of data bits per burst or timeslot varies depending upon the format used within the timeslot, In the downlink direction the data field is 260 bits in length whereas in the uplink direction, the data field is either 200 or 244 bits length, again depending upon the format of the tirneslot, In GSM, a TDMA frame (equivalent to one physical radio frequency channel) can support up to users simultaneously, In NA- IDMA, a IDMA block supports up to three users at a time (i.e., a user timeslot every three timeslots). Therefore, within a frame, the user receives two timeslots Figure 5-56). Over a traffic channel, the final data rate for compressed speech traffic is 7950 bps;

Abbreviated Timeslot Mode

SYNC

I··

SCF

DATA

CSFP

DATA

SCF

RSVD

Timeslot Format BS to MSon DCCH

Hyperframe

Hyperframe 0 Superframe I Secondary

Hyperframe I S~perframe 2

Superframe 0

F ~ F-BCCH

E ~ E-BCCH

S ~ S-BCCH

R ~ Reserved

SPACH

= SMS PTP, Shared

ACKed Channel

5-55 NA-TDMA supetframe structure.

I:

170 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems an¢ Networks


TDMA-136 Frame

Each User.Receives 1\vo Timeslots per TDMA Frame Figure 5-56

NA-TDMA block

structure.

This completes our brief coverage of the NA-lDMA system. As is the case with GSM, there are ally hundreds of pages of system specifications and recommendations for NA- TDMA. For further of NA-TDMA, the reader should consult -the most recent TIAlEIA-136 standards available www.tiaonline.org. .

QUESTIONS AND PROBLEMS


1. Describe the TDMA frame structure used by GSM cellular. 2. What is the standard bandwidth of a GSM channel? 3. Name the three major subsystems of a GSM wireless cellular network. 4. What is a GSM SIM card? What purpose does it serve? 5. Describe the Um interface, 6. Why are there two protocol stacks (refer back to Figure 5-6) within the MSC node for a GSM system? 7. Name the subcategories of GSM signaling and control channels. ' 8_ Contrast the digital encoding of voice by a typical vocoder and a PCM telecommunications system, 9. Describe the GSM TDMA timeslot. '. 10. Contrast theGSM hyperframe, superframe, multiframe, and TDMA frame. 11.. Describe a typical normal GSM "burst." 12. What is the purpose of the GSM burst training sequence? 13. What is the purpose of the GSM synchronization burst? 14. What is the function of the GSM access burst? 15. What is the significance of Timeslot 0 on channel Co for a GSM system? 16. What is the purpose of the GSM dedicated control channels? 17_ What GSM control channel is specifically tasked with the facilitating of the handoveroperationj 18. How does the GSM mobile station know what paging group it belongs to? 19. What advantages does a GSM half-rate channel offer? 20. Why are there several types of GSM multiframes? 21. The GSM MS roaming number is constructed according to what numbering plan? 22. What purpose does the TMSI number have? 23. Define the "attached" condition for a GSM mobile. 24~ Define the "detached" condition for a GSM mobile. 25. What is the purpose of periodic location updating? ' 26. What is the basic difference between intra-BSC handover and inter-BSC handover? 27. What is the basic difference between intiH-BSCand inter-MSC hand over? 28. What basic functions are located within the connection management sublayer? 29. What basic functions are located within the mobility management sublayer? 30. What basic functions are located within the radio. resource sublayer? 31. What is the function of the various.GSM system timers and counters? 32. Why is a modified version of LAPDnecessary for the Um interface? 33. What is the fundamental difference between GSM and NA-TDMA in the context of access technology? 34. Contrast the required bandwidth requirements of AMPS, GSM, and NA-TDMA 35. What is the first operation performed by a NA-TDMAmobile upon powering up?

MMMnl",i".nirthis chapter, the student should be able to: c the basic concepts and evolution of CDMA technology. the difference between the various access technologies; namely FDMA,TDMA, and COMA. United.States frequency bands used for COMA technology. CDMA network and system architecture. network management. COMA channel and frame concepts. the functions of the forward and reverse logical channels. COMA system operations: initialization, call establishment, call handoff, and power control. the implementations of 3G cellular using COMA technology. introduces another cellular wireless air interface technology known as code division multiple Because of the importance of CDMA as the air interface technology of the future and the of detail included in this chapter, it has been organized into three parts: CDMA system overview, basics, and 3G CDMA., First deployed commercially in 1995, CDMA is a relatively new technol.rrowever, CDMA-based systems are overwhelmingly being counted on to provide the needed to implement future 3G systems and beyond (4G). Part I of this chapter begins with an introthe first deployment of 2G CDMA systems and the subsequent evolution to 3G CDMA systems. this introduction is an explanation of basic CDMA operation, the frequency allocations allowed use in the United States, and CDMA frequency reuse issues. An overview of the present (the initial phase of 3G cellularj network and system architecture is presented next with short of the operation and functions of the network elements included in the overview. Since many network elements have been previously discussed, the emphasis in this chapter is on new and differences in the wireless network due to the use of CDMA technology. A detailed to cellular network management techniques is included also .. to not overwhelm the reader, the second part of this chapter provides a detailed explanation ' CDMA channel concept and the actual implementation details of the air interface signals for technology. Forward and reverse logical channels are described and their functionality within the is explained. The CDMA frame format is alsointroduced and its significance within the system for both forward and reverse logical channels ..With the basic technical details fairly well covered,

172

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks ANSI J-STD-008. Since these systems allowed packet-switched

CDMA Technology

173

..
.-

CDMA system operations are introduced. Initialization/registration procedures are covered and call lishment is introduced through the context of the four states of CDMA mobile station Sophisticated handoff procedures and power control operations that are peculiar to CDMA tec.hncIloi covered in detail to conclude this section . Part Ill of this chapter concludes with an overview of the changes and modifications made" . CDMA (IS-95A) to provide 2.5G (IS-95B) services and the further changes needed to provide . tionality with cdma2000. Cdma2000 channel structure and operation is examined fairly extensivelo. additional information presented about the evolution of GSM cellular to 3G UMTS (a "LJlYJ.rt-m""" tern). Finally. a short introduction to wideband CDMA and other emerging 3G technologies time division multiplexing versions of CDMA is presented.

data service at rates up to 64

known as 2.5G CDMA technology. forms of CDMA are grouped tog'e'iher under the banner of cdmaOne, which is the tradeCDMA Development Group. Figure 6-1 shows a typical cdmaOne network and the standards with the various network components.

IS-634

6.1

INTRODUCTION

TO CDMA

! Typical components of a cdmaOne network.

1-+-l----1
Switch

As outlined earlier in Chapter 2, in a response to the 1988 Cellular Telecommunications Industry tion's (CTIA) User Performance Requirements (UPRs) for the next generation of wireless mobile totally new digital technology known as code division multiple access or CDMA was starting to be oped by Qualcomm Corporation in 1989. This development of CDMA technology continued .into the 1990s at which time it was accepted for use as an air interface standard. During the 1980s, AMPS was the cellular telephone system employed in the United States. In 1989. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) adopted time division multiple access '(TDMA) ogy as the radio interface standard that would meet the requirements of the next generation of systems. However, Qualcomm, with the support of various players in the mobile wireless' ' oped an alternative air interface technology that also met these requirements. In 1992, the TIA Directors adopted a resolution that eventually led to the acceptance of IS-95 in July of 1993 as the

~I
IS-41 IS-124

Other Cellular Services

Wireless Intelligent Network

air interface standard for the digital transmission technologies known as wideband spread spectruJrm;;'it~~~I~~~~t()lutio'nof 3G CDMA first CDMA commercial network began operation in Hong Kong in 1995. Since that time, CDMA s: have been used in both the cellular and PCS bands extensively in the United States and throughout the is the term used for 3G CDMA systems. Cdma2000 was one of five proposals the ITU of the world. CDMA has experienced very rapid growth (see the CDMA Development Group Web site a for IMT-2000 third-generation (3G) standards. As previously mentioned in Chapter 2, cdma2000 www.cdg.org)andispredictedtocontinuethisgrowthasoneoftheprimarytechnologiesforthewidebandenhancedversionofCOMA.ltis backward compatible with TIAlEIA-95-B and provides deployment of 3G cellular in one CDMA form or another (time division CDMA [TD-CDMA). for data services up to 2 mbps, multimedia services, and advanced radio technologies. The iroplesion synchronous CDMA [TD-SCDMAl, multicarrier CDMA [MC-CDMA], wideband of cdma2000 technology is to occur in planned phases with the first phase known as lxRTT (IX· [W-CDMA], etc.). transmission technology) happening over a standard 1.25-MHz COMA channel. The next phase of Unlplelnelltal:ionis known as cdma2000 lxEV (where EV stands for evolutionary). There are two versions xEV: lxEV-DO (data only) and lxEV-DV (data and voice). lxEV-DO can support asymmetrical peak Evolution of 2G CDMA rates of 2.4 mbps in the downlink direction and 153 kbps in the uplink direction. lxEV-DV can supintegrated voice and data at speeds ~p to 3 mbps over an all-IP network architecture. The changeover The first form of CDMA to be implemented, IS-95, specified a dual mode of operation in the 800-MHz cdmaOne to cdma2000 lxRTT has been ongoing in the United States and the rest of North America lular band for both AMPS and CDMA. This first standard defined the mobile station and base station late in the year 2000. Currently, there are several cdma2000 lxEV -DO systems in operation worldrequirements that would ensure Compatibility for both AMPS and CDMA operation. Additional features with more in the planning stage. Again, see the CDMA Development Group's Web site for were added to the CDMA standard in 1995 when IS-95A was published. IS-95A is the basis for many of about the worldwide deployment of 3G cdma2000 systems. Further information about the commercial2G CDMA systems installed around the world The IS-95A standard describes the structure and other 3G CDMA technologies will be presented later in this chapter. . of wideband 1.25-MHz CDMA channels and the operations necessary to provide power control, call cessing, handoffs, and registration procedures for proper system operation. Besides voice service. operators were able to provide circuit-switched data service at 14.4 kbps over these first CDMA ANSI J-STD-008 provided for CDMA operation in the PCS bands. Newer additional features and ties were added and the standard became TIAlEIA-95-B' in 1999 (also known as TIAlEIA-95). updated standard provided for the compatibility of 1.8--to 2.O-GHz CDMAPCS systems with IS-95A

is a multiple,access technology that is based on the use of wideband spread spectrum digital techthat enable the separation of signals that are concurrent in both time and frequency. All signals in system share the same frequency spectrum simultaneously. The. signals transmitted by the mobile

174

introduction

fa

Wirekrs Telecommunications Systems and Networks

CDMA TechnolofJj 175

stations and the base stations within a cell are spread over th.. '," encoded in such a way as to appearas broadb d . .e bandWIdth an n.OJse signalsentire every other of a radio base receiver. The identification and subseque t d od I to mobile or th f n em u ation of individual si al . e use 0 a copy of the code used to origi all' d the si rgn S occur at a receiver, '.",' effect of demodulating the signal inten~~ fi y ~rea ~e slgn~ at t~e tr.ansmitter. This process noise. Since a specific minimum level of . nal e re~elver. w?lle rejecnng all other signals as ' ..•. received signal quality the level of ba k sign d-to-~OIse r~tIo IS necessary to provide for a certain [ Iimi ' c groun noise or mterference fi 0 II' mate y, ts the number of users of the system and h ~ m a system transmissions .• carefully desigued to limit the output f hence system capacity, Therefore, COMA for proper operation, power 0 eac transmission to the [east amount of power ' At this time, it will be helpful to compare the COMA . . multiple access (FDMA) and time divi . lti I au- Interface scheme with the frequency isron mu ~ " -" FDMA , the available radio spectrum is dl·v·ded· IIp e access ("'0\-._ A-,, au- lDteuaces (see Figure , t. .·' " h anne [ fior his or her use. The user confin I tr In 0 narrowband channel s an d eac h user IS given a c '. t es ansmitted signal power wi th . thi h ers are used at both ends of.the radio link to di ti .h " In S c annel, and selective many different channels, The frequency allocat~:n~~~~ o~an~mtsslons that e occurring simultaneously resulting interference is nealigible. The TDMA h Y e reused at a distance far enough away that allocation into timeslots N~w each user t s~ em~ goes one step further by dividing up the timeslot assigned to it. For thi~ case the mubs.[co dlDe Its transmitted spectral energy within the hr . . , mo I e an the base station t I c ornzation, This technique increases spectralefficienc • mus emp oy some type, of time 'COMA, each mobile has continuous use of th f y at the expense of each user's total data out over the entire bandwidth of the allocati .Usi Ire s~tral allocation and spreads its transmitted dh b ion.. sing a umque code for ea h tr . . an tease station are able to distinguishbetweeri si . ~ ansmttted SIgnal, .the quency allocation. COMA can also be combined ith ~~ transmItted sImultaneously over the ..same capacity. WI A and TDMA technologies to increase " , '

.Frelluency
in

Bands

systems can be deployed for use in the existing cellular frequency Class 0) and the personal communications service (PCS) bands (Band Class 1). In the future, systems will also be allowed in the newly released 1710-1755 MHz and 2110-2155 MHz services (AWS) bands (see the FCC Web site at www.fcc.gov for further details about bands). In other parts of the world there are various additional frequency bands (with band de!,igrlaUons given by the COMA standards) available for COMA use including a [ower frequency MHz. When used in the cellular bands, a frequency separation of 45 MHz between the forward channels is employed. The MS transmit frequency band is 824-849 MHz and the BS transmit band is 869-894 MHz. In this band, not all of the frequencies are designated for use by COMA networks. Recall that the FCC requires AMPS service to be supported until 2007. so some are reserved for this purpose. This dual use of the cellular frequency band gives rise to dual-

the United. States. COMA

:rr

1900-MHz PCS band may. be used for either GSM. NA- TOMA. or COMA technologies. Refer' back 5-2 for details of the PCS bands and Table 5-3 for GSM carrier frequencies, Table 6-1 shows the
,

~-

r.,

.• ' '. .', ",

res,po~ldUlg COMA and NA-TDMA PCSchanne[ numbers and ,carrier frequencies, For COMA, with a channel spacing; the chart indicates a total of 1200 COMA channel numbers (carrier frequencies) 60 MHz of allocated frequency. The chart also indicates the NA-TDMA channel numbers. One that there is not a one-to-one correspondence between the COMA and NA- TOMA channel numberor between either of these systems and the GSM channel numbers shown in Table 5-3. , the COMA spacing between transmit and receive frequencies is 80 MHz whereas for NAit is 80.04 MHz and for GSM it is 90 MHz. All this means is that there are possible interference between all of these systems on both the uplink and downlink frequencies where coexisting syslocated. 6--1 CDMA and NA-TDMA channel numbers and frequency assignments for the PCS band (Band Class 1) onGPP2) CDMAPCS Channel Number (N) 0::;N::;1l99 0::;N$1l99 Center Frequency for CDMA Channel (MHz) 1850,000 + 0.050 N 1930 + 0.050 N TDMAPCS Channel Number (N) 1 s N::; 1999 1::; N $1999 TDMA PCS Channel Frequency, (MHz) 1849.980 + 0.030 x N 1930.020 + 0.030 x N

Power

Time

cdmaOne and cdma2DDO

Figure 6--2

Comparison ofFDMA TDMA and C'DMA '.


"

air mte aces.

rf

Frequency (Channels)

For 2G COMA systems one might b . Ii d . "," carri hanne " e IDC ne to state that the freq ", ~ers or c annels is 1.25 MHz. In COMA standards the . uency separation between adjacerit gUlshed from one another. A carrier frequency rna bedi . terms carrier and channel are carefully distinchannels. Each of these channels may carry'nfi y . ,Ivlded by means of codes into sixty-four different, data '.. . I. ormation related to a ser t d di . connection in digital form This distinct' .I para e an tstinct conversation or n into times[ots and each times[~t serves as a 10h IS a Llnot of TOMA systems where each carrier is divided mou dh c anne. nolder FDMA s t th s an ence a source of confusion whe di . th ' ys ems, e two terms are synony,, n iscussmg ese new technologies. "

In an effort to reduce interference issues in the PCS band, the FCC has indicated the availability of a , channel for COMA use by designating the channels in the PCS band as valid, conditionally valid, or not valid for COMA use as shown in Tabl~ 6-2. Table 6-3 shows a listing of preferred COMA channels by PCS frequency block and spreading rate (to be discussed later), These preferred channels are the channel numbers a COMA mobile will scan when looking for service. Note that the spacing between the preferred channels is 1.25 MHz or the minimum spacing allowed between adjacent COMA carrier frequencies. Note also that conditionally vaiid channels 300, 400. 700. 800, and 900 can only be used if the service provider a license for both the frequency block containing the channel and the immediately adjacent frequency block.

Frequency Planning Issues


Because of a frequency, reuse factor of N = I, COMA frequency planning is relatively simple compared to analog cellular systems. For a system that only requires one carrier per base station, that carrier must be

CDMATechnology 176 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks Useable CDMA channel numbers and assignedfrequenciesfor Band Class 1 (Courtesyof 3GPPZ) Table 2. 1.1.1.2-3. CDMA Channel Numbers and Corresponding Frequencies for Band Class 1 and Spreading Rate 1 CDMA Channel CDMA Channel Number 0-24 25-275 276-299 300-3i4 325-375 376-399 400-424 425~75 676-699 700-724 725-775 776-799 800-824 825-875 876-899 900-924 925-1175 1176-1199 1865.UW-18tib.200 1866.250-1868.750 1868.800-1869.950 1870.000-1871.200 1871.250-1883.750 1883.800-1884.950 1885.000-1886.200 1886.250-1888.750 1888.800-1889.950 1890.000-1891.200 1891.250-1893.750 1893.800-1894.950 1895.000-1896.200 1896.250-1908.750 1908.800-1909.950 1945.000-1946.200 1946.250-1948.750 '1948.800-1949.950 1950.000-1951.200 1951.250-1963.750 . 1963.800-1964.950 1965.000-1966.200 1966.250-1968.750 1968.800-1969.950 1970.000-19711.200 1971.250-1973,750 1973.800-1974.950 1975.000-1976.200 1976.250-1988.750 1988.800-1989.950 E f A frequencya;signrnentsfor Band Classl (Courtesy of 3GPPZ) Pre erre d set a fCDM . .

i77

Table 6-2

-Spreading Rate

.F'~eferred Channel Numbers


25,50,75,100,125,150,175,200,225,250,275

Block Designator A (l5MHz)

3 Mobile 3

50,75,100,125,150,175,200,225,250 325,350,375 350 425,450,475,500,525,550,575,600,625,650,675

Validity
Not Valid Valid C~nd. Valid Condo Valid Valid Condo Valid Cond. Valid Valid Condo Valid Condo Valid Valid Cond, Valid Condo Valid Valid Condo Valid Condo Valid Valid Not Valid

D (5 MHz)

450, 475, 500, 525, 550, 575, 600, 625, 650 725, 750,

775

B (15 MHz)

750 825,850,875

(5 MHz)

850 925,950,975,1000,1025,1050,1075,1100,1125,1150,1175

F (5 MHz)

950,975,1000,1025,

1050. 1075~1100, 1125, U50

C (15 MHz)

CDMA NETWORK AND SYSTEM ARCIDTECTURE


chosen from the list of preferred CDMA channels. The same channel should be used by all the base stations throughout the system to take advantage of soft and softer handoff capabilities that are possible with CDMA technology. This topic will be covered in more detail later in this chapter. Additional system capacity can be added by the addition of new base stations or by increasing the number of base station carriers. The latter option is the most economical and therefore most commonly taken route. Due to typically nonuniform growth in the subscriber base across a system, it is very likely that not every base station will have the same number of carrier frequencies. This fact will degrade system operation, since there will be times that soft or softer handoff will not be available because the carrier in use is not available in the new cell. As a general rule, there should be no more than one different frequency carrier across coverage boundaries. Frequency planning in the PCS bands becomes much more problematic if one considers intersystem issues. There are three possible cases to consider. If the two systems are both CDMA, then geographically neighboring systems should not affect one another. However, the pilot phase offset assignments (this topic will be considered later) must be coordinated between the systems. If the second system is either an NATOMA or a GSM system operating in an adjacent geographic area within the same frequency block, the service providers involved will have to coordinate the base station frequency utilization along the boundary between the systems. This process will also include the establishment of a frequency guard zone between the two systems. It should be pointed out that this is not a trivial problem and it will not be addressed at any . . bile s sterns deployed in North America is based upon standards The reference architecture for Wireless t_Uo TR~5 develops system performance, compatibility, interoperdeveloped by the TIA. The TIA Comnuttee d d mmittee TR-46 coordinates the same activities for ability, and service standards for the cell~ar bdanI' an.~oNA_TDMA and the TR-45.5 subcommittee with TR 45 3 subcomnuttee ea s WI. 'fy th the PCS b an.d Th e -. ... k I ly with the 3GPP2 organization to speer e stanb si t h ermore, the TR-45 committee wor s c ose these activities COMA. Furt .' bout visit the TlA We SIte a dards for cdma2000. For more mformatlon a . www.tiaonline.org. . I S-95 CDMA is very similar to the GSM reference architecture pre-' The initial reference architecture for I 95'd d for additional network interfaces that exist d. f TWEIAprovi e . sented in Chapter 5. The a option 0 . odel developed by TR-45/46 is depicted by Figure 6-3. . t m elements This reference m between the various sys e . . (F 6-4) has been enhanced to include even more g The new cdma2000 reference architec~e ~e I : mainly concerned with the evolving structure of additional network access interfaces. These inte aces . , '. ied 00 towar dan all-IPcore network. cdma20 . between CDMA system network elements IS cam As was discussed with GSM cellular: ~essa~~7 TIAJEIA-634-Bisan open interface standard that out through the use of protocols very similar t~sc deals with signaling between the MSC and the (. the A interface), and TIAlEIA-41~D describes over

.178

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks used between the other core network elements

CDMA Technology 179 (MSC, VLR, HLR, AC, etc.), For these other

elements, each vendor's equipment provides compatibility with this latter protocol suite and hence of interoperability with other vendor's equipment. . case of the MSC-to-BSC interface, TIAlEIA-634-B provides for the messaging between these two elements and now allows the equipment used for these functions to be provided by multiple different Figure 6-5 shows the layered architecture specified by TIAlEIA-634-B.
I.. '

Figure 6-3

Initial CDMA (IS-95) reference architecture.

. 6-5

Cdma2000 MSC-BSC interface functional planes (Courtesy of3GPP2). planes.

The A interface between the MSC and the BSC, as shown by Figure 6-5, supports four functional
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

processing

and mobility management

functions occur between the mobile station and the MSC. The

.. of call processing and supplementary services supported over TIAlEIA-634-B include calls origi. ~ated and terminated by the subscriber, call release, call waiting, and so forth. The mobility management :functions support the typical operations of registration and deregistration, authentication, voice privacy, and forth. The BSC passes these messages from the MSC through to the subscriber terminal over the air l"'i.inltertace (via the RBS). The functions of radio resource management and transmission facilities manageoccur between the MSC and the base station. The transmission facilities management operations are .. with the facilities that transport the voice, data, or signaling information between the MSC and . the base station. The radio resource management radio Ll0 ~ operations are concerned with the maintenance necessary to accomplish of the this,

I
I I I I I

link

between the subscriber

and the ,radio base station, the operations

. \.-!-.~AP ----rcoo.'....I...-....--. J---c-.~--.....' dF.•. DI : ..


~_ K

l!Sf
~

Specific Network Eetity


Composite E~tity

and the initiation of handoff operations. As CDMA evolves toward 3G, the 3GPP2 group will continue to update the standards involving the newer interfaces that have been defined for cdma2000 and at some point will supercede the original IS-95 standards. Most of the CDMA system network elements have been discussed in other chapters of this book and the same functionality as previously explained. In an effort to provide continuity within this chapter a overview of these elements will be presented again, with emphasis placed on network elements not orev u)u>a~ discussed. The next sections refer to Figure 6-6 that shows the major network elements of a cdma2()()(] system and Figure 6-7 that shows additional detail of the typical network nodes found

Fr.,
rev,
9911 17

t=~~=! -®~

Collective Entity

Interface Refen:ncePoinl
interfaceloAnothcr

----t.

Ir.stmceofthcSame NctworkEutity Line Intersection

I I

Figure 6-4

Cdma2000 reference architecture (Courtesy of 3GPP2).

180 Introduction to Wi'reless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks

CDMA Technology

181

data calls. Additionally, the lWF node supports circuit-switched data calls by providing internal for connections to dial-up Internet service providers (ISPs). These circuit-switched data calls are the PSTN through the MSC. Today, the lWF typicaHy uses Ethernet for the signaling between .the MSC and for the exchange of packet data between itself and the PDN, In cdnia2000, the data transfer function is augmented by the packet core network (PCN) element.

PacketCore
Interface

1!I0000"',,'

Figure 6--6

Major network components of a OOma2000wireless system (Courtesy of Ericsson).


Base Station System (BSS)

program mandated by the FCC and designed to upgrade the United States" cellular systems, system is incorporated by the COMA system that can determine the geographic position of a subscriber. This mobile positioning system (MPS) is based on the Global Positioning System and is to be used for emergency services, The ability to locate the caller is known as Enhanced 911 1. Other proposed uses of this system capability relate to what are known as "location-based seror location-specific marketing tools. , . Phase 1 of the wireless E911 program, the cellular system must be able to tell a local public safety point CPSAP)the location of the cellular antenna that is handling the emergency call. In Phase 2 first implementations of this location determining system, the MPS uses a form of mobile-assisted d triangulation to determine the latitude and longitude of the mobile within 50 to 100 meters. It is that later phases of this system will be able to lower the system uncertainty even further. The FCC set a timetable for the rollout of this service with an expected implementation by cellular service by the end of 20OS. lias already been much discussion about the idea of "big, brother" knowing one's location via cell phone and it remains to be seen where this technology will lead to over the coming years vis-athe privacy issue. Additionally, unwanted. spam over the Internet and unsolicited calls from :le.lj~m:l.I~ete:rs recently become hot political topics and it remains to be seen whether location-based have will be accepted by the ceIIular subscriber or just become another form of telemarketing or wire'''''''-''''',' spam.

(jnified Messaging/\f>iceMail Service


Figure 6-7

Details of the network nodes found in a OOma20OO wireless system (Courtesy of Ericsson).

-Ericsson Corporation's new cdma2000 systems contain a unified messaging/voice mail service (UMNMS) node that integrates e-mail and voice mail access. This node provides messaging waiting indication using .short message service CS~S) and multiple message retrieval modes including the use of OTMF or either a Web or WAP browser. As shown in Figure 6-7, the UMNMS node connects to the PON and the MSC in

Mobile"Services Switching C~nter and Visitor Location Register


(MSC . ) serves as the between the public switched telePhone network (pSTN) and the b aseng ~ntersubsystem (BSS) Th interface rf statton MSC th . :~:ne:~~l~~~:nt ~f Ca!ISto and f;om the syste~'s mobile s·ubs:ribers. ~dd~=aIl~,~:~~~~~:~e~~;!~~ . ne a nd roammg. Somewofr system e :men.ts, provides the functionality needed to permit subscriber mobility 0 these.operatlOns incl d bscrib . . functions call handoffs and call ro t" , u e su sen er r:glstratJon and authentication, location updating ,' , u mg lor roammg subscnbers. " . TYPIcally the visitor location register (Vl,-R) function is colocated with the MSC Its f .. vide a database containing tern .f .'. . unction IS to proMSC' th rf porary m ormation about registered subscribers that may be needed by the mObil:: ciJ~e~~IY ~rmgi:~~~;~nC~! ~~~oCNI eRratio~ and the provisioning of subscriber services for the OPL' . servIce area.
The COMA mobile-services switchi

IntenA10Tking Function
the early (IS-95) COMA systems, the interworkin functi (IWF) ..' wireless network and the packet 'data netwo k (PONg) As on, n~e IS~e only gatev.:ay between the. r . such, It provides a direct connection to the PDN

II:

The home location register (HLR) and authentication center CAC) are typically colocated in cdma2000 systems. The HLR holds subscriber information in a database format that is used by the system to manage the subscriber device (SO) activity. The type of information contained in the HLR includes the SO electronic serial number (ESN), details of the subscriber's service plan, any service restrictions (no overseas access, etc.), and the identification of the MSC where the mobile was last registered. The At provides a secure database for the authentication of mobile subscribers when they first register with the system and during call origination and call termination. The AC uses shared secret data (SSD) for authentication calculations. Both the AC and SO calculate SSO based on the authentication key or A-key, the ESN, and a random number provided by the AC and broadcast to the SO. The A-key is stored in the SO and also at the AC and never transmitted over the air. The AC or MSClVLR compares the values calculated by the AC and the SO to determine-the mobile's status with the system.

.r
182 Introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks CDMA Technology 183

PPCS and Other Nodes


The prepaid calling service (PPCS) node provides a prepaid calling service using the subscriber's location area MSC. This node provides the MSC with ir.f:irmation about the subscriber's allocated and provides the subscriber with account balance information. The PPCS node is usually ass 'JC"""U prepaid administration computer system that provides the necessary database to store subscriber tion and update it as needed. The prepaid administration system (PPAS) provides the subscriber balance information to the PPCS system. The MSC sends information about subscriber time used PPAS for account updating. In the future, other additional nodes may be added to the system to increased system functionality like intersystem roaming.

.. ily concerned with the completion of voice calls between the subscriber and the PSTN. The ISpnman· . ted d' b t . is basically an extension of the PSTN that services the various ce~s and the associa ra 10 ase.s awithin the cells. The MSC provides circuit swi~hing and provides features such as call charging,
roaming support, and maintenance of subscnber databases.

Radio AccessNetwork
the CDMA radio access network or C-RAN provides the interface betw~n the w:r~~s~:~ ~mnab'S"cJ'vrivb'erwhat is known as the circuit core network (CCN). The ~~ CO~SIStS ~ and of dd su stem components involved with connections to the PSTN for all circuit-switched VOlC~ an. ata ·~e C-RAN can consist of multiple base station subsystems (BSSs) and some form of radl~ netw~r~ (RNM) system. The RNM system provides operation and management (O&M) support or mu lttBSSs.

Base Station Subsystem


A base station subsystem (BSS) consists of one base station controller (BSC) and all the radio base (RBSs)controlled by the BSC (refer back to Figure 6-6). The BSS provides the mobile subscriber interface to the circuit switched core network (PSTN) through the MSC and an interface to the network (PDN) through the packet core network (PCN). There can be more than one BSS in a systein. Today, the 'combination of all the CDMABSSs and the radio network management sysiem oversees their operation is known as the CDMA radio access network or C-RAN.

the acket core network (PCN) provides a standard interface for ~less packet-s . It~hed cnrn,,",VV'vb'etwe!n C-RAN and the public data network (PDN). The PCN provides .the necessary lmk~ the 't kst and from the C-RAN. The pCN typically consists of three main hardware nodes. ne wor 0 th h t (HA) and the packet data .' authorization and accounting (AAA) server, e orne agen '. authenloltdi(e:a(trioDI~S'N). ~8 depicts the elements of the PCN and their interconnection to each other Figure the relationship of the PCN to thePDN and the C-RAN.

Core Network

~.

Base Station Controller


In a cdma2000 system, the base station controller (BSC) provides the following functionality. it is the face between the MSC, the packet core network (PCN), other BSSs in the same system, and all of the base stations that it controls. As such, it provides routing of data packets between the peN and the radio resource allocation (the setting up and tearing down of both BSC and RBS call resources), timing and synchronization, system power control, all handoff procedures, and the processing of both and data as needed.

cnMA

Radio Acces Network (e-RAN)

Radio Base Station


The cdma2000 radio base station (RBS) provides the interface between the BSC and the subscriber via the common air interface. The functions provided by the RBS include CDMA encoding and of the subscriber traffic and system overhead channels and the CDMA radio links to and from the scribers. The typical RBS contains an integrated GPS antenna and receiver that is used to provide timing and frequency references, a computer-based control system that monit~rs and manages the tions of the RBS and provides alarm indications as needed, communications links for the rransmission 01'; both system signals and subscriber traffic between itself and the BSC, and power supplies and environmen- .'. tal controlunits as needed.

PLMN Subnetwork
A cdma2000 public land mobile network (PLMN) (refer back to Figure 3-5) provides mobile wireless communication services to subscribers and typically consists of several functional subnetworks. These networks are known as the circuit core network (CCN). the packet core network (PCN), the service network (SNN), and the CDMA radio access network (C-RAN). The cdma2000 PLMN subscriber access to the PSTN and the PDN through these subnetworks. The organization of the PLMN into works facilitates the management of the system. Figure 6-8 Elements of the cdma2000packet core network (Courtesy of Ericsson), In a cd~a2000 cellular system the packet data serving node (PDSN) provides the needed IP transport , to connect the C-RAN and hence the subscriber to the public data net~ork. The PDSN connects thr h th A _ interface (also known as the radio-packet (R-P) mterface), The PDSN also oug e • 'quater th . t' d c unting nodes In the C-RAN with the home agent and the authentication, au. o~za 10~, an ac 0 . .. ... . tai and terminates secure commumcaUons With the home agent and the capacity, It se~ u~, mam ns, tin' od It further serves as a point of connection to the radio nhenucadon, authorization, and accoun g n es. .. . f iii the IP network and provides IPservice management to offered IP traffic: ~mally, .to a~ ta.te . . ::bile IP functionality. it also serves as a foreign. agent to register network VISitors (this topic Will discussed in more detail shortly) ..

Circuit Core Network


The circuit core network (CCN) provides the switching functions necessary to complete calls to and the mobile subscriber to the PSTN. The major network element in the CCN is the MSC. This portion of

184

Introduclion to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks

CDMA Technoloif

185

The authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server both authenticates and authonzesjjg subscriber device to employ the available network services and applications. To facilitate this AAA server manages a database that contains user profiles. The user profile information will information about quality of service (QoS) for the POSN. The AAA server receives accounting inlornaatiion from the PDSN node that together with session information can be used for billing of the subscriber. AAA server may be configured primarily for billing purposes. If that is the case, the POSNll).ay accounting information to the billing AAA 'server and use a different AAA server for authentication authorization, In the cdma2000 system, the home agent (HA) has the task of forwarding all packets that are for the subscriber device (SO) to the POSN over an IP network. The POSN then sends the packets to SO via the C-RAN and the common air interface. To be able to perform this operation the HAin tion with the POSN authenticates mobile IP registrations from the mobile subscriber, performs registration, maintains current location information for the SO, and performs the necessary packet ing. Packet tunneling refers to the following operation: IP packets destined for a particular SO's pellTl!me.lBt'? address are rerouted to the SO's temporary address. If the SO is registered in a foreign network (i.e., home network), then the SO has been assigned a temporary dynamic IP address by the foreign agent functionality is provided by the foreign network POSN) and this temporary address is sent to the HA. A relatively recent addition to the elements of the PCN is a wireless LAN serving node (WSN). This node provides JP transport capability and connectivity between the wireless network and wireless LAN-' enabled subscriber devices through wireless LAN access points (APs). More will be said about this topic a later chapter. '

maintenance of the network. If the operator at the NOC is unable to clear a trouble or a fault and upon the type of problem, it must be escalated and communicated to someone in the field who have the responsibility of dealing with it. Configuration management functions are used to supadministration and configuration of the network. These functions' support the installation of new elements as well as the interconnection of network nodes. Finally, security management functions accounts and provide the ability to control and set user-based access levels.

Management and Element Management


management platforms provide management of the circuit, packet, and radio networks that the typical COMA system. The circuit core network management system is mainly concerned COMA mobile-services switching center. It provides fault, performance, configuration, software, management functions that support the operation of this particular network element at the level. The computer system used for this function provides an operator with access to one or for the performance of the various functions listed earlier. The packet core network rnanage-' is concerned with the PCN node of the COMA system. Besides the standard functions of fault ~rfonn:ancemanagement, the peN management platform can perform statistics administration, online backup and restore functions, and maintain dynamic network topology maps and databases PCN nodes. The COMA radio access network (C-RAN) management system is concerned with base station subsystems. It provides the ability to configure the radio and network parameters of the BSSs, monitorC-RAN alarms and performance, and install or upgrade software to any network elethe C-'RAN, Additionally, it provides the capability to manage user security and the ability to back restore the configuration of any C-RAN element. management refers to the ability to interface directly with a network element through a "craft" Using element specific software, a technician on-site with a laptop computer or off-site through a . connection is able to interface directly with the specific network element. This type of softwaremanagement is usually performed at a cell site during the initial deployment, installation, of a radio base station and during any necessary diagnostic' testing and troubleshooting if an ;.;,.. ,t., "", alarm or hardware trouble develops with the system,

Network Management System


Modern wireless celluiar systems employ sophisticated network management systems to oversee the·oper-, ation of an entire network. Most service providers have one or several network operations centers or NOCs. that serve as control points for nationwide cellular networks. AT&T lias a NOC that oversees its entire U.S. wireless cellular network located in the Seattle, Washington, area. A typical network management system consists of several layers of management that deal with various levels of the network infrastructure. At the highest level is usually a network management system, then there is usually a subnetwork management system, and then at the lowest level a network element management system. A brief overview of each of these management systems will be given next.

.•

~.,I!",,",-- ommunication .• C

Links

equipment vendors 'are still using legacy channelized TIlE l/Jl copper pairs for connectivity from to thePSTN. Recently; however, COMA equipment vendors have started to add fiber-optic interNe.twork Management deliver SONET signals at data rates of 155.52 mbps as shown by Figure 6-9. Channelized with control information is used over the.A interface between the MSC and the BSC. Between the The highest level of network management gives an overarching view of the entire network including all of . and the RESs unchannelized TIlElfJl is used, Between the MSC and the various network elements the subnetworks that it comprises. This computer-based system usually provides a platform that allows one as HLR, AC, and so on, signaling protocol TIAJEIA-41-0 is used over TIlElfJl timeslots. TllElfJl to monitor the overall network. The system typically provides integrated graphical views of the complete to transport data between the nodes and the MSC. Data between the service nodes and the PON is network and modular software applications that may be used to support the operation and maintenance of carried by Ethernet at 101100rnbps. Between the BSC to the PCN, fiber-optic signals at 155.52 the entire network, and it further provides the means by which operators are able to assess the quality of 'I'JtYbic:ilI.lv converted to Ethernet at 10floo mbps. Lastly, from PCN to PON, data is carried by Ethernet at network service and to provide corrective action when network problems occur. rates, There are basically five functions that a wireless network management system will perform: network most wireless equipment vendors are offering integrated network solutions to service providers surveillance or fault management, performance management, trouble management, configuration manage- . 'lnr'm;~;n" microwave links capable of TIIEI/Jl transport or higher data rates for baekhaul of aggregated ment, and security management. Fault management is concerned with the detection, isolation, and repair of to the PSTN. Several vendors offer high-capacity microwave radio systems that offer OC3/STM-I network problems to prevent network faults from causing unacceptable network degradation or downtime. with the ability to transport asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) traffic. As service providers Using the tools provided by the system, a human operator can attempt to repair the problem from the NOe. their systems to offer 3G COMA services with high-data-rate access, the C-RAN will need to be Performance management functions are concerned with the gathering and reporting of relevant network [Corme(;tedand serviced by data transport technologies that offer higher data rates than T-carrier transperformance statistics that can be used to continuously analyze network operation. Trouble management technoloav, At this point, it appears that ATM has been selected to be the data transport technology functions allow for the display and subsequent description of occurrences that have affected the network which the next generation of radio access networks for 3G COMA systems will be designed. and also provide the operator with the ability to communicate this information to other persons involved

L__

186 Introduction to Wireless TelecommunicationsSystems and Networks

CDMA Tecknalo/JJ 187


text will not attempt to derive the values or properties of these Walsh codes but only describe the of the 64-bit codes and their usage in IS-95 CDMA systems. To that end, each Walsh code a binary combination of sixty-four Os and Is, and all the codes except one (the all-Os Walsh have an equal number of Os and Is. Suffice to say that the sixty-four Walsh codes used in the systems have the unique quality of being orthogonal to one another. As stated earlier, this is exploited to create sixty-four distinct conununications channels that can all exist in the same spectrum. Also, as mentioned before, all other Walsh encoded signals will appear as broadband the CDMA receiver except for the unique signal that was created with the same Walsh code as the receiver uses for demodulation. Figure 6-10 shows the basic principle behind the use of an 8-bit orthogonal' spreading code to create a distinct signal. Note how the use of the spreading the number of bits sent in the same time interval as the original digital signal and hence increases signal bandwidth.

Channelized

code

CDMA Transmitter

CDMAReceiver

Subscriber Devices
Subscriber device' (SO) is a generic term used to describe several types of wireless phones and . devices that perform COMA encoding/ decoding and vocoding operations for the transmission of data in a wireless mobile environment. Each subscriber device has a band or set of radio bands over it can operate and various modes of possible operation. Subscriber devices can be divided into . groups or categories depending upon their applications. Portable devices can operate in _•. ..._.~. ~',~~ or in both bands and can handle the transmission of voice, data, and other nonvoice annlications .. these types of SOs are used by people for mobile voice connectivity first, with the being of secondary importance. Wireless local loop (WLL) devices can' handle the transmissionoi over the COMA system and typically are used with a laptop or personal digital assistant (POA) device for high-speed Internet access. In the near future, the latter type of SO will probably be used vide Voice over IP (VolP) capabilities that will allow wireless video conferencing over either a tablet PC. In the coming years, the typical SD will include additional functionality for multimedia tions and the ability to use any additional frequency bands that might support CDMA services.

\n UnUn UnUnL _. J

Spreading
Sequence

.' nnnnn

JUU UUL

·.··f~~'~f·qBMAJ3.ASIGS.
6.3
:.1
t

CDMA CHANNEL CONCEPT

6-10

The basic spectrum spreadingoperation.

As mentioned in previous chapters, cellular telephone networks use various control and traffic channels carry out the operations necessary to allow for the setup of a subscriber radio link for the transmission either data or a voice conversation and the subsequent system support for the subscriber's mobility. cdmaOne and cdma2000 cellular systems are based on the use of code division multiple access technology to provide additional user capacity over a limited amount of radio frequency spectrum. is accomplished by using a spread spectrum encoding technique that provides for numerous radio that all occupy the same; frequency spectrum. To enable these distinct but same frequency channels. onal Walsh spreading codes are used for channel encoding. Several of these encoded channels are specifically within the CDMA system to provide precise system timing, control, and overhead while other channels are used to carry user traffic.

should be pointed out right away that the forward channels in a CDMA system are encoded differently the reverse channels. The different encoding schemes will be explained in more detail in the following about the forward and reverse COMA logical channels. I\dclitil)nally, two types of pseudorandom noise (PN) codes are used by the IS-95 CDMA system. These types of PN code sequences are known as short and long PN codes. The short PN code is time shifted to identify the particular CDMA base station and to. provide time synchronization' signals to the subdevice so that it can become time synchronized with the radio base station. The long PN code is to provide data scrambling on the forward traffic channels ana for providing a means by which reverse maybe distinguished. These concepts will be explored further in the next few sections.

188 Introdudion to Wireless Telecommunications Systems and Networks


10 summary, for an IS-95 CDMA cellular system, a single radio base station may consist of up four separate channel elements (CEs) that all use the same carrier frequency or portion of the frequency spectrum. Each of the base station's modulated signals effectively becomes' a separate when the digital signal to be transmitted is encoded with a distinct Walsh code. Several of the Walsh are reserved for use with particular forward channels that serve various logical system functions' as presented next. At this time, only the basic IS-95 CDMA system will be discussed. Later, the ~~":c:"_ and improvements incorporated into. IS-95B and then into cdma2000 will be discussed. Chapter 8 ent more detail abont the actual hardware used to implement a COMA system.

CDMA Technology 189


that upconverts the final output signal to the UHF frequency bands. This channel element sigcombined with other forward channel element signals, amnlified, and the composite signal is transmitted over the air interface. . short PN spreading codes provide the COMA system with the ability to differentiate between differstations (or cells) transmitting on the same frequency. The same short PN code sequence is used by base stations; however, for each base station the PN sequence is offset from the sequences used area base stations. The offset is in 64-bit increments, hence there are 512. possible offsets. In a analogous to the frequency reuse plans described for other access techniques in Chapter 4, the same be reused at a great enough distance away from its first use. Figure 6-12 shows but one example method. The use of this offset scheme requires that the base stations used in a COMA system .be time synchronized on the downlink radio channels. This precise timing synchronization is through the use of the Global Positioning System (GPS) to achieve a system time that has the
,i

..:

Forward Logical Channels


~I

I.

i.:

The IS-95 COMA forward channels exist between the COMA base station and the subscriber first CDMA systems used the same frequency spectrum as the AMPS and NA-TOMA systems. the IS-95 signal occupies a bandwidth of approximately 1.25 MHz whereas the AMPS and NA-TOMA tern standards each specify a signal bandwidth of 30 kHz. Therefore. an IS-95 signal will ' approximately the samebandwidthas forty-two' AMPS or NA-TOMA channels. Although the required for a COMA signal is substantial. a cellular service provider is able to overlay an.IS-95 system with. enhanced data capabilities onto an earlier-generation cellular system. The basic spreading procedure used on the forward COMA channels is illustrated by Figure 6-1 shown in Figure 6-11, the digital signal to be transmitted over a particular forward channel is first Exclusive-OR'ing it with a particular Walsh code (Wi64). Then the signal is further scrambled in in-phase (I) and quadrature phase (Q) lines by two different sh~rt PN spreading codes. These short . spreading codes are not orthogonal codes; however, they have excellent cross-correlation and auto-correls tion properties that make them useful for this application. Additionally. it seems that all \yalsh not created equal when it comes to the amount of spectrum spreading they produce. Therefore, the short PN spreading code assures that each channel is spread sufficiently over the entir~' bandwidthi the 1.25-MHz channel. The short in-phase and quadrature PN spreading codes are generated by feedback shift registers (LFSRs) of length IS with a set polynomial value used to configure paths of each of the LFSRs (for additional information about this process see the present dards). The resulting short PN spreading codes are repeating binary sequences that have approximateh equal numbers of Os and Is and a length of 32,768. The outputs of the in-phase and quadrature signals are passed through baseband filters and then applied to an RF quadrature modulator
I Channel Pilot PN at 1.2288 mcps

CDMA base station timing offset reuse pattern.


ChannelDependent Symbols

The initial IS-95 COMA system implementation uses four different types of logical channels in the fordirection: the pilot channel, synchronization channel, paging channels. and traffic/power control . Each one of these types of forward channels will be discussed in more detail in the following

II

Q Channel Pilot PN at 1.2288 mcps Figure 6-11 ' Basic spreading procedure used on COMA forward channels:

il.
?,1·,·:, ' ';~I:

COMA pilot channel is used to provide a ieference signal for all the SDs within a cell. Figure 6-13 the generation of the pilot channel signal. The all-Os Walsh code CWo64) is used for the initial signal on a sequence of all Os. This results in a sequence of all zeros that are further spread using the PN spreading sequences resulting in a sequence of Os and Is. The 1 and Q signals drive a quadrature

190

Introduction to Wireless Telecommunication:; Systems and Networks CDMA Technolot/ I Channel Pilot PN at 1.2288 meps
I Channel Pilot PN

191

AliOs

Q Channel Pilot PN at 1.2288 meps Figure 6-13 Generation of the COMA pilot channel signal. 6-15

UmgCooeM~~:k~~;~i~~~{;r-_'E for Paging Channel


'\

modul~tor. Therefore, the resulting pilot signal is an unmodula . spreadmg code is used to identify the base station and th '1 .ted s~read spe.ctrum signal. The short usually 4-'-6 dB stronger than any othe h I Th .e pi ot signal IS transmitted at a fixed output phase reference for the coherent dem~u~at~ne lle p~lot channel, transmitted continuously, is used nal strength measurements and other signal pov Co a ot e~ channels. It also 'serves as the reference for w€~rcompansons. .

Generation of the COMA paging channel signal.

in the sync, message includes the system and network identification codes, identification ofpagdata rates, the offset value of the short PN spreading code, and the state of the long PN code. Like the pilot channel, the synchronization channel has a fixed output power.

Synchronization Channel
The CDMA synChronization channel is used Figure 6-14 depicts the generation of the shY' (thi . ync my-two Os follOWed by thirty-two Is) is used same short PN spreading code with the Same ff
. 0

'. '. • •. e. system to provide initial time synchronization. ',: roruzation channel Signal In tho w' to s read th . '. . IS case, . alsh code W3264.: t iPede synchromzauon channel message. Again, the se IS us to further spread the signal.
I Channel Pilot PN at 1.2288 mcps

th

paging channels serve the same purpose as the paging channels iii a GSM cellular system .: channels are used to page the SDs when there is a mobile-terminated call and to send control mesto the SDs when call setup is taking place. Figure 6-15 depicts the generation of a paging channel

CDMA there can be as many as seven paging channels in operation at anyone time. Walsh through W764 are used for this purpose. As seen in Figure 6-15, the paging channel undergoes' .",·on,,~ttlrlO,n~1 scrambling operation using the long PN spreading code sequence. The long PN code is generby using a 42-bit linear feedback shift register that yields a. repeating' sequence oflength 242. The channel message also goes through a convolutional encoding process, symhol repetition, and block 1:'IDte,r1ellViIH! before being scrambled by a slower version of the long PN code.
'lrattidl~()tv"r

Syne Message
1200 Channel

Control Channels

bps

Q Channel Pilot PN
at 1.2288 mcps

CDMA forward traffic channels carry the actual user information. This digitally encoded voice or data be transmitted at several different data rates for IS-95 CDMA systems. Rate Set I (RSI) supports 9.6 maximum and slower rates of 4.8,2.4, and 1.2 kbps. Rate Set 2 (RS2) supports 14.4,7.2,3.6, and 1.8 . Figure 6-16 and Figure 6-17 depict the generation of a forward traffic channel. As shown in 6-17, for generation of Rate Set 2 traffic an additional operation is performed after the symbol repe- . block. For a data rate of 14.4 kbps the output from the symbol repetition block will be 28.8 kbps. The li'~punctu.re" function block selects 4 bits out of every 6 offered and thus reduces the data rate to 19.2 kbps, is what the block interleaver needs to see. More details about this operation will be presented in

Figure 6-14

Generation of the COMA ~ynchronizati()n channel signal.

8.
of the CDMA system's unused Walsh codes may be used to generate forward traffic channels. The channels are further scrambled with both the short PN sequence codes and the long PN sequence before transmission. As also shown in Figures 6-16 and 6-17, power control information is transmitto the mobile stations within the cell over the traffic channels, This power control information IS used to

As shown in Figure 6-15, the initial synchron:ization channel . '. '. sync messages undergo convolutional encodi hoi .. message has a data rate of 1200 bps. The explained in Chapter 8). This proeessraises :gf's~ repeunon, and finally block iliterleaving (to be e In sync message data rate to 4.8 kbps. The information

192

l(ltroduction to Wireless Telecommunications Systems·and Networks


Power Control Bits 800 bps I Channel Pilot PN

CDMA Technology 193· however, the system error rate is reduced in the process. The mapping of groups of 6 data bits to a code is very straightforward since there exists a one-to-one relationship between the two. Each reverse channel is spread by a long PN sequence code and scrambled by th~ shortPN sequence The long PN sequence code is derived from the subscriber device's 32-bit electronic serial number and therefore provides the means by which the user is uniquely identified within the COMA system. are basically two types of reverse COMA channels: access channels and reverse traffic/control chanThese logical channels will be further described in the next sections.

COMA access channels are used by the mobile to answer pages and to transmit control information for purpose of call setup and tear down. Figure 6-18 shows the access channel processing for a IS-95 system. As shown ill the figure, an access message at 4.8 kbps undergoes the familiar convolutional symbol repetition, and block interleaving that raises the data rate to 28.8 kbps. At this point; the modulation subsystem processes the signal by encoding every 6 bits into a 64-bit Walsh code. raises the signal rate to 307.2 kcps. The reader should note the use at this time of chips per (cps) instead of bits per second. This is standard notation within the COMA industry when referring the signal spreading process ..Next, the 10ng.PN code spreads the signal by a factor of 4 that yields a chip ::·"'·;:II:':·:,;;"p of 1.2288 mcps. The signal is further scrambled by the short PN sequence codes. Thelong PN code is by the systei\l to differentiate the thirty-two possible access channels.
Power Control Bits
800

IChannel Pilot PN

bps

kcps

Long Code Mask

mcps

Generation of the CDMA reverseaccesschannel. At this point, the COMA signal is applied to an RF quadrature modulator subsystem or IC. However, for the reverse channels, the form of modulation used to produce the final UHF passband signal is slightly dif. ferent than for the forward channels. In this case, offset QPSK (OQPSK) is used instead of straight QPSK . 'as in the case of the forward channels. Note the delay block of one-half of a PN chip (406.9 ns) used in the '.:'. Q path to .implement the OQPSK modulation. This form of modulation allows for a more power efficient . linear impleIllentation by the subscriber device's RFelectronics. As noted previously, any type of savings technique that can lengthen battery life is usually employed when designing a mobile subdevice.

Figure 6-17

Generation of the CDMA forwardtraffic/powercontrol channel for 14.4·kbpstraffic.

set the output power of the mobile on the reverse link and is multiplexed with the scrambled voice bits at a rate of 800 bps or 1 bit every 1.25 msec.

Reverse Logical Channels

The IS-95 COMA reverse logical channels exist between the subscriber devices and the COMA base tion. As mentioned previously, the encoding of digital information on the reverse channels is differently than on the forward channels. The data to be transmitted is not initially spread by a Mnl'affiirJPhw,1'r Control Channels codes; instead, the data is mapped into Walsh codes that then transmitted. Since there are sixty-four, bit Walsh codes, every 6 bits of data to be transmitted may be mapped to a particular Walsh code. . IS-95 CDMA reverse traffic/power control channels support both voice and data at tile two rate. sets technique yields an over tenfold increase in bandwidth since 64 bits are now transmitted for every 6 bits . ': (RSI' and RS2) previously introduced. Figure 6-19 depicts the generation o_f a reverse traffic channel. In

are

194 InrruauctlOn w

••

Wil're~s Telecommunications Systems and Networks


Frame (20 ms) I Channel Pilot PN

CDMA Technobigy 195

307.2

1.2288

RiiteSeQ{[4A kbps) i > . ' WJnfoQ!illtion Biis;12Ql.CBitS, ..•.... 8Iidl) T~il~hs(288 Bits) . Rate Set 2 traffic channel structure.

',,--:,

-_ ,.,,,,,j-,-.

.:

kcps

Long Code Mask

Q Channel Pilot PN at 1.2288 mcps

Figure 6-19

. f the COMA reverse-rraffic charmel. Generation 0

dt te at the input to the orthogonal modulator subsystem will be 28.8 kbps. At either rate set c~e, the ath r:ignal rate i-s307.2 kcps. At this point the signal is processed by a data burst the output of this process ~ ed to eliminate redundant data. The signal is then spread by a long PN . that in essence IS us ran d ormzer and further scrambled by the short PN sequence code. The final signal rate is the standard sequence code. . al bandwidth of approximately 1.25 MHz. , '_ 1.2288 mcps WIth a Slgnh I I'S also used to send information to the base station controller about pilot Th se traffic c anne -'. e re:er control information regarding handoff operations, and ongoing frame error rate channel sl~n.a1 strength , t '1 about these topics will be forthcoming shortly. (FER) statistics. More de ill

CDMA Frame Format


(;

. COMA channels in the forward and reverse direction have been introduced, it is time Now th~t the logical f basic COMA frame and its role in the operation of the system. Similar to GSM to examme th: forrnat~: systems take zo-ms segments of digital samples of a voice signal and encode system operation, CO f a speech coder (vocoder) into variable rate frames. Thus the basic system frame ~em. through the :s~~t IS-95 systems employed the 8-kbps Qualcomm-coded excited linear prediction SIze IS 20 ms. Th od th t produced 20-ms frame outputs of either 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200 bps (Rate (QCELP). speech c ~r ~ overhead (error detection) bits. The actual net bit rates are 8.6, 4.0, 2.0, or 0.8 di Set 1), WIth the ad ~on ~e i3-kbps QCELPI3 encoder, was introduced in 1995 and produced outputs of kbps, A second enc 1 :r (Rate Set 2), with a net maximum bit rate of 13.35 kbps. In each case, the kbPS 14.4,7.2, 3.6, and · se of pauses and gaps in the user's speech to reduce its output from a nominal 9.6 akes U speech encoder m . .d f sil bi tes and 1 2 or I 8 kbps during peno s 0 Sl ence. or 144 kbps to lower It ra .' .' . '. h encoder frame size is used in vanous configurations by several of the logical The baSIC 20-ms speec . . d. ". ili COMA system operation, mcrease system capacity, an Improve mobile battery life, channels to faci tate . . The next several sections will detail these operauons.

Forward Channel Frame Fonnats


'cal channels only-the pilot channel does not employ a frame format. It consists of a Of the four forwar d Iogi '. .k F' c -14 . .' of the system RF signal (refer bac to igure u-- ). The forward traffic channel continuous transDllSslon . fi C • b' . .' . duration and contain a varying number 0 mtormauon Its, frame error control check frames are 20 IDS Jfl. .

and tail bits depending upon the rate set and the data rate. Figure 6--20 depicts a forward traffic frame Set 2 at 14.4 kbps. The forward traffic channel frames are further logically subdivided into sixteen power control groups. Power control bits transmitted OVer the forward traffic channels are raninserted into the data stream of each 1.25-ms power control group yielding a power control signal 800 bps. More detail about the power control operation will be forthcoming later in this chapter. , CDMA forward synchronization (sync) channel provides the mobile or subscriber device with ~ys.conflguretion and timing information. A sync channel message can be long and therefore the message . broken up into sync channel frames of 32 bits each. The sync channel frame consists of a start (SO~) bit and 31 data bits. The start of a sync message is indicated by a SOM bit set to 1 in the frame and 0 'in subsequent frames of the same message. At a data rate of 1200 bps, a sync channelis 26.666 ills in duration (the same repetition period employed by the short PN codes). Three sync 'T"'""lIallU<;;' frames of\96 bits forma sync 'channel superframe of 80-ms duration (equal to four basic 20-ms The sync message itself consists of a field that indicates the 'message length in bits, the message bits, error checking code bits. and additional padding bits (zeros) as needed. The forward paging channels are used by the COMA base station to transmit system overhead informaand mobile station-specific messages. In IS-95A, the paging channel data rate can be either 4800 or :f!~':9,600bps. The paging channel is formatted into 80-ms paging slots of eight half frames of 10-ms duration. half frame starts with a synchronized capsule indicator (SCI) bit that is functionally similar to SOM bit. A synchronized paging channel message capsule begins immediately after an SCI bit set to 1. accommodate varying-length paging messages and to prevent inefficient operation of the paging chanadditional message capsules may be appended to the end of the first message capsule if space is . within the half frame or subsequent half frames. A paging message must be contained in at most '.:two successive slots. Furthermore, the paging channel structure is formatted into paging slot cycles to provide for increased .' mobile station battery life. A COMA mobile may operate in either a slotted or unslotted mode. In the :unslotted mode the mobile reads all the page slots while in the mobile station idle state. In the slotted 1":: .moue, the mobile wakes up periodically to check for paging messages directed to it in specific preas-signed slots (again, in the mobile station idle state). Therefore. slotted mode operation permits the mobile . station to power down energy-consumptive RF electronic circ-uitry until its specific paging slot arrives. The mobile station will wake up for one or two paging slots (if required) of the paging slot cycle. The length of the paging cycle can vary from a minimum of sixteen slots (1.28 s) to a maximum of 2048 slots (163.84 s) (see Figure 6--21 for a diagram of the paging channel structure) as established by the system. Typically, minimal length cycles are employed; otherwise, significant delays in call termination could result. The CDMA system uses the mobile station's ESN to determine the correct slot to use for paging . of the mobile. Further power savings are realized while in slotted mode by the transmission of a _DONE ""'~OOQ"~ by. the base station after the end of the paging message scheduled for the particular mobile. III case of a short message that uses only several half frames of a slot, the mobile can power down . :before the end of the slot to save even more battery power. .

Channel Frame Formats


The reverse traffic channel, like the forward traffic channel, is also divided into 20-ms traffic channel frames. The reverse' traffic channel frame is also further logically subdivided into sixteen 1.25-ms power

196 lntruducliun

~u wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks

CDMA Technology 197 '''~,'COlllr()1 groups. As was the case for the forward traffic channel, variable rate data are also sent on the traffic channel. The coded bits from the convolutional encoder used in the reverse traffic channel repeated before interleaving when the speech characteristics are such that the encoded dila rate is less the maximum. When the mobile transmit data rate is maximum, all sixteen power control groups are nU"lIII!multted.f the transmitted data rate is one half of the maximum rate, then only eight power control I are transmitted. Similarly, for a transmitted data rate of one-quarter or one-eighth, only four or two 'power control groups are transmitted per frame, respectively. As mentioned, this process, termed burst transmission, is made possible by the fact that reduced data rates have built-in redundancy that has been . ap,n,,,·are,a by the code repetition process. A data burst randomizer ensures that every repeated code symbol is transmitted one time and that the transmitter is turned off at other times. This process reduces interferto other mobile stations operating on the same reverse CDMA channel by lowering the average ansnumng power of the mobile and hence the overall background noise floor. The data burst randomizer a random masking pattern for the gating pattern that is tied to the mobile station'~ ESN. 6-c22shows this process in more detail. .
20 rns Frame ~ 16 Power Control Groups Next Frame

,Z

§
~
d
x

....... ,

- -___

-~---- ---

Only 2 Power Control Groups are Transmitted During .1200 bps Frame

The Last 14 Bits of the Long PN Code Used for Spreading the 14th Power Control Group are Used to Determine the Random Mask for the Gating Used in this Transmission Scheme

Start ofPCG 15

CDMA reverse channel variable data rate transmission,

The reverse access channel is used by the mobile station to communicate with the base station. The channel 'is used for short message exchanges, such as responses to commands from the base station, system registrations. and for call origination requests. The access channel data rate is 4.8 kbps using a

198 Introduction

10 Wireless Telecommunications

Systems and Networks


Power-Up or Any Other State

CDMA Teclmolcgy

199

20-ms frame that contains 96 information bits. Each access channel message is typically composed of eral access channel frames. .

Since mUltiple mobile stations associated with the same paging channel may tryto sIlllUllane:ousi access the same access channel, arandom access protocol has been developed to avoid signal/data sions. This topic will be discussed further in the next section about CDMA System Operations.
6.4 CDMA SYSTEM (LAYER 3) OPERATIONS

(,

The reader has already been introduced to the typical generic wireless network operations of call location updating, and handoff in Chapters 2-4 in the context of the common tasks and one,rat.nn. formed by the various elements of a wireless cellular network. Chapter 5 provided additional these traffic cases for the GSM cellular system, The purpose of this section is to present the reader details about how these operations are handled within the CDMA system. Since there is substantial monality between the GSM and CDMA systems for operations that support a subscriber's connectivity mobility and since a great deal of detail was presented about GSM, the emphasis of this section will be the differences between the two systems. It should be noted that the use of spread spectrum technology implement CDMA cellular gives it certain advantages over the GSM TDMA system and thus the Use CDMA technology drives some of these differences. Some of these advantages are better immunity interference and multipath propagation, a frequency reuse factor of N = I,. the ability to perform soft offs, and extremely precise power control. This last feature is important because it affords increased life since the mobile is always operated at the minimum output power needed for satisfactory system formance. Unfortunately, dueto the extremely complex nature of the actual implementation details today's CDMA technology-based cellular and PCS systems, these operations can not be covered in thing other than general terms in a textbook of this nature. As has been stated before, the modem cell is' an extremely complex telecommunications device with an amazing amount of embedded pflDce,ssil~~;' power. In all cases, the details presented' about CDMA system operations in this book will attempt to give' the reader an accurate sense of how the operations are accomplished. A word about the type of documentation used to describe cellular system's Layer 3 operations is'.' appropriate at this time. Due to the inherent complexity of cellular system operations and the multitude of possible operational states and steps involved in the processes required to achieve certain system out-' comes, most system states are documented in flowchart form within the particular standards pertaining to the technology used. These flowcharts indicate the possible steps involved in the performance of various system operations or traffic cases and are usually grouped by being performed by either the mobile or base station. An example of this concept would be the state of a mobile station. When the mobile is active it might be in the initialization, idle, access, or traffic state. These states will be illustrated explained within the standard through the use of a flowchart that would show all the possible actions (states) that could result during the performance of a particular function. As was the case for GSM, the reader should refer to the most up-to-date COMA standards (see www.3gpp2.org) for information about all of the possible CDMA system operations and traffic cases. Again, more detail about COMA data calls and the various message services will be provided in Chapter 7.

MjjbileStation IdleSt3te

COMA mobile station initialization state (Courtesy of 3GPP2).

Receives a Paging Channel Meso;age Re<:pJiring an Acknowledgment or Response; Originates Registration.

a Call

Of Performs

InitializationlRegistration
As is the case with GSM cellular, CDMA system registration procedures are dependent upon the status of the mobile station. The mobile may be either in a detached condition (powered off or out of system range) . or in an attached condition. When first turned on, the mobile goes through a power-up state (see Figure 6-23) during which it selects a CDMA system and then acquires the pilot and sync channels, which allows it to synchronize its timing to the CDMA system. When attached, the mobile may be in one of three states: the mobile station idle state, the system access state, or t1ie mobile stationcontrol on the traffic channel state (see Figure 6-24). . ..
Ends

Use of the

Note: Not All State

Iranslrlons

are Shown.

. 6-24

COMA mobile station call processing states (Courtesy of 3GPPZ):

200 introduction to Wireless Telecommunications Sysums arul Networks


(Enter from Mobile Station Idle State)
(Enter

CDMA Te~hnolo/jj 201


from System Access State)

Note: Transitions Arising from Error Conditions and Lack Orders are Not Shown.

GPM 5 Received a General Page Message

Received Message or Order Requiring an Acknowledgment or Response

Mobile Station Originated Can

and Layer 3 Receives a forward Dedicated Channel Acquir<d Ilndicatiion froml.ayer 2 Receives
Release Order

Ordered by the Base Station, and Layer 3 Receives

• forward Dedicated (Enter Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State or go to Analog) (Enter Mobile Station Idle State)
Channel Acquired Indication from Layer 2

cEnter Mobile Station Idle State, Mobile Station Control on the Traffic Channel State or go to Analog)

Receives Alert with


Information Message

Figure

6--25

COMA system access state flow chart (Courtesy of 3GPP2) .

.......

While in the idle state, the mobile monitors the paging channel (PgC). In the system access state the mobile station communicates with the CDMA base station, sending and receiving messages, as shown by Figure 6-25, while performing various operations dictated by the different system access substates. In the mobile station control on the traffic channel state the mobile communicates with the base station using the forward and reverse traffic channels while in various traffic channel substates as shown by Figure 6--26. As indicated by Figure 6--24, the mobile may move back and forth between these three states depending upon the movement of the subscriber and the use of the mobile. Registration is the process by which the COMA mobile station, through messages to the base station, informs the cellular system of its identification, location, status, slot cycle, and other pertinent information necessary for proper and efficient system operation. For slotted mode operation the mobile provides the base station with the SLOT_CYCLE_INDEX value so that the base station may determine which slots the mobile is monitoring. Classmark values and protocol revision numbers allow the base station to know the capabilities of the mobile station. Presently, the CDMA system supports ten different forms of registration:

"IfSIGNAL_TVPE

is Equal to 'Ol' or '10' or if the Signal Information are Shown.

Record is not Included

Note: Not all State Transitions

6--26

COMA mobile station control on the traffic channel flow chart (Cour;esy of3GPP).

Power-down registraium: The mobile registers when it powers off if it has previously registered in the
currently serving system.

Power-up registration: The mobile station registers when it powers on or' switches between. different ..
band classes or PCS frequency blocks, alternative operating modes, or analog and CDMA operation.

Timer-based registration: The mobile registers whenever various timers expire. This process forces the
.mobile to register at regular intervals.

'.. Distance-based registration: 'The mobile is forced to register whenever the distance between the current
serving base station and the base station where it last registered exceeds a certain threshold. The .